礼敬彼世尊、阿拉汉、正自觉者
律藏中· 《显明精义复注》第三部分巴利
Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa · Vinayapiṭake · Sāratthadīpanī-ṭīkā (tatiyo bhāgo)
5. 波逸提篇复注
514 段
第五篇 波逸提篇巴利
5. Pācittiyakaṇḍaṃ
妄语学处的解释巴利
1. Musāvādasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1 在妄语品第一学处的注释里,讲到“小者”这个词。这里有人说:“‘小’这个词是‘多’的同义词。因为数量多,所以这些就叫作小者。”其中“于彼处”是指在那些九品当中,或者是指在那些小者当中。为了说明用一种理由掩盖另一种理由,他举了“色无常”等话。承认“色无常”之后,在说明理由时,他说“应知故”。当别人质问“如果是这样,涅槃也会变成无常”时,为了掩盖那个理由,他又说出另一个理由“由生法故”。巴利
1. Musāvādavaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpade khuddakānanti ettha ‘‘khuddaka-saddo bahu-saddapariyāyo . Bahubhāvato imāni khuddakāni nāma jātānī’’ti vadanti. Tatthāti tesu navasu vaggesu, tesu vā khuddakesu. Kāraṇena kāraṇantarapaṭicchādanameva vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘rūpaṃ anicca’’ntiādimāha. Rūpaṃ aniccanti paṭijānitvā tattha kāraṇaṃ vadanto ‘‘jānitabbato’’ti āha. ‘‘Yadi evaṃ nibbānassapi aniccatā āpajjatī’’ti parena vutto taṃ kāraṇaṃ paṭicchādetuṃ puna ‘‘jātidhammato’’ti aññaṃ kāraṇaṃ vadati.
本来应该说“sampajānaṃ musā bhāsatī”,却成了“sampajāna musā bhāsatī”,这是省略了鼻音的表述,所以解释说“jānanto musā bhāsatī”。巴利
‘‘Sampajānaṃ musā bhāsatī’’ti vattabbe sampajāna musā bhāsatīti anunāsikalopena niddesoti āha ‘‘jānanto musā bhāsatī’’ti.
2 已经知道、并且正在知道的情况下说妄语,是指在开口之前就已经知道,在说出口的那一刻也仍然知道,这时说妄语。这里所说的“说”,是指把不真实的事说成真实,或者把真实的事说成不真实,通过身体或言语做出让对方理解的举动。“sampajānamusāvāde”这个形式是处格,表示原因,所以,凡是明知故犯地说妄语的人,以这个为特征、以这个为原因、以这个为条件,就构成波逸提罪。在这里以及其他类似的地方,应当这样理解其含义。巴利
2.Jānitvā jānantassa ca musā bhaṇaneti pubbabhāgepi jānitvā vacanakkhaṇepi jānantassa musā bhaṇane. Bhaṇanañca nāma idha abhūtassa vā bhūtataṃ bhūtassa vā abhūtataṃ katvā kāyena vā vācāya vā viññāpanapayogo. Sampajānamusāvādeti ca nimittatthe bhummavacanaṃ, tasmā yo sampajāna musā vadati, tassa taṃnimittaṃ taṃhetu tappaccayā pācittiyaṃ hotīti evamettha aññesu ca īdisesu attho veditabbo.
3 以欺骗意图说出的话,就是“相违语”,也就是带着欺骗目的而现起的心。因此说“把相违的心放在前面而说”。用这个来说,就是“语”,也就是能发起言说的思。因此说“邪语……思”。“种种差别之语”就是分成许多不同种类。这样,通过第一句,应当知道已经说明了纯粹只是思……等等。用这一点来说明:纯粹只是思,或者纯粹只是声音,或者纯粹只是表知,都不叫妄语;与表知和声音结合在一起、能发起它们的思,才是妄语。“以眼未执取之所缘”,就是依靠眼识而没有执取到的所缘。因为鼻等三根能执取现前之境的缘故,所以说“像用三根绑成一束一样”。“以眼见”这种说法,就像“用弓射”等说法一样,是世间普遍通行的表达,所以说“以粗显的道理”。巴利
3. Visaṃvādenti etenāti visaṃvādanaṃ, vañcanādhippāyavasappavattaṃ cittaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘visaṃvādanacittaṃ purato katvā vadantassā’’ti. Vadati etāyāti vācā, vacanasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā. Tenāha ‘‘micchāvācā…pe… cetanā’’ti. Pabhedagatā vācāti anekabhedabhinnā. Evaṃ paṭhamapadena suddhacetanā…pe… kathitāti veditabbāti iminā imaṃ dīpeti – suddhacetanā vā suddhasaddo vā suddhaviññatti vā musāvādo nāma na hoti, viññattiyā saddena ca sahitā taṃsamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā musāvādoti. Cakkhuvasena aggahitārammaṇanti cakkhusannissitena viññāṇena aggahitamārammaṇaṃ. Ghānādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ indriyānaṃ sampattavisayaggāhakattā vuttaṃ ‘‘tīhi indriyehi ekābaddhaṃ viya katvā’’ti. ‘‘Dhanunā vijjhatī’’tiādīsu viya ‘‘cakkhunā diṭṭha’’nti ayaṃ vohāro loke pākaṭoti āha ‘‘oḷārikeneva nayenā’’ti.
11 没有经过考察,就是没有仔细调查。没有把握,就是没有作出判断。因为愚钝,就是因为无知。套上木车离开,意思是套好木车后坐在上面走了。他将会去了,因为这样断定之后才说的,所以构成妄语。不过有些人说:因为说了正在游戏,这样说的话就犯恶说罪。这种说法不应采纳。因为只有用出身等十种骂人的事,出于戏弄之心而说的,才叫恶说。确实如此说过:巴利
11.Avīmaṃsitvāti anupaparikkhitvā. Anupadhāretvāti avinicchinitvā. Jaḷattāti aññāṇatāya. Dārusakaṭaṃ yojetvā gatoti dārusakaṭaṃ yojetvā tattha nisīditvā gatoti adhippāyo. Gato bhavissatīti tatheva sanniṭṭhānaṃ katvā vuttattā musāvādo jāto. Keci pana ‘‘keḷiṃ kurumānoti vuttattā evaṃ vadanto dubbhāsitaṃ āpajjatī’’ti vadanti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ . Jātiādīhiyeva hi dasahi akkosavatthūhi davakamyatāya vadantassa dubbhāsitaṃ vuttaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ –
以出身等来称呼殊胜者为低劣,或以殊胜者为低劣。
以正直的方式表达,若出于戏弄而说错话,就犯恶说。巴利
‘‘Hīnukkaṭṭhehi ukkaṭṭhaṃ, hīnaṃ vā jātiādihi; Ujuṃ vāññāpadesena, vade dubbhāsitaṃ davā’’ti.
因为不取“心识较少的状态”而只取“较多的状态”来说,所以说“全村都是油”这类话也构成妄语。“令行”意思是让他们靠近、使他们接受。以欺骗心为主导,想用欺骗的心说出某个意思,并对那个人作出让他理解的举动,这里就有这两个构成条件。为了宣称上人法而说妄语,犯波罗夷;以没有根据的波罗夷罪诽谤他人,犯僧残;以僧残罪诽谤他人,犯波逸提;以行为败坏来诽谤他人,犯恶作;用“住在你精舍里的那个人”这类迂回说法,为了宣称上人法,如果对方听懂而说妄语,犯偷兰遮;如果对方没听懂,犯恶作;只是单纯说妄语,这里说犯波逸提。巴利
Cittena thokatarabhāvaṃyeva aggahetvā bahubhāvaṃyeva gahetvā vuttattā ‘‘gāmo ekatelo’’tiādināpi musāvādo jāto. Cāresunti upanesuṃ. Visaṃvādanapurekkhāratā, visaṃvādanacittena yamatthaṃ vattukāmo, tassa puggalassa viññāpanapayogo cāti imānettha dve aṅgāni . Uttarimanussadhammārocanatthaṃ musā bhaṇantassa pārājikaṃ, amūlakena pārājikena anuddhaṃsanatthaṃ saṅghādiseso, saṅghādisesena anuddhaṃsanatthaṃ pācittiyaṃ, ācāravipattiyā dukkaṭaṃ, ‘‘yo te vihāre vasatī’’tiādipariyāyena uttarimanussadhammārocanatthaṃ paṭivijānantassa musā bhaṇite thullaccayaṃ, appaṭivijānantassa dukkaṭaṃ, kevalaṃ musā bhaṇantassa idha pācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ.
2. 粗恶语学处解释巴利
2. Omasavādasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
12 第十二段:因为言语像刺入耳朵一样刺耳,说的是让人不喜欢的话,听起来就像在扎耳朵,所以经文说“omasanti 就是 ovijjhanti(刺入)”。“padhaṃsenti”的意思是压倒、制服。巴利
12. Dutiye kaṇṇakaṭukatāya amanāpaṃ vadantā kaṇṇesu vijjhantā viya hontīti āha ‘‘omasantīti ovijjhantī’’ti. Padhaṃsentīti abhibhavanti.
13 13. “菩萨当时是”的意思是:那时菩萨名叫欢喜牛王。这是用现在时表达过去的意思,或者是因为动词时态的选择不确定,而由邻近的词语推知是过去。“他察觉”就是知道:“这是不可意的。”“在树下给予支撑物”就是给予支撑物。把先前安立的辐所立之处,重新安在同一辐上:也就是先前辐端垂直向下立在地面的那个位置,再次翻转同一根辐,使它变成辐端向下的状态;或者说,把先前立在地面的轮辋部分翻转之后,再重新立在地面上。“松弛造作”就是松弛的行为。巴利
13.Bodhisatto tena samayena hotīti tena samayena bodhisatto nandivisālo nāma ahosīti attho. Atītatthe vattamānavacanaṃ, kiriyākālavacanicchāya vā vattamānappayogo saddantarasannidhānena bhūtatāvagamo siyāti. Paccesīti ‘‘amanāpaṃ ida’’nti aññāsi. Heṭṭhārukkhe datvāti upatthambhake datvā. Pubbe patiṭṭhitārappadesaṃ puna are patteti pubbe ujukaṃ heṭṭhāmukhaṃ patiṭṭhitaarassa bhūmippadesaṃ puna tasmiṃyeva are parivattetvā heṭṭhāmukhabhāvena sampatte, paṭhamaṃ bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhitanemippadese parivattetvā puna bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhiteti vuttaṃ hoti. Sithilakaraṇanti sithilakiriyā.
15 “先前”是指在事情发生的时候说的。“木匠活”就是木匠的工作。“石工活”就是石匠的工作。“手印计数”就是只靠弯手指来数数。像脚趾、纹路这些,按九数进位法计数,叫无缺计数。用“等”字,还包括了按合计、产生、扣除、分割等方式进行的整体计数。对这种方法熟练的人,即使看见一棵树,也能知道“这里有多少片叶子”。“yabha methuna”这个说法,是把 ya 音和 bha 音合在一起,所以成了不合法的说法。巴利
15.Pubbeti aṭṭhuppattiyaṃ. Tacchakakammanti vaḍḍhakīkammaṃ. Koṭṭakakammanti vā pāsāṇakoṭṭakakammaṃ . Hatthamuddāgaṇanāti aṅgulisaṅkoceneva gaṇanā. Pādasikamilakkhakādayo viya navantavasena gaṇanā acchiddakagaṇanā. Ādi-saddena saṅkalanapaṭuppādanavoklanabhāgahārādivasena pavattā piṇḍagaṇanā gahitā. Yassa sā paguṇā hoti, so rukkhampi disvā ‘‘ettakāni ettha paṇṇānī’’ti jānāti. Yabha methuneti vacanato ya-kāra bha-kāre ekato yojite asaddhammavacanaṃ hoti.
16-26 16-26. “应让他做忏悔”的意思是:应当用波逸提罪来处置。因为像“极卑贱的旃陀罗”这类特别粗恶的词,在律典原文中已经出现了,所以包含在内。但“你是贼”这类话,因为在律典原文中无论以什么方式都没有出现,所以说是恶作罪。“以戏弄为目的”是对前面那个词的含义解释。老师们说:即使律典原文中没有说,但“用出身等骂人的事由来在背后骂人,因为事由没有差别,所以和恶作罪一样;同样,以戏弄的意图在背后说,也还是恶语罪”。这里“一切有情”,也应该包括能理解词义、有觉知能力的畜生。巴利
16-26.Āpattiyākāretabboti pācittiyena kāretabbo upasaggādimattavisiṭṭhānaṃ aticaṇḍālādipadānaṃ pāḷiyaṃ āgatesuyeva saṅgahitattā. Corosītiādīnaṃ pana kenaci pariyāyena pāḷiyaṃ anāgatattā dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ. Hasādhippāyatāti purimapadassa atthavivaraṇaṃ. Pāḷiyaṃ avuttepi ‘‘jātiādīhi akkosavatthūhi parammukhā akkosantassa vatthūnaṃ anaññabhāvato yathā dukkaṭaṃ, tathā davakamyatāya parammukhā vadantassapi dubbhāsitamevā’’ti ācariyā vadanti. Sabbasattāti ettha vacanatthavijānanapakatikā tiracchānagatāpi gahetabbā.
35 第35条:如果一个人以教诫为先,站在这种立场上说话,因为心念转变很快,所以即使中间生起了忿怒,也无犯。这里一共有四个构成要件:被他辱骂的人是已受具足戒者;不是借别的借口,而是用出身等来辱骂;知道“他在骂我”;不具备以实义为先等条件。巴利
35. Anusāsanipurekkhāratāya ṭhatvā vadantassa cittassa lahuparivattibhāvato antarā kope uppannepi anāpatti. Yaṃ akkosati, tassa upasampannatā, anaññāpadesena jātiādīhi akkosanaṃ, ‘‘maṃ akkosatī’’ti jānanā, atthapurekkhāratādīnaṃ abhāvatāti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni.
3. 离间语学处解释巴利
3. Pesuññasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
36 第三项学处中,“已生起争吵”是指他们之间已经发生了争吵。“私下和解”是指在暗中调和。“已生起斗诤”是指他们之间已经发生了争吵,并且通过动手拉扯等方式闹到了顶点。“已陷入争论”是指陷入了不犯戒的对立言论之争。“诤论之言”是指会导致争执的言论。“离间”就是挑拨,意思是破坏和合的有情,使他们分裂。离间语就是离间。或者说,具备这种言语的人就是离间者,他的行为就是离间。这里又依据“令亲爱空无之语”这一词源解释来说明含义:因为它使亲爱之情空无,所以叫离间语。巴利
36. Tatiye bhaṇḍanaṃ jātaṃ etesanti bhaṇḍanajātā. Sammantananti raho saṃsandanaṃ. Hatthaparāmāsādivasena matthakaṃ patto kalaho jāto etesanti kalahajātā. Anāpattigāmikaṃ viruddhavādabhūtaṃ vivādaṃ āpannāti vivādāpannā. Viggahasaṃvattanikā kathā viggāhikakathā. Pisatīti pisuṇā, vācā, samagge satte avayavabhūte vagge bhinne karotīti attho. Pisuṇā eva pesuññaṃ. Tāya vācāya vā samannāgato pisuṇo, tassa kammaṃ pesuññaṃ. Piyabhāvassa suññakaraṇavācanti iminā pana ‘‘piyasuññakaraṇato pisuṇā’’ti niruttinayena atthaṃ vadati.
在这里也应知道:按照“以十种方式传达离间语”这句话,只有以十种骂詈事由传达离间语,才犯波逸提。但如果是以律典之外的说法,比如“盗贼”等来传达,那就只犯恶作。他们说:“如果对方并不是骂詈的对象,而是出于贪爱想讨好,去传达离间的话或行为,虽然依这条学处看不出有犯,但在这里仍然应当算作恶作。”这里有三项构成条件:比丘听到有人以出身等非托借其他借口骂詈后,再向比丘传达;具有贪爱讨好或离间意图中的任何一种;对方知道。巴利
Idhāpi ‘‘dasahākārehi pesuññaṃ upasaṃharatī’’ti vacanato dasavidhaakkosavatthuvaseneva pesuññaṃ upasaṃharantassa pācittiyaṃ. Pāḷimuttakānaṃ corotiādīnaṃ vasena pana dukkaṭamevāti veditabbaṃ . ‘‘Anakkosavatthubhūtaṃ pana pesuññakaraṃ tassa kiriyaṃ vacanaṃ vā piyakamyatāya upasaṃharantassa kiñcāpi iminā sikkhāpadena āpatti na dissati, tathāpi dukkaṭenettha bhavitabba’’nti vadanti. Jātiādīhi anaññāpadesena akkosantassa bhikkhuno sutvā bhikkhussa upasaṃharaṇaṃ, piyakamyatābhedādhippāyesu aññataratā, tassa vijānanāti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
4. 逐句法学处释巴利
4. Padasodhammasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
45 第四项里,“一起”是指和未受具足戒的人一起。前一句和后一句相似,这里说的“无常”一词,和“色无常”里的“无常”一词相似,也就是在“受无常”里的那个“无常”一词。字聚,是指还没有区分词尾的字聚。字和随字聚为句,是指带有词尾变化的句。取了带有词尾变化的句之后,就说第一句就是句,第二句是随句。巴利
45. Catutthe ekatoti anupasampannena saddhiṃ. Purimabyañjanena sadisaṃ pacchābyañjananti ‘‘rūpaṃ anicca’’nti ettha anicca-saddena sadisaṃ ‘‘vedanā aniccā’’ti ettha anicca-saddaṃ vadati. Akkharasamūhoti avibhattiko akkharasamūho. Akkharānubyañjanasamūho padanti vibhattiantaṃ padamāha. Vibhattiantameva padaṃ gahetvā ‘‘paṭhamapadaṃ padameva, dutiyaṃ anupada’’nti vuttaṃ.
所谓“一句”,是指偈颂里的一句。“按句数计算”,就是按偈颂的句数来算。“没有达到”,是指没有一起念完。“ru”是“使落下”的意思,这里因为增音而说成带鼻音,应当知道这是把复合辅音前的音节缩成短音。因此说“只是‘rū’这个音而已”。在这里,如果有人对沙弥说“诵‘色无常’”,他要是没发“rū”音,而把“ru”念成短音,那就成了念别的内容,所以不犯戒。照这样推,在“受无常”里,只要念了“无常”这个词,就算犯戒,应当知道也是这样。这个道理就是:只念一个字就停下来。比如有人要求念“诸法意先行”,他只念了“ma”这个音就停住。要是有人要求念“如是我闻”等经文,他只念了“e”这个音就停住,那就按字犯波逸提;要是念了不完整的句子就停住,也按随字犯波逸提。在几句当中,如果漏掉第一句,就以第二随句犯波逸提。巴利
Ekaṃ padanti gāthāpadaṃ sandhāya vadati. Padagaṇanāyāti gāthāpadagaṇanāya. Apāpuṇitvāti saddhiṃ akathetvā. Runti opātetīti ettha anunāsiko āgamavasena vutto, saṃyogapubbassa rassattaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘rū-kāramattamevā’’ti. Ettha ca ‘‘rūpaṃ aniccanti bhaṇa sāmaṇerā’’ti vuccamāno sace rū-kāraṃ avatvā ru-iti rassaṃ katvā vadati, aññaṃ bhaṇitaṃ nāma hoti, tasmā anāpatti. Evañca katvā ‘‘vedanā aniccā’’ti etthāpi anicca-saddamatteneva āpatti hotīti veditabbaṃ. Esa nayoti ekamevakkharaṃ vatvā ṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Manopubbaṅgamā dhammā’’ti vuccamāno hi ma-kāramattameva vatvā tiṭṭhati. ‘‘Evaṃ me suta’’ntiādisuttaṃ bhaṇāpiyamāno e-kāraṃ vatvā tiṭṭhati ce, anvakkharena pācittiyaṃ, aparipuṇṇapadaṃ vatvā ṭhite anubyañjanena. Padesu ekaṃ paṭhamapadaṃ virajjhati, dutiyena anupadena pācittiyaṃ.
《无秽经》(中部1.57等)、《正见经》(中部1.89等)和《大问答经》(中部1.449等)是法军将(舍利弗)所说的;《推论经》(中部1.181等)是大目犍连长老所说的;《小问答经》(中部1.460等)是法施长老尼所说的。独觉佛所说的也归入佛所说的范围内。“依止注疏”是指之前用摩揭陀语说出、已收入法集的注疏。“现在也说”是指:比如“就像名叫豹的(野兽),藏起来捕捉鹿”(弥兰王问经6.1.5)这样,已收入法集的注疏之语也应当采用。“依止巴利(律典)”是指像“猕猴、跋耆子等”(波罗提木叉66)这样只出现在律典原文中的内容。“依止还灭”是指依止涅槃。但通常也应当取“依止还灭”的意思,所以说“虽然也”等话。“长老的”是指那先长老的。道论等论著。本来应当说“以字母(字)教诵,每个字母都犯波逸提罪”,但律典原文中说的是“以字教诵,每字犯波逸提罪”。巴利
Anaṅgaṇasuttaṃ (ma. ni. 1.57 ādayo) sammādiṭṭhisuttaṃ (ma. ni. 1.89 ādayo) mahāvedallañca (ma. ni. 1.449 ādayo) dhammasenāpatinā bhāsitaṃ, anumānasuttaṃ (ma. ni. 1.181 ādayo) mahāmoggallānattherena, cūḷavedallasuttaṃ (ma. ni. 1.460 ādayo) dhammadinnāya theriyā bhāsitaṃ. Paccekabuddhabhāsitampi buddhabhāsiteyeva saṅgahaṃ gacchati. Aṭṭhakathānissitoti pubbe magadhabhāsāya vuttaṃ dhammasaṅgahāruḷhaṃ aṭṭhakathaṃ sandhāya vadati. Idānipi ‘‘yathāpi dīpiko nāma, nilīyitvā gaṇhate mige’’ti (mi. pa. 6.1.5) evamādikaṃ saṅgahāruḷhaṃ aṭṭhakathāvacanaṃ gahetabbanti vadanti. Pāḷinissitoti ‘‘makkaṭī vajjiputtā cā’’tievamādinā (pārā. 66) pāḷiyaṃyeva āgato. Vivaṭṭūpanissitanti nibbānupanissitaṃ. Vivaṭṭanissitaṃ pana sāmaññato gahetabbanti āha ‘‘kiñcāpī’’tiādi. Therassāti nāgasenattherassa. Maggakathādīni pakaraṇāni. ‘‘Akkharena vāceti, akkharakkhare āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti vattabbe ‘‘akkharāya vāceti, akkharakkharāya āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ.
48 48. 和未受具足戒的人一起诵念,不算犯戒——这是说,和未受具足戒的人坐在一起学习诵念时,不算犯戒。年少比丘坐着……(中略)……念诵时不算犯戒。这里说的是,在两人都站着或都坐着的情况下,受具足戒的人心想“我在念诵”而念诵,就完全不算犯戒。“舍去近行”是指离开众会边缘十二肘的距离。即使心想“我坐着教诵”而念诵,因为已经离开了近行的范围而且坐着,所以不算犯戒。但如果坐在远处,心想“我在教诵”,并且分别作意而念诵,那就确实犯戒了。“一只脚不来”是指先前熟练的经文后来想不起来了。对这样的人说“你这样说吧”,然后一起念诵,不算犯戒。“Opātetī”是指一起说话。这里其余的内容浅显易懂。未受具足戒的状态、以分句方式教诵所说特征之法、以及一起念诵,是这里的三要素。巴利
48.Anupasampannena saddhiṃ gaṇhantassa anāpattīti anupasampannena saha nisīditvā uddesaṃ gaṇhantassa anāpatti vuttā. Daharabhikkhu nisinno…pe… bhaṇato anāpattīti ettha dvīsupi ṭhitesu nisinnesu vā upasampannassa bhaṇāmīti bhaṇantassa anāpattiyeva. Upacāraṃ muñcitvāti parisapariyantato dvādasahatthaṃ muñcitvā. ‘‘Nisinne vācemī’’ti bhaṇantassapi upacāraṃ muñcitvā nisinnattā anāpatti. Sace pana dūre nisinnampi vācemīti visuṃ sallakkhetvā bhaṇati, āpattiyeva. Eko pādo na āgacchatīti pubbe paguṇoyeva pacchā asarantassa na āgacchati, taṃ ‘‘evaṃ bhaṇāhī’’ti ekato bhaṇantassa anāpatti. Opātetīti saddhiṃ katheti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Anupasampannatā, vuttalakkhaṇadhammaṃ padaso vācanatā, ekato bhaṇanañcāti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
5. 同宿学处注释巴利
5. Sahaseyyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
49-50 49-50. 第五学处中,“vikūjamānā”是指呻吟的人,“kākacchamānā”是指哭泣的人。这里或许是在举出实例。“Tena nu kho pātita”(他是否因此堕落?)——因为这是以提问的方式说出来的,所以不构成妄语。不过有些人说:“以疑惑的方式说的话,不算妄语,所以才这样说。”“Santikaṃ agantvā”(没有走到近处)是指怀着这样的想法而没有去:“凡是他们不允许的,对他们来说也不允许。”巴利
49-50. Pañcame vikūjamānāti nitthunantā. Kākacchamānāti rodantā. Tatridaṃ vatthunidassanaṃ vā. Tena nu kho pātitanti pucchāvasena kathitattā natthi musāvādo. Keci pana ‘‘sandehavasena vacanaṃ musā nāma na hoti, tasmā evaṃ vutta’’nti vadanti. Santikaṃ agantvāti ‘‘yaṃ etesaṃ na kappati, taṃ tesampi na kappatī’’ti adhippāyena agantvā.
51 51. 关于“二夜三夜”这句:应当知道,这里只是为了言辞顺口,才取了“二夜”的说法。因为如果允许同宿三夜,那“二夜”根本就不用再提,所以“二夜”并不是单独拿来搭配的。正因如此,他才说“世尊为了摄受沙弥,开许超过二夜三夜,也就是三夜的豁免”。或者,说“二夜”是为了显示三夜是不间断的。因为如果只说“三夜”,那住在别处、中间有间隔的三夜也可能被算进去;而说“以二夜为特征的三夜”时,就表明那是没有间断的三夜。所谓“卧处就是床”,意思是“人们在这里躺卧,所以也叫床”,因此说“称为身体伸展的……”等等。“因此”,是因为两者都被执受。“以五种覆盖物”,指砖、石、灰泥、草、叶这五种覆盖物。“以熟诵之力”,指以熟练之力。“一肘半高”,应按工匠肘来量取。“同一出入口”,是就使用之门的同一性而说。“有百间房或四方形建筑为同一出入口”,这是句子的连接关系。巴利
51.Dirattatirattanti ettha vacanasiliṭṭhatāmattena diratta-ggahaṇaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ. Tirattañhi sahavāse labbhamāne diratte vattabbameva natthīti dirattaggahaṇaṃ visuṃ na yojeti. Tenevāha ‘‘uttaridirattatirattanti bhagavā sāmaṇerānaṃ saṅgahakaraṇatthāya tirattaparihāraṃ adāsī’’ti. Nirantaraṃ tirattadassanatthaṃ vā dirattaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Kevalañhi tirattanti vutte aññattha vāsena antarikampi tirattaṃ gaṇheyya, dirattavisiṭṭhaṃ pana tirattaṃ vuccamānaṃ tena anantarikameva tirattaṃ dīpeti. Sayanaṃ seyyā, sayanti etthātipi seyyāti āha ‘‘kāyappasāraṇasaṅkhāta’’ntiādi. Tasmāti yasmā ubhayampi pariggahitaṃ, tasmā. Pañcahi chadanehīti iṭṭhakasilāsudhātiṇapaṇṇasaṅkhaātehi pañcahi chadanehi. Vācuggatavasenāti paguṇavasena. Diyaḍḍhahatthubbedho vaḍḍhakīhatthena gahetabbo. Ekūpacāroti vaḷañjanadvārassa ekattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Satagabbhaṃ vā catussālaṃ ekūpacāraṃ hotīti sambandho.
“与上层墙壁不相连的”这一句,是为了说明:在横梁内部躺下后,再从同一个孔洞出来,穿过墙壁之间的空隙进入下层,即使这是可行的,对于这种与上层墙壁不相连的住所,已经说过不犯戒;至于无法这样进入的、墙壁相连的住所,根本不必再说“不犯戒”,因为这是为了表明墙壁相连的住所并非犯戒。“在下层建筑躺卧的比丘不犯戒”这一句,也是为了遮止人们可能认为在那种住所的下层躺卧会有犯戒的问题,才这样说的,并不是为了表明在上层躺卧就有犯戒。“不同出入口”这一句,是针对那种在外面架设梯子以登上上层的情况而说的。由于在上层的露天上躺卧并不犯戒,所以才说“在覆盖物之内”。巴利
Uparimatalena saddhiṃ asambaddhabhittikassāti idaṃ tulāya abbhantare sayitvā puna teneva susirena nikkhamitvā bhittiantarena heṭṭhimatalaṃ pavisituṃ yoggepi uparimatalena asambaddhabhittike senāsane anāpattiyā vuttāya tathā pavisituṃ asakkuṇeyye sambaddhabhittike vattabbameva natthīti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ, na pana sambaddhabhittike āpattīti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Heṭṭhāpāsāde sayitabhikkhussa anāpattīti idampi tādise senāsane heṭṭhimatale sayitasseva āpattippasaṅkā siyāti taṃnivāraṇatthaṃ vuttaṃ, na pana uparimatale sayitassa āpattīti dassanatthaṃ. Nānūpacāreti yattha bahi nisseṇiṃ katvā uparimatalaṃ ārohanti, tādisaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Uparimatalepi ākāsaṅgaṇe nipajjantassa āpattiyā abhāvato ‘‘chadanabbhantare’’ti vuttaṃ.
“以简要方式”就是按整体形态来说。关于“半墙的住所”,三本复注里都说:“所谓半墙,就是放开一面,另外三面砌墙;或者先立起一面墙,再在两侧各砌半截墙,这样的住所。”但复注里又说:“半墙,是指屋顶还不到墙一半的”,这个说法我们认为也并非不合理。他们说:“所谓vāḷasaṅghāṭo(猛兽栅栏),就是在柱子上方做成猛兽形状的栅栏。”关于“在围墙之外”:如果有一面没有围墙,即使在那一边,只要已经超出了适合设围墙的范围,也应看作无犯。“房间通道未分隔的”:中间有露天庭院的方形大门厅建筑,如果不穿过露天庭院、只从门厅走进去,就无法进入所有房间;如果在每间房的两侧延伸墙壁来建造,就叫“房间通道已分隔的”。这里不是那样,所以说“房间通道未分隔的”。“进入所有房间”:因为房间通道未分隔,不用穿过露天庭院,只从门厅走就能进入各个房间。那么,它的围墙又是什么呢?因为一切都已经分隔开了,所以说“房间的墙壁就是它的围墙”,这是就四周的房间墙壁来说的。即使是按方形建筑布局的住所,房间的门厅虽然没有单独围起来,但依四周耸立的房间墙壁来说,也算是有围墙的。巴利
Sabhāsaṅkhepenāti sabhākārena. Aḍḍhakuṭṭake senāsaneti ettha ‘‘aḍḍhakuṭṭakaṃ nāma yattha ekaṃ passaṃ muñcitvā tīsu passesu bhittiyo baddhā honti, yattha vā ekasmiṃ passe bhittiṃ uṭṭhāpetvā ubhosu passesu upaḍḍhaṃ upaḍḍhaṃ katvā bhittiyo uṭṭhāpenti, tādisaṃ senāsana’’nti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Gaṇṭhipade pana ‘‘aḍḍhakuṭṭaketi chadanaṃ aḍḍhena asampattakuṭṭake’’ti vuttaṃ, tampi no na yuttaṃ. ‘‘Vāḷasaṅghāṭo nāma thambhānaṃ upari vāḷarūpehi katasaṅghāṭo vuccatī’’ti vadanti. Parikkhepassa bahigateti ettha yasmiṃ passe parikkhepo natthi, tatthāpi parikkhepārahappadesato bahigate anāpattiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Aparicchinnagabbhūpacāreti ettha majjhe vivaṭaṅgaṇavantāsu pamukhamahācatussālāsu yathā ākāsaṅgaṇaṃ anotaritvā pamukheneva gantvā sabbagabbhe pavisituṃ na sakkā hoti, evaṃ ekekagabbhassa dvīsu passesu kuṭṭaṃ nīharitvā kataṃ paricchinnagabbhūpacāraṃ nāma, idaṃ pana tādisaṃ na hotīti ‘‘aparicchinnagabbhūpacāre’’ti vuttaṃ. Sabbagabbhe pavisantīti gabbhūpacārassa aparicchinnattā ākāsaṅgaṇaṃ anotaritvā pamukheneva gantvā taṃ taṃ gabbhaṃ pavisanti. Atha kuto tassa parikkhepoyeva sabbaparicchannattāti vuttanti āha ‘‘gabbhaparikkhepoyeva hissa parikkhepo’’ti. Idañca samantā gabbhabhittiyo sandhāya vuttaṃ. Catussālavasena sanniviṭṭhepi senāsane gabbhapamukhaṃ visuṃ aparikkhittampi samantā ṭhitagabbhabhittīnaṃ vasena parikkhittaṃ nāma hoti.
有人可能会说:“《暗部注释书》里不是笼统地说过‘前庭没有围隔,就无犯’吗?所以,即使是按四厢房格局建成的住所,只要前庭是单独没有围隔的,也一样无犯。”为了破除这种主张,才说了下面这段话:“然而……乃至……是针对各自独立建造、同一屋顶的单排房舍而说的。”这段话的意思是:“所谓‘前庭没有围隔,就无犯’,并不是针对按四厢房格局建成的房舍说的,而是针对单独建成、只有一排的房舍说的。因为对那样的单排房舍来说,前庭没有围隔才无犯,对按四厢房格局建成的房舍则不适用。”另外,对单排房舍来说,划定每一间房的邻近区域后,哪怕只是在两侧砌起矮墙,前庭也算“已围隔”;而在按四厢房格局建成的房舍中,靠两侧房间的墙壁,前庭也算“已围隔”。因此,凡是依这个标准算作已围隔的前庭,在那里就有犯;其他情况则无犯。这就是此处的定论。巴利
‘‘Nanu ca ‘aparikkhitte pamukhe anāpattī’ti andhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ avisesena vuttaṃ, tasmā catussālavasena sanniviṭṭhepi senāsane visuṃ aparikkhitte pamukhe anāpattiyevā’’ti yo vadeyya, tassa vādaparimocanatthaṃ idaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘yaṃ pana…pe… pāṭekkasannivesā ekacchadanā gabbhapāḷiyo sandhāya vutta’’nti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘aparikkhitte pamukhe anāpattīti yaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ na catussālavasena sanniviṭṭhā gabbhapāḷiyo sandhāya vuttaṃ, kiñcarahi visuṃ sanniviṭṭhaṃ ekameva gabbhapāḷiṃ sandhāya. Tādisāya hi gabbhapāḷiyā aparikkhitte pamukhe anāpatti, na catussālavasena sanniviṭṭhāyā’’ti. Ekāya ca gabbhapāḷiyā tassa tassa gabbhassa upacāraṃ paricchinditvā antamaso ubhosu passesu khuddakabhittīnaṃ uṭṭhāpanamattenapi pamukhaṃ parikkhittaṃ nāma hoti, catussālavasena sanniviṭṭhāsu pana gabbhapāḷīsu ubhosu passesu gabbhabhittīnaṃ vasenapi pamukhaṃ parikkhittaṃ nāma hoti. Tasmā yaṃ iminā lakkhaṇena parikkhittaṃ pamukhaṃ, tattha āpatti, itarattha anāpattīti idamettha sanniṭṭhānaṃ.
现在,为了说明“在未围隔的前庭,无犯”这句话的真正意思,有人说了“这是针对没有基台、直接建在地上的前庭而说的”。为了显示这种说法不合理,就开始了“而那里……”这一段。所谓“这是针对没有基台、直接建在地上的前庭而说的”,这句话的意思是:“在未围隔的前庭,无犯”这个说法,是针对没有基台、直接建在地上的房屋的前庭而说的。但如果前庭有高基台,就不算在“已围隔”之内。正因如此,他才说:“即使基台高达十肘,也不算在围隔之内。”前面也是基于这个意思而说:“即使是有高基台的,睡在前庭的人,对睡在房间里的人也不构成犯戒。”其中“那里”指的是《暗部注释书》。“在说明了基台的尺寸之后”是指:“如果从基台下来睡在地上,就看不到睡在基台上方的人”——像这样,以基台的高度说明了尺寸之后。所谓“单厅式建造”,是指将殿堂径直纵向加长而建造的。双厅式建造等,也可依所述类推而知。这里与前面所说不同的地方,只是阐明了厅堂的分类。巴利
Idāni ‘‘aparikkhitte pamukhe anāpattī’’ti vatvā tasseva vacanassa adhippāyaṃ pakāsentena yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘bhūmiyaṃ vinā jagatiyā pamukhaṃ sandhāya kathita’’nti, tassa ayuttatāvibhāvanatthaṃ ‘‘yañca tatthā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Bhūmiyaṃ vinā jagatiyā pamukhaṃ sandhāya kathitanti hi imassa vacanassa ayamadhippāyo – ‘‘aparikkhitte pamukhe anāpattī’’ti yaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ vinā vatthuṃ bhūmiyaṃ katagehassa pamukhaṃ sandhāya kathitaṃ. Sace pana uccavatthukaṃ pamukhaṃ hoti, parikkhittasaṅkhyaṃ na gacchatīti. Tenevāha ‘‘dasahatthubbedhāpi hi jagati parikkhepasaṅkhyaṃ na gacchatī’’ti. Heṭṭhāpi idameva manasi sannidhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘uccavatthukaṃ cepi hoti, pamukhe sayito gabbhe sayitānaṃ āpattiṃ na karotī’’ti. Tatthāti andhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ. Jagatiyā pamāṇaṃ vatvāti ‘‘sace jagatiyā otaritvā bhūmiyaṃ sayito, jagatiyā upari sayitaṃ na passatī’’ti evaṃ jagatiyā ubbedhena pamāṇaṃ vatvā. Ekasālādīsu ujukameva dīghaṃ katvā sannivesito pāsādo ekasālasanniveso. Dvisālasannivesādayopi vuttānusārato veditabbā. Sālappabhedadīpanameva cettha heṭṭhā vuttato viseso.
在中间砌墙:这里也应该知道,由于围隔的最低界限是一肘半高,所以即使在中间砌一肘半高的墙,也仍然不算同一个邻近区域。因为“有洞的房子不叫同一个邻近区域”这句话是说,如果在高度一肘半的范围内有一个足以让人通过的洞,那个洞就是门,因此就成了同一个邻近区域。“什么围隔被破坏了?”这是针对前庭的围隔说的。因为所有地方都提到了五种覆盖,所以他说“被五种覆盖之一所覆盖”。巴利
Majjhepākāraṃ karontīti etthāpi parikkhepassa heṭṭhimaparicchedena diyaḍḍhahatthubbedhattā diyaḍḍhahatthaṃ cepi majjhe pākāraṃ karonti, nānūpacārameva hotīti veditabbaṃ. Na hi chiddena gehaṃ ekūpacāraṃ nāma hotīti ettha sace ubbedhena diyaḍḍhahatthabbhantare manussānaṃ sañcārappahonakaṃ chiddaṃ hoti, tampi dvāramevāti ekūpacāraṃ hoti. Kiṃ parikkhepoviddhastoti pamukhassa parikkhepaṃ sandhāya vadati. Sabbattha pañcannaṃyeva chadanānaṃ āgatattā vadati ‘‘pañcannaṃ aññatarena chadanena channā’’ti.
53 在巴利圣典中,说到“所谓卧处,就是全覆全围、多分覆多分围”,这是把多分覆多分围的住处显示为波逸提的终点;而说到“半覆半围,犯恶作”,则是把半覆半围的住处作为恶作的起点来显示。那么,介于这两者之间的,应该判为波逸提,还是恶作?由于如同世间共违的学处那样毫无遗漏地制定,而此学处又是施设过,所以多分覆多分围与半覆半围之间的状态,波逸提并没有被遮止,因此在律的判断中,应当取重的,注释书里也显示为波逸提。所谓“七种波逸提”,是把圣典中所说的波逸提从总体上归为一类而说的。如果分别来看,“全覆全围是波逸提,多分覆多分围是波逸提”,就成了八种波逸提。巴利
53. Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘seyyā nāma sabbacchannā sabbaparicchannā yebhuyyenacchannā yebhuyyenaparicchannā’’ti vadantena yebhuyyenacchannayebhuyyenaparicchannasenāsanaṃ pācittiyassa avasānaṃ viya katvā dassitaṃ, ‘‘upaḍḍhacchanne upaḍḍhaparicchanne āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti vadantena ca upaḍḍhacchannaupaḍḍhaparicchannasenāsanaṃ dukkaṭassa ādiṃ katvā dassitaṃ, ubhinnamantarā kena bhavitabbaṃ pācittiyena, udāhu dukkaṭenāti? Lokavajjasikkhāpadasseva anavasesaṃ katvā paññāpanato imassa ca paṇṇattivajjattā yebhuyyenacchannayebhuyyenaparicchannassa upaḍḍhacchannaupaḍḍhaparicchannassa ca antarā pācittiyaṃ anivāritameva, tasmā vinayavinicchaye ca garukeyeva ṭhātabbattā aṭṭhakathāyampi pācittiyameva dassitaṃ. Satta pācittiyānīti pāḷiyaṃ vuttapācittiyaṃ sāmaññato ekattena gahetvā vuttaṃ. Visuṃ pana gayhamāne ‘‘sabbacchanne sabbaparicchanne pācittiyaṃ, yebhuyyenacchanne yebhuyyenaparicchanne pācittiya’’nti aṭṭheva pācittiyāni honti.
所谓“Senambamaṇḍapa的样式”:据说在锡兰岛,有一个名叫Senambamaṇḍapa的集会堂,基台很高,全部有覆盖,但完全没有围隔,这段话就是针对它说的。如果把它算作基台围隔的一种,那么由于这个堂的基台很高,“完全没有围隔”就说不通了,所以接着说“由此也可以知道……”等等。这里,“小覆”等应当这样理解:一个住处分成四份,其中一份有覆盖,其余三份没有覆盖,这叫“小覆”。分成三份,其中两份有覆盖,一份没有覆盖,这叫“多分覆”。分成两份,其中一份有覆盖,一份没有覆盖,这叫“半覆”住处。“小围”等也按同样的方式理解。其余部分文义浅显易懂。这里有三个要素:构成波逸提的住处、在那里和未受具足戒的人一起躺卧、第四天日落。巴利
Senambamaṇḍapavaṇṇaṃ hotīti sīhaḷadīpe kira uccavatthuko sabbacchanno sabbaaparicchanno evaṃnāmako sannipātamaṇḍapo atthi, taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Yadi jagatiparikkhepasaṅkhyaṃ gacchati, uccavatthukattā maṇḍapassa sabbaaparicchannatā na yujjatīti āha ‘‘imināpetaṃ veditabba’’ntiādi. Cūḷakacchannādīni cettha evaṃ veditabbāni – yassa catūsu bhāgesu eko channo, sesā acchannā, idaṃ cūḷakacchannaṃ. Yassa tīsu bhāgesu dve channā, eko acchanno, idaṃ yebhuyyenacchannaṃ. Yassa dvīsu bhāgesu eko channo, eko acchanno, idaṃ upaḍḍhacchannaṃ nāma senāsanaṃ. Cūḷakaparicchannādīnipi imināva nayena veditabbāni. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Pācittiyavatthukasenāsanaṃ, tattha tattha anupasampannena saha nipajjanaṃ, catutthadivase sūriyatthaṅgamananti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
第六、第二共宿学处的解释巴利
6. Dutiyasahaseyyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
55 第六项:有人说,第一条学处里已经讲了“除了比丘以外,其余的都叫未受具足戒者”,所以女人也已经被“未受具足戒者”这个说法涵盖进去了;因此,在第四天和女人一起睡,就依两条学处成立两个波逸提罪。但在《甘提帕达》里,三处都这样说:在这条学处中,女人是单独提出来的,所以第一条学处里“除了比丘以外,其余的都叫未受具足戒者”只适合用来指男人。这个说法才更合理。巴利
55. Chaṭṭhe ‘‘paṭhamasikkhāpade ‘bhikkhuṃ ṭhapetvā avaseso anupasampanno nāmā’ti vuttattā ‘mātugāmopi anupasampannaggahaṇena gahitoyevā’ti catutthadivase mātugāmena saddhiṃ sayantassa dvīhi sikkhāpadehi dve pācittiyāni hontī’’ti vadanti. Gaṇṭhipadesu pana tīsupi ‘‘imasmiṃ sikkhāpade mātugāmassa visuṃ vuccamānattā paṭhamasikkhāpade ‘bhikkhuṃ ṭhapetvā avaseso anupasampanno nāmā’ti purisasseva gahaṇaṃ anucchavika’’nti vuttaṃ, tadeva ca yuttataraṃ.
有人说,这里所说的理由——“‘第一日也’这个‘也’字,就表示第四日也”——也是站不住脚的。因为“也”字并非只有总括的意思,并没有限定的意思,而决定义另外还可能存在。或者,这里的“也”字应该理解为表示可能性。因此,它在这里说明的意思是:第一日就已经有罪了,第二日等日子就更不用说了。即使把“也”字理解为总括义,它也只是说明依这条学处所犯的罪在其他日子也会发生,而不是说依第一条学处所犯的罪,所以应当知道,那根本不能成为理由。他们说:“即使是作为波罗夷事对象的死妇,因为她处于未被执受的情况,所以不产生同宿罪。”应当知道,根据“日落时,比丘在有女人躺卧的地方躺下”这句话,白天躺下的人根本不会有同宿罪。与波逸提事相关的卧处、在那里和女人一起躺下、日落,这是这里的三支。巴利
Yañca idha ‘‘paṭhamadivasepīti pi-saddena catutthadivasepīti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti kāraṇaṃ vadanti, tampi akāraṇaṃ pi-saddo sampiṇḍanatthoyevāti niyamābhāvato avadhāraṇatthassa ca sambhavato. Sambhāvane vā pi-saddo daṭṭhabbo. Tena idha paṭhamadivasepi tāva āpatti, dutiyādidivase kimeva vattabbanti imamatthaṃ dīpeti. Sampiṇḍanatthepi pi-sadde gayhamāne imināva sikkhāpadena āpajjitabbāpattiyā aññasmimpi divase āpajjanaṃ dīpeti, na paṭhamasikkhāpadena āpajjitabbāpattiyāti akāraṇameva tanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Matitthī pārājikavatthubhūtāpi anupādinnapakkhe ṭhitattā sahaseyyāpattiṃ na janetī’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Atthaṅgate sūriye mātugāme nipanne bhikkhu nipajjatī’’ti vacanato divā sayantassa sahaseyyāpatti na hotiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pācittiyavatthukasenāsanaṃ, tattha mātugāmena saha nipajjanaṃ, sūriyatthaṅgamananti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
7. 说法学处注释巴利
7. Dhammadesanāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
60-64 60-64. 第七学处中,“gharaṇī”是“引导回家的人”,也就是家中的女主人。因此说“家之主妇”。“suṇhā”就是媳妇。“不是与夜叉……”这些内容,通过“除了”这个词来连接。即使是和化作男子形貌站着的夜叉、饿鬼或畜生站在一起,也不可以说法。“以字说法”这里,他们这样说:超过五六句之后,哪怕只说了一个字就停下来,心里想“我要说这句话”,就已经犯戒了。巴利
60-64. Sattame gharaṃ nayatīti gharaṇī, gharanāyikā. Tenāha ‘‘gharasāminī’’ti. Suṇhāti suṇisā. Na yakkhenātiādīnaṃ ‘‘aññatrā’’ti iminā sambandho. Purisaviggahaṃ gahetvā ṭhitena yakkhena vā petena vā tiracchānena vā saddhiṃ ṭhitāyapi desetuṃ na vaṭṭati. Akkharāya desetīti ettha ‘‘chappañcavācato uttari ‘imaṃ padaṃ bhāsissāmī’ti ekampi akkharaṃ vatvā tiṭṭhati, āpattiyevā’’ti vadanti.
66 有人说:“‘一个偈颂之句’这话是就偈颂的连缀本身而说的,但在别处则应取有格尾变化的词。”他们说:“‘注释、法句、本生等事’——这话也是指古时结集所收录的注释等。”除了注释等的原文以外,可以随自己的意愿用泰米尔语等其他语言来讲说。“于句净法中如前所说的分类”——以此说明在别处不犯戒。“站起来又坐下”——以变换威仪的方式,说明即使以不同的威仪也不犯戒。“即使讲说全部长部”——只要还没讲完,即使到了第二天也继续讲。巴利
66.‘‘Eko gāthāpādoti idaṃ gāthābandhameva sandhāya vuttaṃ, aññattha pana vibhattiantapadameva gahetabba’’nti vadanti. ‘‘Aṭṭhakathaṃ dhammapadaṃ jātakādivatthuṃ vāti imināpi porāṇaṃ saṅgītiāruḷhameva aṭṭhakathādi vutta’’nti vadanti. Aṭṭhakathādipāṭhaṃ ṭhapetvā damiḷādibhāsantarena yathāruci kathetuṃ vaṭṭati. Padasodhamme vuttappabhedoti iminā aññattha anāpattīti dīpeti. Uṭṭhahitvā puna nisīditvāti iriyāpathaparivattananayena nānāiriyāpathenapi anāpattīti dīpeti. Sabbaṃ cepi dīghanikāyaṃ kathetīti yāva na niṭṭhāti, tāva punadivasepi katheti.
对第二个有智慧的男人来说,不带(第二位有智男子同行)就是(律中的)不作为。与女人一起站着,以及有智慧的男人(在场)的情况,应当依照在不定(学处)中所说的方法来理解。其余部分都很清楚。对于具有上述特征的法,宣说过六种言语以上;具有上述特征的女人;没有威仪动作的转换;没有有智慧的男人在场;不解答问题——这里就是这五个要素。巴利
Dutiyassa viññūpurisassa aggahaṇaṃ akiriyā. Mātugāmena saddhiṃ ṭhitassa ca viññūpurisassa ca upacāro aniyatesu vuttanayeneva gahetabbo. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Vuttalakkhaṇassa dhammassa channaṃ vācānaṃ upari desanā, vuttalakkhaṇo mātugāmo, iriyāpathapaavattanābhāvo, viññūpurisābhāvo, apañhavissajjanāti imāni panettha pañca aṅgāni.
第八 如实宣称学处注释巴利
8. Bhūtārocanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
77 77. 第八条的“中间”,是指般涅槃以外的其他时间。“被过度催逼”是指被人这样逼迫:“尊者,请说,您证得了什么?”即使没有被过度催逼,无论被问还是没被问,只要有那样的因缘,就完全可以宣说。正因为如此,一位长老被某位年少比丘指责后说:“贤友,不要为上位道而努力了,你指责的是一位漏尽者。”长老又问:“贤友,你在这个教法中有立足之处吗?”年少比丘回答:“是的,尊者,我是入流者。”圣者们即使知道“这是造作者”,为了通过显示修行不虚来激励和安慰,也会显示自己。所闻、教理、戒德,就是闻德、教理之德、戒德。在这里为痴狂者说明不说的理由时,应当知道也为心散乱者和受痛苦者说明了不说的理由。或者以“iti”一词表示“等”的意思,把心散乱者和受痛苦者也包含在内。因此他说“或者由于没有心散乱”。具见者,是指具足道果之见的人。因为只有圣者才没有痴狂等状态。而得禅定的人如果有那种状态,就会从禅定退失,因此对他们,应当说因不实说而无犯,而不是因实说而无犯。因此他说“不应说因实说而无犯”。巴利
77. Aṭṭhame antarāti parinibbānasamayato aññasmiṃ kāle. Atikaḍḍhiyamānenāti ‘‘vadatha, bhante, kiṃ tumhehi adhigata’’nti evaṃ nippīḷiyamānena. Anatikaḍḍhiyamānenapi pucchite vā apucchite vā tathārūpe kāraṇe sati ārocetuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Teneva aññatarena daharabhikkhunā upavadito aññataro thero ‘‘āvuso, uparimaggatthāya vāyāmaṃ mā akāsi, khīṇāsavo tayā upavadito’’ti āha. Therena ca ‘‘atthi te, āvuso, imasmiṃ sāsane patiṭṭhā’’ti vutto daharabhikkhu ‘‘āma, bhante, sotāpanno aha’’nti avoca. ‘‘Kārako aya’’nti ñatvāpi paṭipattiyā amoghabhāvadassanena samuttejanāya sampahaṃsanāya ca ariyā attānaṃ pakāsentiyeva. Sutapariyattisīlaguṇanti sutaguṇaṃ pariyattiguṇaṃ sīlaguṇañca. Ummattakassa idha avacane kāraṇaṃ vadantena khittacittavedanaṭṭānampi avacane kāraṇaṃ vuttamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Iti-saddena vā ādiatthena khittacittavedanaṭṭe saṅgaṇhāti. Teneva vadati ‘‘cittakkhepassa vā abhāvā’’ti. Diṭṭhisampannānanti maggaphaladiṭṭhiyā samannāgatānaṃ. Ariyānameva hi ummattakādibhāvo natthi. Jhānalābhino pana tasmiṃ sati jhānā parihāyanti, tasmā tesaṃ abhūtārocanapaccayā anāpatti vattabbā, na bhūtārocanapaccayā. Tenevāha ‘‘bhūtārocanapaccayā anāpatti na vattabbā’’ti.
“先前未说”是指在第四波罗夷中没有说到的内容。而这条学处,由于不知道已经制戒,所以属于不是由心念生起的情况。在这里,圣者因为知道制戒,所以不会违犯;但凡夫即使知道制戒,仍然会违犯。应当知道,他们因为生起违犯大师教诫的思心所,形成很强的不善,所以会从禅那退失。若就最高限度来说,这是只针对圣者而说“有善心和无记心这两种心”。然而,不知道制戒而证得禅那的凡夫,并非不会因为贪欲而以不善心说出这件事。这里因为没有苦受,所以说“二受”;为了与这一点相应,才说“二心”——应当这样理解这里的意趣,或者按这种方式把握。其余文句很清楚。上人法的真实性、对未受具足戒者宣说、当时知道、没有其他处所——这些是这里的四个条件。巴利
Pubbe avuttehīti catutthapārājike avuttehi. Idañca sikkhāpadaṃ paṇṇattiajānanavasena acittakasamuṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Ariyā cettha paṇṇattiṃ jānantā vītikkamaṃ na karonti, puthujjanā pana paṇṇattiṃ jānitvāpi vītikkamaṃ karonti, te ca satthuno āṇāvītikkamacetanāya balavaakusalabhāvato jhānā parihāyantīti daṭṭhabbaṃ, ukkaṭṭhaparicchedena ariyapuggale eva sandhāya ‘‘kusalābyākatacittehi dvicitta’’nti vuttaṃ. Paṇṇattiṃ ajānantā pana jhānalābhī puthujjanā vatthumhi lobhavasena akusalacittenapi na ārocentīti natthi. Idha dukkhavedanāya abhāvato ‘‘dvivedana’’nti imassa anurūpaṃ katvā dvicittanti idaṃ vuttanti evaṃ vā ettha adhippāyo gahetabbo. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Uttarimanussadhammassa bhūtatā, anupasampannassa ārocanaṃ, taṅkhaṇavijānanā, anaññappadesoti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.
第九、发露粗恶罪学处的解释巴利
9. Duṭṭhullārocanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
78 78. 第九项中,“为了显示粗恶一词的含义”是指为了显示粗恶一词的义理。因为当义理被显示出来时,词本身也就被显示为“这个词用于这些义理上”。这里的意图是:“凡是以粗恶一词所表达的,为了把这一切都显示出来,所以说了诸波罗夷。”在这里,所谓“有此辨析”,是指在巴利原文中有此辨析,或者在巴利注疏中有此辨析。所谓“在这里或许会有”,意思是有人对此可能会这样疑惑:就像向未受具足戒者发露粗恶罪时,应当犯恶作一样,所以说“犯恶作”。即使是斥骂的人,也会犯恶作,也就是由辱骂的话而犯恶作。为了表明即使不了解这个意图,也应当以注疏师的话为准,所以说“在这里唯以注疏师为准”。接着又以道理把注疏师的话坚固地确立下来,所以说“以此也……”等等。巴利
78. Navame duṭṭhullasaddatthadassanatthanti duṭṭhullasaddassa atthadassanatthaṃ. Atthe hi dassite saddopi ‘‘ayaṃ etesu atthesu vattatī’’ti dassitoyeva hoti. ‘‘Yaṃ yaṃ duṭṭhullasaddena abhidhīyati, taṃ sabbaṃ dassetuṃ pārājikāni vuttānī’’ti ayañhettha adhippāyo. Tatrāyaṃ vicāraṇāti tatra pāḷiyaṃ ayaṃ vicāraṇā, tatra pāḷiaṭṭhakathāsu vā ayaṃ vicāraṇā. Tattha bhaveyyāti tattha kassaci vimati evaṃ bhaveyya. Anupasampannassa duṭṭhullārocane viya dukkaṭena bhavitabbanti āha ‘‘dukkaṭaṃ āpajjatī’’ti. Akkosantopi dukkaṭaṃ āpajjeyyāti omasavādena dukkaṭaṃ āpajjeyya. Adhippāyaṃ ajānantenapi aṭṭhakathācariyānaṃ vacaneyeva ṭhātabbanti dīpanatthaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhakathācariyāva ettha pamāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Punapi aṭṭhakathāvacanameva upapattito daḷhaṃ katvā patiṭṭhapento ‘‘imināpi ceta’’ntiādimāha.
80 因为前面已经说过“除了依比丘僧团授权之外”,所以就应该承认授权是存在的,因此说“正是依据这里所说的……”等等。巴利
80. ‘‘Aññatra bhikkhusammutiyā’’ti vuttattā sammuti atthīti gahetabbāti āha ‘‘idha vuttattāyevā’’tiādi.
82 82. “从最初开始的五学处”,是指杀生等五学处。有人说:“其余的那些,是指非时食等五学处。”但有些人说:“从最初开始算起的五学处,是指故意出精等五学处。”这种说法不应采纳。因为为沙弥制定的,确实就是杀生等十学处。正如所说——巴利
82.Ādito pañca sikkhāpadānīti pāṇātipātādīni pañca sikkhāpadāni. ‘‘Sesānīti vikālabhojanādīni pañcā’’ti vadanti. Keci pana ‘‘ādito paṭṭhāya pañca sikkhāpadānīti sukkavissaṭṭhiādīni pañcā’’ti vadanti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Pāṇātipātādīni hi daseva sikkhāpadāni sāmaṇerānaṃ paññattāni. Vuttañhetaṃ –
那时,沙弥们这样想:“我们有多少条学处?又该在哪里学习呢?”他们把这件事禀告了世尊。世尊说:“比丘们,我允许沙弥有十条学处,沙弥们应当在这些学处中学习:离杀生、离不与取……”等等(《大品》106)。巴利
‘‘Atha kho sāmaṇerānaṃ etadahosi ‘kati nu kho amhākaṃ sikkhāpadāni, kattha ca amhehi sikkhitabba’nti? Bhagavato etamatthaṃ ārocesuṃ. Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sāmaṇerānaṃ dasa sikkhāpadāni, tesu ca sāmaṇerehi sikkhituṃ, pāṇātipātā veramaṇī adinnādānā veramaṇī’’tiādi (mahāva. 106).
对于他们自己所制定的学处,应当辨别粗恶和非粗恶,而故意出精等并不是单独为他们制定的。那么,比丘身上属于粗恶的故意出精等,对未受具足戒者来说到底是什么呢?回答说:“故意出精……乃至……称为恶行。”由此也可以成立:“未受具足戒者的故意出精等,不叫粗恶。”因为说“称为恶行”的时候,就表明未受具足戒者的故意出精等只是恶行,而不是叫粗恶的恶行。他们说:“由于注疏中说‘称为恶行’,又因为这种事是不该做的,所以未受具足戒者的故意出精等属于罚羯磨的所依事;如果比丘想败坏另一个未受具足戒者的名声而向他宣说这些,就犯恶作。”这里所说的“未受具足戒者”,应当理解为包括沙弥、沙弥尼和式叉摩那。其余部分在这里很容易理解。未犯最后重罪的比丘有事实根据的僧残罪、向未受具足戒者宣说、没有僧团授权——这就是这里的三项要素。巴利
Tesaṃ paññattesuyeva sikkhāpadesu duṭṭhullāduṭṭhullavicāraṇā kātabbā, na ca sukkavissaṭṭhiādīni visuṃ tesaṃ paññattāni atthīti. Atha bhikkhuno duṭṭhullasaṅkhātāni sukkavissaṭṭhiādīni anupasampannassa kiṃ nāma hontīti āha ‘‘sukkavissaṭṭhi…pe… ajjhācāro nāmāti vutta’’nti. Imināpi cetaṃ siddhaṃ ‘‘anupasampannassa sukkavissaṭṭhiādi duṭṭhullaṃ nāma na hotī’’ti. Ajjhācāro nāmāti hi vadanto anupasampannassa sukkavissaṭṭhiādi kevalaṃ ajjhācāro nāma hoti, na pana duṭṭhullo nāma ajjhācāroti dīpeti. ‘‘Ajjhācāro nāmāti ca aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttattā akattabbarūpattā ca anupasampannassa sukkavissaṭṭhiādīni daṇḍakammavatthupakkhaṃ bhajanti, tāni ca aññassa anupasampannassa avaṇṇakāmatāya ārocento bhikkhu dukkaṭaṃ āpajjatī’’ti vadanti. Idha pana anupasampannaggahaṇena sāmaṇerasāmaṇerīsikkhamānānaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Antimavatthuṃ anajjhāpannassa bhikkhuno savatthuko saṅghādiseso, anupasampannassa ārocanaṃ, bhikkhusammutiyā abhāvoti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
10. 掘地学处注释巴利
10. Pathavīkhaṇanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
84-86 第十条:“一根”是指那些认为“有身根”的人所说的。“拳头大小”是指可以用拳头握住的大小。这里虽然说了多土和少土的地,却没有说半土的地,但在制罚学处中,即使是有余地的制定也可能成立,所以应当理解:对半土的地也犯波逸提。不过有些人说:“在全覆等处,分半犯恶作,所以这里也应该犯恶作。”这种说法不合理,因为除了犯波逸提所依的地和无犯所依的地之外,并不存在第三种犯恶作所依的地。因为只说了两种地:“已生地和未生地。”所以必须属于这两种地中的一种,而且在律的决断中,遇到这种情况应当以重者为准,因此这里不可能无犯。至于在全覆等处,分半犯恶作是合理的,因为那里确实存在那样的恶作所依事。巴利
84-86. Dasame ekindriyanti ‘‘kāyindriyaṃ atthī’’ti maññamānā vadanti. Muṭṭhippamāṇāti muṭṭhinā saṅgahetabbappamāṇā. Ettha kiñcāpi yebhuyyapaṃsuṃ appapaṃsuñca pathaviṃ vatvā upaḍḍhapaṃsukā pathavī na vuttā, tathāpi paṇṇattivajjasikkhāpadesu sāvasesapaññattiyāpi sambhavato upaḍḍhapaṃsukāyapi pathaviyā pācittiyamevāti gahetabbaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘sabbacchannādīsu upaḍḍhe dukkaṭassa vuttattā idhāpi dukkaṭaṃ yutta’’nti vadanti, taṃ na yuttaṃ pācittiyavatthukañca anāpattivatthukañca duvidhaṃ pathaviṃ ṭhapetvā aññissā dukkaṭavatthukāya tatiyāya pathaviyā abhāvato. Dveyeva hi pathaviyo vuttā ‘‘jātā ca pathavī ajātā ca pathavī’’ti. Tasmā dvīsu aññatarāya pathaviyā bhavitabbaṃ, vinayavinicchaye ca sampatte garukeyeva ṭhātabbattā na sakkā ettha anāpattiyā bhavituṃ. Sabbacchannādīsu pana upaḍḍhe dukkaṭaṃ yuttaṃ tattha tādisassa dukkaṭavatthuno sabbhāvā.
如果说“挖一个池塘”,这是允许的,因为并没有限定“在这个地方”而说。即使说“挖这条藤蔓”,由于这是就挖掘地面而言的习惯说法,所以依这条学处犯戒,而不是依坏生物村那条。以罐子,就是用壶。稀泥,就是混了水的泥。因为它会随水流走,所以允许。不足四月,就是少于四个月。被雨淋过,就是被天雨淋过。非人工坡,是为了说明没有涂抹过的地方,因为那样的地方有蚁冢。鼠狗,就是被老鼠挖出来后堆在外面的土堆。同理,意思是:只有不足四月而且被雨淋过的才允许。巴利
‘‘Pokkharaṇiṃ khaṇā’’ti vadati, vaṭṭatīti ‘‘imasmiṃ okāse’’ti aniyametvā vuttattā vaṭṭati. ‘‘Imaṃ valliṃ khaṇā’’ti vuttepi pathavīkhaṇanaṃ sandhāya pavattavohārattā imināva sikkhāpadena āpatti, na bhūtagāmapātabyatāya. Kuṭehīti ghaṭehi. Tanukakaddamoti udakamissakakaddamo. So ca udakagatikattā vaṭṭati. Omakacātumāsanti ūnacātumāsaṃ. Ovaṭṭhanti devena ovaṭṭhaṃ. Akatapabbhāreti avaḷañjanaṭṭhānadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tādise hi vammikassa sabbhāvoti. Mūsikukkuraṃ nāma mūsikāhi khaṇitvā bahi katapaṃsurāsi. Eseva nayoti omakacātumāsaovaṭṭhoyeva vaṭṭatīti attho.
就算超过一天也不行。如果已经过了下雨的那一天,也不可以损坏。他们说,如果是在和低地相连的地方,或者是在牛角刺那里,因为是从地面切断后竖立在那里的,所以从高出的顶端切断后取用,是可以的。抛起之后,让它不在原处停留,用脚踩踏、切断之后,取用搅浑的泥浆,也是可以的。所谓“抛起”,就是举起。从那里,也就是从那座旧僧舍。说“我拿砖”等话,是就清净心而说的。所谓“用水”,是指直接从空中落下的雨水。他们说,如果被从别处溅落的水打湿了,那是可以的。利用那种计谋,也是可以的。巴利
Ekadivasampi na vaṭṭatīti ovaṭṭhaekadivasātikkantopi vikopetuṃ na vaṭṭati. ‘‘Heṭṭhābhūmisambandhepi ca gokaṇṭake bhūmito chinditvā uddhaṃ ṭhitattā accuggatamatthakato chinditvā gahetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. Sakaṭṭhāne atiṭṭhamānaṃ katvā pādehi madditvā chinditvā āloḷitakaddamampi gahetuṃ vaṭṭati. Tatoti tato purāṇasenāsanato. Iṭṭhakaṃ gaṇhāmītiādi suddhacittaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Udakenāti ujukaṃ ākāsatoyeva patanakaudakena. ‘‘Sace pana aññattha paharitvā patitena udakena temitaṃ hoti, vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. Uccāletvāti ukkhipitvā. Tena apadesenāti tena lesena.
87-88 87-88.“因为不是行境所以无犯”,在这里,即使能够把火熄灭,但因为最初是以清净心布施出去的,所以即使他心里想着“让它烧吧”而站在一旁,也无犯。“先被淋湿,后被覆盖”,是指先被雨淋湿,后来才被覆盖。其余部分浅显易懂。“生地、地想、挖掘或令人挖掘中的任何一种”,这里是三个构成要素。巴利
87-88.Avisayattāanāpattīti ettha sacepi nibbāpetuṃ sakkā hoti, paṭhamaṃ suddhacittena dinnattā ‘‘dahatū’’ti sallakkhetvāpi tiṭṭhati, anāpatti. Ovaṭṭhaṃ channanti paṭhamaṃ ovaṭṭhaṃ pacchā channaṃ. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Jātapathavī, pathavīsaññitā, khaṇanakhaṇāpanānaṃ aññataranti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
2. 植物品巴利
2. Bhūtagāmavaggo
1. 植物学处解释巴利
1. Bhūtagāmasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
89 89. 在《僧舍品》第一则注释中,“不能制止”意思是控制不住。不过,从这句话应当看出:那个孩子已经被带到了那里,而且那位比丘也看见了他。当那位比丘开始砍那棵树时,有一位生在树上的年轻天女,把儿子抱在怀里站在那里,恳求他说:“主人,请不要砍掉我的宫殿,我没法带着孩子到处漂泊、没有住处。”那位比丘心想:“我在别处找不到这样的树。”就没有理会她的话。天女想:“他看看这个孩子,也许就会停手。”于是把孩子放在树枝上。那位比丘收不住已经举起的斧头,砍断了孩子的手臂。又因为躺在宫殿里,就说为“躺着”,所以说“躺在树上的天宫中”。巴利
89. Senāsanavaggassa paṭhame niggahetuṃ asakkontoti sandhāretuṃ asakkonto. Iminā pana vacanena dārakassa tattha upanītabhāvo tena ca diṭṭhabhāvo vuttoyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tena hi bhikkhunā taṃ rukkhaṃ chindituṃ āraddhe tattha nibbattā ekā taruṇaputtā devadhītā puttaṃ aṅkenādāya ṭhitā taṃ yāci ‘‘mā me sāmi vimānaṃ chindi, na sakkhissāmi puttakaṃ ādāya anāvāsā vicaritu’’nti. So ‘‘ahaṃ aññattha īdisaṃ rukkhaṃ na labhissāmī’’ti tassā vacanaṃ nādiyi. Sā ‘‘imampi tāva dārakaṃ oloketvā oramissatī’’ti puttaṃ rukkhasākhāya ṭhapesi. So bhikkhu ukkhittaṃ pharasuṃ sandhāretuṃ asakkonto dārakassa bāhaṃ chindi. Evañca sayito vimāne sayito nāma hotīti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘rukkhaṭṭhakadibbavimāne nipannassā’’ti.
“树上的天宫”这句话,是针对“树枝上的天宫”而说的。生在树上的天宫,因为依附于树,所以称为“树上的天宫”。而树枝上的天宫,则是依托所有树枝而安住。其中,如果是树上的天宫,只要树根还在,它就不会毁坏;但树枝上的天宫,一旦树枝断裂,就在断处一一崩坏,如果所有树枝都断了,整个天宫也就彻底毁坏。这座天宫正是树枝上的天宫,所以当树被砍倒时,那座天宫就完全毁灭了,因此那位天女才在世尊那里得到另一座天宫后住于其中。这里所说的“从乳房根部砍断手臂”,是指连同肩膀一并砍断手臂。由此应当看出,树神的肢体是会被切断的,而不像四大天王等众的肢体那样不可切断。所谓“树法”,是指树的特性、树的自性。因为像树一样,在被砍伐等情况下也不发怒,所以称为“树法”。巴利
Rukkhaṭṭhakadibbavimāneti ca sākhaṭṭhakavimānaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Rukkhassa upari nibbattañhi vimānaṃ rukkhapaṭibaddhattā ‘‘rukkhaṭṭhakavimāna’’nti vuccati. Sākhaṭṭhakavimānaṃ pana sabbasākhāsannissitaṃ hutvā tiṭṭhati. Tattha yaṃ rukkhaṭṭhakavimānaṃ hoti, taṃ yāva rukkhassa mūlamattampi tiṭṭhati, tāva na nassati. Sākhaṭṭhakavimānaṃ pana sākhāsu bhijjamānāsu tattha tattheva bhijjitvā sabbasākhāsu bhinnāsu sabbaṃ bhijjati, idampi ca vimānaṃ sākhaṭṭhakaṃ, tasmā rukkhe chinne taṃ vimānaṃ sabbaso vinaṭṭhaṃ, teneva sā devatā bhagavato santikā laddhe aññasmiṃ vimāne vasi. Bāhuṃ thanamūleyeva chindīti aṃsena saddhiṃ bāhaṃ chindi. Iminā ca rukkhadevatānaṃ gattāni chijjanti, na cātumahārājikādīnaṃ viya acchejjānīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Rukkhadhammeti rukkhapakatiyaṃ, rukkhasabhāveti attho. Rukkhānaṃ viya chedanādīsu akuppanañhi rukkhadhammo nāma.
“Uppatitaṃ”就是已经生起。“Bhantaṃ”就是奔跑。“Vāraye”就是制止。这里说的是:就像一位熟练的车夫能制住狂奔的车子,然后随心所欲地驾驭它;同样,如果有人能制止、调伏已经生起的嗔怒,我就称他为车夫。而其他那些给国王、副王等人驾车的车夫,只能叫执缰绳的人,不是最上的车夫。巴利
Uppatitanti uppannaṃ. Bhantanti dhāvantaṃ. Vārayeti niggaṇheyya. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā nāma cheko sārathi ativegena dhāvantaṃ rathaṃ niggahetvā yathicchakaṃ peseti, evaṃ yo puggalo uppannaṃ kodhaṃ vāraye niggaṇhituṃ sakkoti, tamahaṃ sārathiṃ brūmi. Itaro pana rājauparājādīnaṃ rathasārathijano rasmiggāho nāma hoti, na uttamasārathīti.
第二首偈颂的意思是:“凡”指无论从刹帝利家族出家,还是从婆罗门家族出家,无论是新学、 middling 还是长老。“Uppatitaṃ”指向上冲起、已去、已转起,也就是已生起。“Kodhaṃ”指嗔怒,即依照“他对我做无益之事,因此生起嗔害”等经文所说的九种,以及“他不对我做有益之事”等从反面成立的九种,共十八种,再加上像树桩、荆棘等不能成为理由的一种,共十九种嗔害事,由其中某一种嗔害事所生起的嗔怒。“Visaṭaṃ”指扩散的。“Sappavisaṃ”指蛇毒。“Iva”是比喻词,省略 i 音后就说成“va”。“Osadhehi”指用解毒药。这里说的是:就像一位善治蛇毒的医师,用由根、茎、皮、叶、花等某一种或多种药材配成的解毒药,能迅速消除被蛇咬后遍满全身、扩散开来的蛇毒;同样,任何人用对治嗔怒的方法——在上述各种方法中,用任何一种——来消除、不忍受、舍断、驱除、灭尽那由上述嗔害事所生起、遍满心相续而存在的嗔怒,这位比丘就舍弃了此岸与彼岸。这样消除嗔怒的比丘,因为嗔怒在第三道中被彻底断除,所以舍弃了称为此岸与彼岸的五下分结。一般来说,“彼岸”是岸的名称,因此,那些属于此岸又是轮回大海彼岸的,就合称为“此岸与彼岸”。巴利
Dutiyagāthāya pana ayamattho – yoti (su. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1) yo yādiso khattiyakulā vā pabbajito brāhmaṇakulā vā pabbajito navo vā majjhimo vā thero vā. Uppatitanti uddhamuddhaṃ patitaṃ, gataṃ pavattanti attho, uppannanti vuttaṃ hoti. Kodhanti ‘‘anatthaṃ me caratīti āghāto jāyatī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 3.340; a. ni. 9.29) nayena sutte vuttānaṃ navannaṃ, ‘‘atthaṃ me na caratī’’tiādīnañca tappaṭipakkhato siddhānaṃ navannamevāti aṭṭhārasannaṃ khāṇukaṇṭakādinā aṭṭhānena saddhiṃ ekūnavīsatiyā āghātavatthūnaṃ aññatarāghātavatthusambhavaṃ āghātaṃ. Visaṭanti vitthataṃ. Sappavisanti sappassa visaṃ. Ivāti opammavacanaṃ. I-kāralopaṃ katvā va-icceva vuttaṃ. Osadhehīti agadehi. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā visatikicchako vejjo sappena daṭṭho sabbaṃ kāyaṃ pharitvā ṭhitaṃ visaṭaṃ sappavisaṃ mūlakhandhatacapattapupphādīnaṃ aññatarehi, nānābhesajjehi payojetvā katehi vā osadhehi khippameva vineyya, evameva yo yathāvuttena āghātavatthunā uppatitaṃ cittasantānaṃ byāpetvā ṭhitaṃ kodhaṃ vinayanupāyesu tadaṅgavinayādīsu yena kenaci upāyena vineti nādhivāseti pajahati vinodeti byantiṃ karoti, so bhikkhu jahāti orapāraṃ. So evaṃ kodhaṃ vinento bhikkhu yasmā kodho tatiyamaggena sabbaso pahīyati, tasmā orapārasaññitāni pañcorambhāgiyasaṃyojanāni jahātīti. Avisesena hi pāranti tīrassa nāmaṃ, tasmā orāni ca tāni saṃsārasāgarassa pārabhūtāni cāti katvā ‘‘orapāra’’nti vuccati.
或者,就像有人用药物治好已经发作、蔓延开来的蛇毒一样,那位比丘以第三道彻底断除了嗔怒,安住在不还果中,舍弃此岸与彼岸。其中,“此岸”指自己的身体,“彼岸”指他人的身体。或者说,“此岸”是六内处,“彼岸”是六外处。同样,“此岸”是人界,“彼岸”是天界;“此岸”是欲界,“彼岸”是色界和无色界;“此岸”是欲有和色有,“彼岸”是无色有;“此岸”是自己的肉身,“彼岸”是让肉身快乐的种种用具。这样一来,在这个此岸与彼岸的范围内,以第四道断除欲贪的人,就称为“舍弃此岸与彼岸”。在这里,虽然不还者因为已经断除了欲贪,确实不再对今生自己的身体等有欲贪,但为了彰显他的功德,把这一切此岸与彼岸的分类统摄起来,以断除对它们的欲贪,而说“舍弃此岸与彼岸”。巴利
Atha vā yo uppatitaṃ vineti kodhaṃ visaṭaṃ sappavisaṃva osadhehi, so tatiyamaggena sabbaso kodhaṃ vinetvā anāgāmiphale ṭhito bhikkhu jahāti orapāraṃ. Tattha oranti sakattabhāvo. Pāranti parattabhāvo. Oraṃ vā cha ajjhattikāni āyatanāni, pāraṃ cha bāhirāyatanāni. Tathā oraṃ manussaloko, pāraṃ devaloko. Oraṃ kāmadhātu, pāraṃ rūpārūpadhātu. Oraṃ kāmarūpabhavo, pāraṃ arūpabhavo. Oraṃ attabhāvo, pāraṃ attabhāvasukhupakaraṇāni. Evametasmiṃ orapāre catutthamaggena chandarāgaṃ pajahanto ‘‘jahāti orapāra’’nti vuccati. Ettha ca kiñcāpi anāgāmino kāmarāgassa pahīnattā idhattabhāvādīsu chandarāgo eva natthi, apica kho panassa vaṇṇappakāsanatthaṃ sabbametaṃ orapārabhedaṃ saṅgahetvā tattha chandarāgappahānena ‘‘jahāti orapāra’’nti vuttaṃ.
现在为了说明这个意思,用譬喻来说:“就像蛇蜕去老旧、陈腐的皮。”这里,“以胸行走的”就是蛇,这是蛇的别名。蛇有两种:有欲色的和无欲色的。有欲色的又分两种:水生的和陆生的。水生的只在水中才能得到欲色,在陆地上不行,就像《僧伽波罗本生》里的僧伽波罗龙王那样。陆生的只在陆地上才能得到欲色,在水中不行。那皮因为衰老而变旧,因为时间久了而称为陈腐,蛇舍弃它时,以四种方式舍弃:安住于同类中、厌嫌、依靠、用力。所谓“同类”,就是蛇这一类、长身的生命。因为蛇在五种情况下不会离开同类:投生时、死亡时、大小便和睡眠时、与同类交合时、以及蜕去旧皮时。所以当它蜕皮时,是安住在同类中而舍弃的。虽然安住在同类中,却是带着厌嫌而舍弃。所谓“带着厌嫌”,就是当皮一半已经脱落、另一半还挂着悬垂时,它对此感到厌烦而舍弃。这样带着厌嫌而舍弃时,也是依靠树枝之间、树根之间或岩石之间而舍弃。依靠而舍弃时,还会鼓起力气、发起干劲,以精进力把尾巴弯起来,一边呼气一边昂起头来舍弃。这样舍弃之后,就随心所欲地离开了。巴利
Idāni tassatthassa vibhāvanatthāya upamaṃ āha ‘‘urago jiṇṇamivattacaṃ purāṇa’’nti. Tattha urena gacchatīti urago, sappassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. So duvidho kāmarūpī ca akāmarūpī ca. Kāmarūpīpi duvidho jalajo thalajo ca. Jalajo jale eva kāmarūpaṃ labhati, na thale saṅkhapālajātake (jā. 2.17.143 ādayo) saṅkhapālanāgarājā viya. Thalajo thale eva, na jale. So jajjarabhāvena jiṇṇaṃ, cirakālatāya purāṇañcāti saṅkhaṃ gataṃ tacaṃ jahanto catubbidhena jahati sajātiyaṃ ṭhito jigucchanto nissāya thāmenāti. Sajāti nāma sappajāti dīghattabhāvo. Uragā hi pañcasu ṭhānesu sajātiṃ nātivattanti upapattiyaṃ cutiyaṃ vissaṭṭhaniddokkamane sajātiyā methunapaṭisevane jiṇṇatacāpanayane cāti. Tasmā yadā tacaṃ jahati, tadā sajātiyaṃyeva ṭhatvā jahati. Sajātiyaṃ ṭhitopi ca jigucchanto jahati. Jigucchanto nāma yadā upaḍḍhaṭṭhāne mutto hoti, upaḍḍhaṭṭhāne amutto olambati, tadā naṃ aṭṭīyanto jahati, evaṃ jigucchantopi ca daṇḍantaraṃ vā mūlantaraṃ vā pāsāṇantaraṃ vā nissāya jahati. Nissāya jahantopi ca thāmaṃ janetvā ussāhaṃ karitvā vīriyena vaṅkaṃ naṅguṭṭhaṃ katvā passasantova phaṇaṃ karitvā jahati. Evaṃ jahitvā yenakāmaṃ pakkamati.
同样地,这位比丘想舍弃此岸与彼岸时,也以四种方式舍弃:安住于同类中、厌离、依靠、用力。对比丘来说,所谓“同类”,依据“已生于圣洁之生”这句话,指的就是戒。因此说:“具慧之人立足于戒。”这样,这位安住于同类中的比丘,对于那分为自身等各种形态的此岸与彼岸,就像对老旧衰朽的皮一样,通过处处观察到它的过患而厌离它,依靠善知识,生起被称为“增上正精进”的力量,按照“白天经行、宴坐,以清除障碍法来净化心”的说法,把昼夜分成六段,精勤努力。就像蛇盘起弯曲的尾巴一样,他结跏趺坐;就像蛇呼气一样,他在不懈怠的精进中努力;就像蛇昂起头一样,他生起智慧的光明;就像蛇蜕去皮一样,他也舍弃此岸与彼岸。舍弃之后,就像蛇蜕去皮后随心所欲地离去,这位已卸下重担的比丘,也朝向无余涅槃界的方向而去。巴利
Evameva ayampi bhikkhu orapāraṃ jahitukāmo catubbidhena jahati sajātiyaṃ ṭhito jigucchanto nissāya thāmenāti. Sajāti nāma bhikkhuno ‘‘ariyāya jātiyā jāto’’ti (ma. ni. 2.351) vacanato sīlaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘sīle patiṭṭhāya naro sapañño’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.23, 192). Evametissaṃ sajātiyaṃ ṭhito bhikkhu taṃ sakattabhāvādibhedaṃ orapāraṃ jiṇṇapurāṇattacamiva taṃ dukkhaṃ janentaṃ tattha tattha ādīnavadassanena jigucchanto kalyāṇamitte nissāya adhimattasammāvāyāmasaṅkhātaṃ thāmaṃ janetvā ‘‘divasaṃ caṅkamena nisajjāya āvaraṇīyehi dhammehi cittaṃ parisodhetī’’ti (a. ni. 3.16; 4.37) vuttanayena rattindivaṃ chadhā vibhajitvā ghaṭento vāyamanto urago viya vaṅkaṃ naṅguṭṭhaṃ pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā urago viya passasanto ayampi asithilaparakkamatāya vāyamanto uragova phaṇaṃ karitvā ayampi ñāṇavipphāraṃ janetvā uragova tacaṃ orapāraṃ jahati, jahitvā ca urago viya ohitataco yenakāmaṃ pakkamati, ayampi ohitabhāro anupādisesanibbānadhātudisaṃ pakkamatīti.
90 “Bhavanti”这个词,是通过根已扎稳、变成青绿色而正在生长的幼树来显示的。“Ahuvu”这个词,则是通过已经长大、挺立的大树、灌木等来显示的。“Bhavanti”的解释是“出生、增长”,“Ahuvu”的解释是“已出生、已增长”。“Rāsī”指纯粹的八法之聚。“Bhūtānaṃ”指这样得名的那些八法。即使说“众生之村落”,由于离开部分就没有整体,所谓“众生”抓取的正是那些草、树、藤蔓等本身。也有人说:“草木等扎根于大地、呈现绿色后,被天神守护,因为是众生的住处,所以叫‘众生之村落’。”“Rukkhādīnaṃ”(树木等)里的“等”字,应当知道包括药草、灌木、藤蔓等。巴利
90.Bhavantīti iminā viruḷhamūle nīlabhāvaṃ āpajjitvā vaḍḍhamānake taruṇagacche dasseti. Ahuvunti iminā pana vaḍḍhitvā ṭhite mahante rukkhagacchādike dasseti. Bhavantīti imassa vivaraṇaṃ ‘‘jāyanti vaḍḍhantī’’ti, ahuvunti imassa ‘‘jātā vaḍḍhitā’’ti. Rāsīti suddhaṭṭhakadhammasamūho. Bhūtānanti tathāladdhasamaññānaṃ aṭṭhadhammānaṃ. ‘‘Bhūtānaṃ gāmo’’ti vuttepi avayavavinimuttassa samudāyassa abhāvato bhūtasaññitā teyeva tiṇarukkhalatādayo gayhanti. ‘‘Bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhahitvā haritabhāvamāpannā rukkhagacchādayo devatāhi pariggayhanti, tasmā bhūtānaṃ nivāsaṭṭhānatāya bhūtānaṃ gāmo’’tipi vadanti. Rukkhādīnanti ādi-saddena osadhigacchalatādayo veditabbā.
难道树木等因为没有心识,就不是有命(jīva)的吗?应当知道,没有心识可以从这些方面来判断:没有活动、被砍断后还能再生、属于不同种类,以及不属于四生所摄。可是,增长在珊瑚、石盐等上面也存在,所以这不能成为它们有命的理由。它们执取对象也只是假设而已,就像梦中的景象,同样,怀孕欲望之类也是如此。那么,为什么对砍伐等行为以这些因缘而说犯波逸提罪呢?是为了随顺沙门的身分,以及为了保护住在其中的众生。因此说:“愚人于树中起生命想”等等。巴利
Nanu ca rukkhādayo cittarahitatāya na jīvā, cittarahitatā ca paripphandābhāvato chinnepi ruhanato visadisajātikabhāvato catuyoniapariyāpannato ca veditabbā, vuḍḍhi pana pavāḷasilālavaṇānampi vijjatīti na tesaṃ jīvabhāve kāraṇaṃ, visayaggahaṇañca nesaṃ parikappanāmattaṃ supanaṃ viya ciñcādīnaṃ, tathā dohaḷādayo, tattha kasmā bhūtagāmassa chedanādipaccayā pācittiyaṃ vuttanti? Samaṇasāruppato taṃnivāsasattānurakkhaṇato ca. Tenevāha ‘‘jīvasaññino hi moghapurisā manussā rukkhasmi’’ntiādi.
91 关于“从根出生”等说法,其含义在后文自己将要讲述的方式中,已见于锡兰注释,所以说“即便如此……也不相符”。“vijāta”这个词在这里是省略了“vi-”前缀而显示的,所以说“vijātāni”(已生出的)。“vijāta”这个词,就像“已生产的女人”等用法一样,是表示“已生产”的词,所以说“pasūtāni”(已生产的)。而这里所谓的“生产”,是指已经长出了叶和根,所以说“nibbattapaṇṇamūlāni”(已长出叶和根的)。以此来说明:“已长出叶和根的种子,才算归入有情聚的范畴;而用于这些的‘bījajāta’(种子所生)一词,依照惯用法也用于树木等。”不过,在前一种释义中,只有从种子生出的树木、藤蔓等才被称为有情聚。巴利
91. ‘‘Mūle jāyantī’’tiādīsu attho upari attanā vuccamānappakārena sīhaḷaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttoti āha ‘‘evaṃ santepi…pe… na samentī’’ti. Vijāta-saddo idha vi-saddalopaṃ katvā niddiṭṭhoti āha ‘‘vijātānī’’ti. Vijāta-saddo ca ‘‘vijātā itthī’’tiādīsu viya pasūtavacanoti āha ‘‘pasūtānī’’ti. Pasūti ca nāmettha nibbattapaṇṇamūlatāti āha ‘‘nibbattapaṇṇamūlānī’’ti. Iminā imaṃ dīpeti ‘‘nibbattapaṇṇamūlāni bījāni bhūtagāmasaṅkhameva gacchanti, tesu ca vattamāno bījajāta-saddo ruḷhīvasena rukkhādīsupi vattatī’’ti. Purimasmiṃ atthavikappe pana bījehi jātānaṃ rukkhalatādīnaṃyeva bhūtagāmatā vuttā.
“显示它们”是指显示那些种子。在“根种子”等说法里,根本身就是种子,所以叫根种子;其余各项也是同样的道理。“果种子”就是节种子。当各种条件聚合时,因为能生出相似的果,所以它是特殊的原因,因此“种子”这个词被用在有生长能力的坚实果上。为了说明这个意思,这个词有时也用在根等上面,所以为了从根等中区分出来,就用一个“种子”来限定,说成“种种子”,就像说“色、色”“苦、苦”一样。由种子所生的种子被显示出来,这是以果来代指因,也就是在说明这个意思。巴利
Tāni dassentoti tāni bījāni dassento. Mūlabījantiādīsu mūlameva bījaṃ mūlabījaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Phaḷubījanti pabbabījaṃ. Paccayantarasamavāye sadisaphaluppattiyā visesakāraṇabhāvato viruhanasamatthe sāraphale niruḷho bīja-saddo. Tadatthasaṃsiddhiyā mūlādīsupi kesuci pavattatīti mūlādito nivattanatthaṃ ekena bījasaddena visesetvā vuttaṃ ‘‘bījabīja’’nti ‘‘rūparūpaṃ, dukkhadukkha’’nti ca yathā. Bījato nibbattena bījaṃ dassitanti kāriyopacārena kāraṇaṃ dassitanti dīpeti.
92 92.“对种子有种子想”——这里是为了说明“以因代果”的说法,才说“其中,就像……”等话。“除去草木”意思是从草木中脱离、分开。“凡是种子,就名为草木”,这是针对“那些既是种子又是已生的”这个意思说的。其中,“凡是种子”指已经长出叶和根的种子。“在那个种子上”就是在那个被称为草木的种子上。这里应当知道,就像“种子类”这个词依照习惯用法可以用在树木等上面一样,“种子”这个词的用法也是依照习惯用法。“如文”,即依巴利原文。巴利
92.Bīje bījasaññīti ettha kāraṇūpacārena kāriyaṃ vuttanti dassento ‘‘tattha yathā’’tiādimāha. Bhūtagāmaparimocanaṃ katvāti bhūtagāmato mocetvā, viyojetvāti attho. Yaṃ bījaṃ bhūtagāmo nāma hotīti bījāni ca tāni jātāni cāti vuttamatthaṃ sandhāya vadati. Tattha yaṃ bījanti yaṃ nibbattapaṇṇamūlaṃ bījaṃ. Tasmiṃ bījeti tasmiṃ bhūtagāmasaññite bīje. Ettha ca bījajāta-saddassa viya ruḷhīvasena rukkhādīsu bīja-saddassapi pavatti veditabbā. Yathārutanti yathāpāḷi.
“在任何地方”是指在根部、顶端或中间。“故意拔起则不允许”——在这里,即使知道身体上附着有东西而从水中站起来,因为心里没有“我要把它拔出来”的想法,所以是允许的。“被拔出的”就是被拔起来的。说“归入种子类”,是因为已经从草木中脱离出来的缘故。用“无尾的”这个词,是把芥子大小的也包括进去了。这确实是那种苔藓类植物的名称。因为根和叶不完整,所以说“名为不完整的草木”。“因为不是草木之根”——这里,“草木为根”是指草木是它的根、是它的因,或者草木的根是因,所以叫草木根。因为种子类确实是从草木生起的,又是草木的因,而这个不完整的并不是这样,所以说“因为不是草木之根”。因为属于那一类,所以说“它被种子类所摄”。这也是根据“因为不是草木之根”中首先所说的意义而说的。虽然棕榈、椰子等的树桩因为不再向上生长,不是草木的因,但因为它是从已算作草木、已长出叶和根的种子所生,所以名为从草木所生,因此归入种子类。巴利
Yattha katthacīti mūle agge majjhe vā. Sañcicca ukkhipituṃ na vaṭṭatīti ettha sacepi sarīre laggabhāvaṃ jānantova udakato uṭṭhahati, ‘‘taṃ uddharissāmī’’ti saññāya abhāvato vaṭṭati. Uppāṭitānīti uddhaṭāni. Bījagāme saṅgahaṃ gacchantīti bhūtagāmato parimocitattā vuttaṃ. Anantaka-ggahaṇena sāsapamattikā gahitā. Nāmañhetaṃ tassā sevālajātiyā . Mūlapaṇṇānaṃ asampuṇṇattā ‘‘asampuṇṇabhūtagāmo nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ. Abhūtagāmamūlattāti ettha bhūtagāmo mūlaṃ kāraṇaṃ etassāti bhūtagāmamūlo, bhūtagāmassa vā mūlaṃ kāraṇanti bhūtagāmamūlaṃ. Bījagāmo hi nāma bhūtagāmato sambhavati, bhūtagāmassa ca kāraṇaṃ hoti, ayaṃ pana tādiso na hotīti ‘‘abhūtagāmamūlattā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tatraṭṭhakattā vuttaṃ ‘‘so bījagāmena saṅgahito’’ti. Idañca ‘‘abhūtagāmamūlattā’’ti ettha paṭhamaṃ vuttaatthasambhavato vuttaṃ. Kiñcāpi hi tālanāḷikerādīnaṃ khāṇu uddhaṃ avaḍḍhanato bhūtagāmassa kāraṇaṃ na hoti, tathāpi bhūtagāmasaṅkhyupagatanibbattapaṇṇamūlabījato sambhūtattā bhūtagāmato uppanno nāma hotīti bījagāmena saṅgahaṃ gacchati.
说了“在绿色的嫩芽上”之后,为了说明它,又说“当青色叶子的颜色生起时”,意思是:当生起的颜色与青色叶子的颜色相似时。或者也可以采用“当青色生起时”这个读法。说“归入无根的草木类”,是把椰子单独提出来说的。他们说:“饮水罐等外面生的苔藓,因为不立在水中,又随顺种子类,所以是恶作的事由。”即使是耳状的,也是无关紧要的,所以即使是青色的,也无关紧要。Seleyyaka是一种从石头生出的芳香种类。他们说:“因为说了‘破坏树皮’,所以树上生的任何菌类,只要不破坏树皮、从顶端截取,就可以拿。”关于“从树脱离而站立”,他们说:“即使还有一点点附着在树上而站立,拿取时不破坏树皮,就可以。”关于“从活树则不可以”,这里也应知道:不破坏树皮、从顶端削取,就可以。“以手的不安分”,是指以手的无节制,也就是手的轻率。说“饮水不应存放”,这是指为自己而取的水。但如果最初是为未受具足戒者而取,之后从他那里得到,就没有“不应存放”的问题。他们说:“因为经中说‘哪些树的枝条能生根’,所以对那些枝条不能生根的树,没有作净的必要。”巴利
‘‘Aṅkure harite’’ti vatvā tameva vibhāveti ‘‘nīlapaṇṇavaṇṇe jāte’’ti, nīlapaṇṇassa vaṇṇasadise vaṇṇe jāteti attho. ‘‘Nīlavaṇṇe jāte’’ti vā pāṭho gahetabbo. Amūlakabhūtagāme saṅgahaṃ gacchatīti nāḷikerassa āveṇikaṃ katvā vadati. ‘‘Pānīyaghaṭādīnaṃ bahi sevālo udake aṭṭhitattā bījagāmānulomattā ca dukkaṭavatthū’’ti vadanti. Kaṇṇakampi abbohārikamevāti nīlavaṇṇampi abbohārikameva. Seleyyakaṃ nāma silāya sambhūtā ekā sugandhajāti. ‘‘Rukkhattacaṃ vikopetīti vuttattā rukkhe jātaṃ yaṃ kiñci chattakaṃ rukkhattacaṃ avikopetvā matthakato chinditvā gahetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. Rukkhato muccitvā tiṭṭhatīti ettha ‘‘yadipi kiñcimattaṃ rukkhe allīnā hutvā tiṭṭhati, rukkhato gayhamāno pana rukkhacchaviṃ na vikopeti, vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. Allarukkhato na vaṭṭatīti etthāpi rukkhattacaṃ avikopetvā matthakato tacchetvā gahetuṃ vaṭṭatīti veditabbaṃ. Hatthakukkuccenāti hatthānaṃ asaṃyatabhāvena, hatthacāpallenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Pānīyaṃ na vāsetabbanti idaṃ attano atthāya nāmitaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Kevalaṃ anupasampannassa atthāya nāmite pana pacchā tato labhitvā na vāsetabbanti natthi. ‘‘Yesaṃ rukkhānaṃ sākhā ruhatīti vuttattā yesaṃ sākhā na ruhati, tattha kappiyakaraṇakiccaṃ natthī’’ti vadanti.
93 以五种沙门惯用法来说:就是以五种沙门的称呼方式。虽然种子仅仅被火碰到、仅仅被指甲等刮划,并不会因此就失去能生长的性质,但即使这样做了之后,对沙门来说就算是可以用的,所以“火烧”等就被称为沙门惯用法。因此,意思是:我允许用这些沙门惯用法作为手段来受用果实。即使是本来没有种子、以及已经去掉种子的,对沙门来说也算可以用,因为这是施设规定的,所以也就以“沙门惯用法”这个名称来称呼。或者,这里的意思应该理解为:正因为火烧等五种是合乎沙门用的,所以我允许以这五种称为沙门净法的因缘来受用果实。在“火烧”等说法中,也有人读作“paricita”(惯习)。所谓“无种子”,是指嫩芒果等果实。所谓“已去掉种子”,是指芒果、菠萝蜜等,也就是把种子去掉、分开后可以受用的。“说了‘净’之后才应该做”——因为这里说的是作净者应当做的做法,所以不应该理解为比丘不说也可以做。又因为“应令作净”这种使役说法一开始就已经说了,所以应该理解为:只有比丘说了“作净吧”之后,未受具足戒的人说了“净”之后,才应该做火烧等。他们说:“‘净’这个词可以用任何语言来说。”从“说了‘净’之后才应该做”这句话可知,应该先说“净”,然后再用火等接触等来做。他们说:“先把火放好,或者用指甲等刺穿之后,不把它取出来,也可以说‘净’。”巴利
93.Pañcahisamaṇakappehīti pañcahi samaṇavohārehi. Kiñcāpi hi bījānaṃ agginā phuṭṭhamattena nakhādīhi vilikhanamattena ca aviruḷhīdhammatā na hoti, tathāpi evaṃ kateyeva samaṇānaṃ kappatīti aggiparijitādayo samaṇavohārā nāma jātā, tasmā tehi samaṇavohārehi karaṇabhūtehi phalaṃ paribhuñjituṃ anujānāmīti adhippāyo. Abījanibbaṭṭabījānipi samaṇānaṃ kappantīti paññattapaṇṇattibhāvato samaṇavohārāicceva saṅkhaṃ gatāni. Atha vā aggiparijitādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ kappiyabhāvatoyeva pañcahi samaṇakappiyabhāvasaṅkhātehi kāraṇehi phalaṃ paribhuñjituṃ anujānāmīti evamettha adhippāyo veditabbo. Aggiparijitantiādīsu ‘‘paricita’’ntipi paṭhanti. Abījaṃ nāma taruṇambaphalādi. Nibbaṭṭabījaṃ nāma ambapanasādi, yaṃ bījaṃ nibbaṭṭetvā visuṃ katvā paribhuñjituṃ sakkā hoti. ‘‘Kappiya’’nti vatvāva kātabbanti yo kappiyaṃ karoti, tena kattabbākārasseva vuttattā bhikkhunā avuttepi kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti na gahetabbaṃ. Puna ‘‘kappiyaṃ kāretabba’’nti kārāpanassa paṭhamameva kathitattā bhikkhunā ‘‘kappiyaṃ karohī’’ti vutteyeva anupasampannena ‘‘kappiya’’nti vatvā aggiparijitādi kātabbanti gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Kappiyanti vacanaṃ pana yāya kāyaci bhāsāya vattuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Kappiyanti vatvāva kātabba’’nti vacanato paṭhamaṃ ‘‘kappiya’’nti vatvā pacchā aggiādinā phusanādi kātabbanti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Paṭhamaṃ aggiṃ nikkhipitvā nakhādinā vā vijjhitvā taṃ anuddharitvāva ‘kappiya’nti vattumpi vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti.
在“一粒种子”等说法中,他们说:即使心里的意思是“我只做一粒”,但因为整体是连在一起算的,所以全部都成了已做。在“刺穿木材”中,他们说:即使知道(有生命)而刺穿,或让别人刺穿,也是可以的。在“刺穿饭粒”中,也是同样的道理。他们说:刺穿那饭粒则不可以,因为绳等物属于容器一类。在“与胡椒等混合”中,应当知道,整体连在一起是就与饭粒的关联来说的,不是就果实彼此之间的关联来说的。“令破开后,应使作净”,这是因为从种子脱出来的壳属于容器一类。巴利
Ekasmiṃ bīje vātiādīsu ‘‘ekaṃyeva kāremīti adhippāye satipi ekābaddhattā sabbaṃ katameva hotī’’ti vadanti. Dāruṃ vijjhatīti ettha ‘‘jānitvāpi vijjhati vā vijjhāpeti vā, vaṭṭatiyevā’’ti vadanti. Bhattasitthe vijjhatīti etthāpi eseva nayo. ‘‘Taṃ vijjhati, na vaṭṭatīti rajjuādīnaṃ bhājanagatikattā’’ti vadanti. Maricapakkādīhi missetvāti ettha bhattasitthasambandhavasena ekābaddhatā veditabbā, na phalānaṃyeva aññamaññaṃ sambandhavasena. Bhindāpetvā kappiyaṃ kārāpetabbanti bījato muttassa kaṭāhassa bhājanagatikattā vuttaṃ.
“令出去”就是让那位比丘离开。“如果这对那件事是随顺的”,这句话的意思可能是:即使是为了保护住处而允许的施火等做法,自己也可以做,仅凭这一点,这就是“这对那件事是随顺的”。施火和作护卫,为了保护自己或他人的住处,确实都是可以的。所以,如果那段经文对此是随顺的,那么“自己不可以,别人可以”这种差别又从哪儿来呢?因此说“自己不可以……不可得”。这里其余的内容显而易见。而“有生命植物、有生命植物想、破坏或令破坏”,这里是三个要素。巴利
Nikkhāmetunti taṃ bhikkhuṃ nikkhāmetuṃ. ‘‘Sace etassa anuloma’’nti senāsanarakkhaṇatthāya anuññātampi paṭaggidānādiṃ attanāpi kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti ettakeneva idampi etassa anulomanti evamadhippāyo siyā. Paṭaggidānaṃ parittakaraṇañca attano parassa vā senāsanarakkhaṇatthāya vaṭṭatiyeva. Tasmā sace tassa suttassa etaṃ anulomaṃ siyā, attano na vaṭṭati, aññassa vaṭṭatīti ayaṃ viseso kuto labbhatīti āha ‘‘attano na vaṭṭati…pe… na sakkā laddhu’’nti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Bhūtagāmo, bhūtagāmasaññitā, vikopanaṃ vā vikopāpanaṃ vāti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
2. 异语学处注释巴利
2. Aññavādakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
94-98 94-98. 在第二条(学处)中,“以其他话”是指:举罪者为了向被举罪者说明其过失而说的话,被举罪者用与那完全不同的话来回避。或者,“以他事回避他事”的意思是以另一个理由来回避另一个理由,这里应当这样理解:举罪者说出了被举罪者过失的理由,对方却用另一个能表明举罪没有根据的理由来回应,这就是所说的意思。“回避”是指以覆藏的方式行事,也就是转起的意思。又或者,“行”这个词因为词根有多种含义,本身就有覆藏的意思,所以说“覆藏”。因此说“覆藏”。在巴利文中,从“犯了什么罪?”等开始,显示的是不回答举罪,而以散乱话题的方式用他事回避他事。此外还应当知道一种超出巴利文之外的以他事回避他事:回答举罪之后,以把话题引向外面的方式转起。比如被问“你犯了某某罪”时,回答说“我去过华氏城”;再被追问“不是问你华氏城之行,是问你的罪”时,又说“从那里我去了王舍城”;被说“去王舍城也好,去婆罗门家也好,你犯了罪”时,又说“在那里我得到了猪肉”等等,像这样把话题向外散乱的人,就叫做“以他事回避他事”。巴利
94-98. Dutiye aññaṃ vacananti yaṃ codakena cuditakassa dosavibhāvanavacanaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ tato aññeneva vacanena paṭicarati. Atha vā aññenaññaṃ paṭicaratīti aññena kāraṇena aññaṃ kāraṇaṃ paṭicaratīti evamettha attho veditabbo, yaṃ codakena cuditakassa dosavibhāvanakāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ, tato aññena codanāya amūlakabhāvadīpakena kāraṇena paṭicaratīti vuttaṃ hoti. Paṭicaratīti ca paṭicchādanavasena carati, pavattatīti attho. Paṭicchādanattho eva vā carati-saddo anekatthattā dhātūnaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘paṭicchādetī’’ti. Ko āpannotiādinā pāḷiyaṃ codanaṃ avissajjetvā vikkhepāpajjanavasena aññena aññaṃ paṭicaraṇaṃ dassitaṃ. Aparampi pana codanaṃ vissajjetvā bahiddhā kathāapanāmavasena pavattaṃ pāḷimuttakaṃ aññenaññaṃ paṭicaraṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Itthannāmaṃ āpattiṃ āpannosī’’ti puṭṭho ‘‘pāṭaliputtaṃ gatomhī’’ti vatvā puna ‘‘na tava pāṭaliputtagamanaṃ pucchāma, āpattiṃ pucchāmā’’ti vutte ‘‘tato rājagahaṃ gatomhī’’ti vatvā ‘‘rājagahaṃ vā yāhi brāhmaṇagahaṃ vā, āpattiṃ āpannosī’’ti vutte ‘‘tattha me sūkaramaṃsaṃ laddha’’ntiādīni vatvāva kathaṃ bahiddhā vikkhipantopi hi ‘‘aññenaññaṃ paṭicarati’’cceva saṅkhaṃ gacchati.
这种以甲事回避乙事的方式而说出来的话,就是搁置所问的义理而说别的,所以叫“异语者”,因此说“这叫做以甲事回避乙事”。所谓“这叫做默然者的”,就是默然状态的名称,或者这本身就是原文的读法。“令承担异语者”,就是令承担异语者的羯磨,或者令承担现在正施行的羯磨所成立的异语者身份,这就是意思。“令承担恼害者”这里也一样,应当理解为令承担恼害者的羯磨或恼害者的身份。巴利
Yadetaṃ aññena aññaṃ paṭicaraṇavasena pavattavacanaṃ, tadeva pucchitamatthaṃ ṭhapetvā aññaṃ vadatīti aññavādakanti āha ‘‘aññenaññaṃ paṭicaraṇassetaṃ nāma’’nti. Tuṇhībhūtassetaṃ nāmanti tuṇhībhāvassetaṃ nāmaṃ, ayameva vā pāṭho. Aññavādakaṃ āropetūti aññavādakakammaṃ āropetu, aññavādakattaṃ vā idāni kariyamānena kammena āropetūti attho. Vihesakaṃ āropetūti etthāpi vihesakakammaṃ vihesakabhāvaṃ vā āropetūti evamattho daṭṭhabbo.
对于尚未被判定为异语者的情况,巴利原文中所说的恶作,是按“以他事回避他事”的方式成立的。但依据注释书中所说、超出巴利原文的“以他事回避他事”的方式,在尚未被判定为异语者时,是以妄语犯波逸提;在被判定之后,则正是以此学处犯波逸提,应当这样理解。不过有些人说:“在被判定为异语者时,既以妄语犯波逸提,也以此学处犯波逸提,共有两个波逸提。”这种说法要经过考察之后再决定是否采纳。至于所说的“最初犯者无犯”,也应当看作是对巴利原文中“以他事回避他事”的情形而说的,或者是为了说明依此学处无犯的情况。其余部分浅显易懂。通过如法羯磨而被判定、正被就罪或事进行追问、以想要覆藏之心而以他事回避他事或保持沉默,这些就是此处构成犯戒的三个条件。巴利
Anāropite aññavādake vuttadukkaṭaṃ pāḷiyaṃ āgataaññenaññaṃpaṭicaraṇavasena yujjati . Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ āgatena pana pāḷimuttakaaññenaññaṃpaṭicaraṇavasena anāropite aññavādake musāvādena pācittiyaṃ, āropite imināva pācittiyanti veditabbaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘āropite aññavādake musāvādena iminā ca pācittiyadvayaṃ hotī’’ti vadanti, taṃ vīmaṃsitvā gahetabbaṃ. Yā sā ādikammikassa anāpatti vuttā, sāpi pāḷiyaṃ āgataaññenaññaṃpaṭicaraṇavasena vuttāti daṭṭhabbā, iminā sikkhāpadena anāpattidassanatthaṃ vā. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Dhammakammena āropitatā, āpattiyā vā vatthunā vā anuyuñjiyamānatā, chādetukāmatāya aññenaññaṃ paṭicaraṇaṃ vā tuṇhībhāvo vāti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
3. 讥嫌学处的注释巴利
3. Ujjhāpanakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
103 在第三品《界诵》中,“jhe”这个音被列为“思惟”的意思,所以(注释者)说“以低劣的方式令思惟”等等。而且应当知道,由于词根有多种含义,这里也可以是“观察”的意思。就像在“以字母令诵”等(波逸提第46条)中那样,这里的“chandāya”是因为语法性别的颠倒而说的,所以(注释者)说“以欲(chandena)”。巴利
103. Tatiye dhātupāṭhe jhe-saddo cintāyaṃ paṭhitoti āha ‘‘lāmakato vā cintāpentī’’tiādi. Ayameva ca anekatthattā dhātūnaṃ olokanatthopi hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Akkharāya vācetī’’tiādīsu (pāci. 46) viya ‘‘chandāyā’’ti liṅgavipallāsavasena vuttanti āha ‘‘chandenā’’ti.
105 “以什么言语”是指用“某某人出于欲而做这件事”这类话。“又因为什么而嫌责”是指用“某某人出于欲……”这类话,站在各处比丘能听见的范围内,宣扬他们的过失。巴利
105.Yena vacanenāti yena ‘‘chandāya itthannāmo idaṃ nāma karotī’’tiādivacanena. Yena ca khiyyantīti yena ‘‘chandāya itthannāmo’’tiādivacanena tattha tattha bhikkhūnaṃ savanūpacāre ṭhatvā avaṇṇaṃ pakāsenti.
106 “令其他未受具足戒者嫌责”是指借助其他未受具足戒者来令他嫌责。“或在他面前抱怨那件事”是指在那位未受具足戒者面前,抱怨那位被僧团认可为受具足戒的人,或者以说过失的方式加以宣扬。“未受具足戒者被僧团认可”这里,曾经被认可的人被称为“认可”。因此说“虽然”等话。因为令人嫌责和抱怨都只是以妄语的方式生起的,所以对最初犯者来说无犯——应当这样理解:这是为了显示在波逸提处和恶作处也依此而无犯。这样理解之后,令他人嫌责者和抱怨者在一刹那间各犯两条罪,这就成立了。或者,应当这样理解:这样的学处是先于妄语戒制定的。这里其余内容都很浅显。由如法羯磨而受认可、已受具足戒、没有恶行、想说他过失、在受具足戒者面前、令人嫌责或抱怨——这些就是这里的六支。巴利
106.Aññaṃ anupasampannaṃ ujjhāpetīti aññena anupasampannena ujjhāpeti. Tassa vā taṃ santike khiyyatīti tassa anupasampannassa santike taṃ saṅghena sammataṃ upasampannaṃ khiyyati, avaṇṇaṃ vadanto vā pakāseti. Anupasampannaṃ saṅghena sammatanti ettha sammatapubbo sammatoti vutto. Tenāha ‘‘kiñcāpī’’tiādi. Yasmā ujjhāpanaṃ khiyyanañca musāvādavaseneva pavattaṃ, tasmā ādikammikassa anāpattīti pācittiyaṭṭhāne dukkaṭaṭṭhāne ca imināva anāpattidassanatthaṃ vuttanti gahetabbaṃ. Evañca katvā ujjhāpentassa khiyyantassa ca ekakkhaṇe dve dve āpattiyo hontīti āpannaṃ. Atha vā īdisaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ musāvādato paṭhamaṃ paññattanti gahetabbaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Dhammakammena sammatatā, upasampannatā, agatigamanābhāvo , tassa avaṇṇakāmatā, yassa santike vadati, tassa upasampannatā, ujjhāpanaṃ vā khiyyanaṃ vāti imāni panettha cha aṅgāni.
第一坐卧处学处的注释巴利
4. Paṭhamasenāsanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
108-110 108-110. 在第四学处中,“雪山雨”说的就是雪雨。“不为人知”是指不熟悉、不出名,意思是没人知道、没人认可。三部《结句》里都说:从“在棚舍或树下”这句话来看,在露天庭院里也可以放置。“行于行处”是指前往行处。通过“八个月”这句话说明:即使雨季四个月不下雨,也照样禁止,所以说“从‘八个月’的说法来看……不可以放置”。其中,“四个月”是指雨季的四个月。通过“冬季雨的约定”这句话说明:即使在允许的八个月里,如果某个地方冬天下雨,那么那里另外四个月也被禁止,所以说“从‘冬季雨的约定’的说法来看”等等。由此说明:如果某个地方冬天下雨,那里就禁止八个月、允许四个月;如果某个地方只在雨季下雨,那里就禁止四个月、允许八个月。巴利
108-110. Catutthe himavassenāti himameva vuttaṃ. Apaññāteti appatīte, appasiddheti attho. ‘‘Maṇḍape vā rukkhamūle vāti vacanato vivaṭaṅgaṇepi nikkhipituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Gocarappasutāti gocaraṭṭhānaṃ paṭipannā. ‘‘Aṭṭha māse’’ti iminā vassānaṃ cātumāsaṃ cepi devo na vassati, paṭikkhittamevāti āha ‘‘aṭṭha māseti vacanato…pe… nikkhipituṃ na vaṭṭatiyevā’’ti. Tattha cattāro māseti vassānassa cattāro māse. Avassikasaṅketeti iminā anuññātepi aṭṭha māse yattha hemante devo vassati, tattha aparepi cattāro māsā paṭikkhittāti āha ‘‘avassikasaṅketeti vacanato’’tiādi. Iminā imaṃ dīpeti ‘‘yasmiṃ dese hemante devo vassati, tattha aṭṭha māse paṭikkhipitvā cattāro māsā anuññātā. Yattha pana vassāneyeva vassati, tattha cattāro māse paṭikkhipitvā aṭṭha māsā anuññātā’’ti.
按照这个道理就应该知道:在中间地区,凡是冬季下雪下雨的地方,那里也同样禁止八个月。所以,雨季时不能在普通露地、漏雨的棚子以及树底下铺设坐卧处;冬季时,在普通露地、漏雨的棚子等地方则可以铺设。不过,这仅限于冬季的雪雨不会淋湿坐卧处的地方;热季时在普通露地等地方也照样可以铺设,但仅限于没有非时云雨出现的时候。至于乌鸦等经常栖息的树底下,则任何时候都不可以铺设。这里的判定应当这样理解。巴利
Imināva nayena majjhimapadese yattha hemante himavassaṃ vassati, tatthāpi aṭṭheva māsā paṭikkhittāti veditabbā. Tasmā vassānakāle pakatiajjhokāse ovassakamaṇḍape rukkhamūle ca santharituṃ na vaṭṭati, hemantakāle pakatiajjhokāse ovassakamaṇḍapādīsupi vaṭṭati. Tañca kho yattha himavassena senāsanaṃ na temati, gimhakālepi pakatiajjhokāsādīsu vaṭṭatiyeva, tañca kho akālameghādassane, kākādīnaṃ nibaddhavāsarukkhamūle pana kadācipi na vaṭṭatīti evamettha vinicchayo veditabbo.
世尊正是把握了这一层特殊含义,才在最初就制定了这条学处,所以并没有另外再作补充制定。也正因为如此,《论母注》(《疑惑度脱》注·第一坐卧处学处释)里说:“因此,无论在哪里、在什么时候不该铺设,这一切在这里都归入露地这一类。”或者也可以这样理解:既然已经笼统地禁止了在露地铺设和让人铺设,那么仅仅以“在这样的时节、这样的地方可以放置”这一开许就已经足够了,因此不应认为学处中另外单独提出了补充制定。不过,《附随》(《附随》65-67)因为是随顺这条学处的义理而制定的,所以说“有一条补充制定”。巴利
Imañca pana atthavisesaṃ gahetvā bhagavatā paṭhamameva sikkhāpadaṃ paññattanti visuṃ anupaññatti na vuttā. Teneva hi mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paṭhamasenāsanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) vuttaṃ ‘‘iti yattha ca yadā ca santharituṃ na vaṭṭati, taṃ sabbamidha ajjhokāsasaṅkhameva gata’’nti. Atha vā avisesena ajjhokāse santharaṇasantharāpanāni paṭikkhipitvā ‘‘īdise kāle īdise ca padese ṭhapethā’’ti anujānanamatteneva alanti na sikkhāpade visuṃ anupaññatti uddhaṭāti veditabbā. Parivāre (pari. 65-67) pana imasseva sikkhāpadassa anurūpavasena paññattattā ‘‘ekā anupaññattī’’ti vuttaṃ.
“新织的布料不会很快坏掉”,所以经文说“或新织的”。覆皮者,就是用皮覆盖的。上等露地住者,这只是显示他心里那样想而已,并不是说上等露地住者不可以有衣舍。随身性,是说比丘就地存放衣物这件事。根据这一点,只是说在那个时候无犯;但如果从衣舍出去到别处,甚至进村乞食,那就还是有犯。诸师说:“施主在布施时,即使把价值千金的毛毯布施出来,说‘拿去当擦脚布用’,那就可以照那样用;同样,如果施主把床、椅等坐卧具布施出来时说‘这坐卧具即使在露地也可以随意使用’,那就在任何时候都可以放在露地。”应遣使而往,这里的意思是,应该说“若有比丘来到这住处安住,就布施给他”,然后派使者去。巴利
Navavāyimo sīghaṃ na nassatīti āha ‘‘navavāyimo vā’’ti. Onaddhakoti cammena onaddho. Ukkaṭṭhaabbhokāsikoti idaṃ tassa parivitakkadassanamattaṃ, ukkaṭṭhaabbhokāsikassa pana cīvarakuṭi na vaṭṭatīti natthi. Kāyānugatikattāti bhikkhuno tattheva sannihitabhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Iminā ca tasmiṃyeva kāle anāpatti vuttā, cīvarakuṭito nikkhamitvā pana aññattha gacchantassa piṇḍāya pavisantassapi āpattiyeva. ‘‘Yasmā pana dāyakehi dānakāleyeva sahassagghanakampi kambalaṃ ‘pādapuñchaniṃ katvā paribhuñjathā’ti dinnaṃ tatheva paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati, tasmā ‘imaṃ mañcapīṭhādisenāsanaṃ abbhokāsepi yathāsukhaṃ paribhuñjathā’ti dāyakehi dinnaṃ ce, sabbasmimpi kāle abbhokāse nikkhipituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. Pesetvā gantabbanti ettha ‘‘yo bhikkhu imaṃ ṭhānaṃ āgantvā vasati, tassa dethā’’ti vatvā pesetabbaṃ.
通过观察云层尚未升起的状况——应当知道,这也说明了:即使在热季,一旦云层升起,无论什么样的坐卧处所,比如床、椅等,都不可以放在露地上。有些人解释说,“面向脚落处”是指坐着的人脚落地的地方;另一些人说,是指扫地的人脚所在的地方;还有些人说,这是说为了不让沙子向外散落,应当取走脚落处的沙子。用手拿起垃圾丢到外面——这说明了不可以为了丢垃圾而把沙子也丢掉。巴利
Valāhakānaṃ anuṭṭhitabhāvaṃ sallakkhetvāti iminā ca gimhānepi meghe uṭṭhite mañcapīṭhādiṃ yaṃkiñci senāsanaṃ ajjhokāse nikkhipituṃ na vaṭṭatīti dīpitanti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Pādaṭṭhānābhimukhāti nisīdantānaṃ pādapatanaṭṭhānābhimukha’’nti keci. ‘‘Sammajjantassa pādaṭṭhānābhimukha’’nti apare. ‘‘Bahi vālukāya agamananimittaṃ pādaṭṭhānābhimukhā vālikā haritabbāti vutta’’nti eke . Kacavaraṃ hatthehi gahetvā bahi chaṭṭetabbanti iminā kacavaraṃ chaḍḍessāmīti vālikā na chaḍḍetabbāti dīpeti.
111 把芦苇叶等编成辫子,再用这条辫子在两边展开的地方大量缠绕,从那里开始一直到中间,用向内抽拉的方式卷缠,在中间收拢,然后横向在各处绑紧,这样做成的,就叫“内卷而缚”。“得许可而往”就是按照前面所说的那句话,得到许可才前往。因为他是遵照长老的命令前往的,所以没有犯戒。“依前所说方式”就是像前面已经说过的“坐下后自己前往”等那样。“往他处”就是越过那条路,到别的地方去。因为站在投石距离之外,所以说“应以举足来作判定”,往别处去的人,第一只脚抬起犯恶作,第二只脚抬起犯波逸提,这是其含义。“未恢复原状”就是未收摄归位。“于中间集会”就是在各各中间处集会。巴利
111.Anto saṃveṭhetvā baddhanti erakapattādīhi veṇiṃ katvā tāya veṇiyā ubhosu passesu vitthataṭṭhānesu bahuṃ veṭhetvā tato paṭṭhāya yāva majjhaṭṭhānaṃ, tāva anto ākaḍḍhanavasena veṭhetvā majjhe saṅkhipitvā tiriyaṃ tattha tattha bandhitvā kataṃ. Kappaṃ labhitvāti gacchāti vuttavacanena kappaṃ labhitvā. Therassa hi āṇattiyā gacchantassa anāpatti. Purimanayenevāti ‘‘nisīditvā sayaṃ gacchanto’’tiādinā pubbe vuttanayeneva. Aññattha gacchatīti taṃ maggaṃ atikkamitvā aññattha gacchati. Leḍḍupātupacārato bahi ṭhitattā ‘‘pāduddhārena kāretabbo’’ti vuttaṃ, aññattha gacchantassa paṭhamapāduddhāre dukkaṭaṃ, dutiyapāduddhāre pācittiyanti attho. Pākatikaṃ akatvāti appaṭisāmetvā. Antarasannipāteti antarantarā sannipāte.
“只是常住者的障碍”这句话的意思是:即使客比丘来了以后什么也没说,就坐在那里,障碍也只是常住者的障碍。《大护持》论中则说“在其他比丘来了坐下时”,意思是无论他们说了“这是我们的”还是没说,只要坐下了就算。《大注释》论中说“犯”,指的是波逸提罪。但在《大护持》中,因为铺设或让人铺设时如果没有指示,由于是针对未指示的情况而制定的,所以说为恶作。由于“这是属于诵经者的,这是属于说法者的”是分别制定的,所以即使是在未指示而铺设的情况下,也应当以波逸提罪论处,基于这个意思才说“当那人来了坐下时,障碍属于他”。不过有些人说:“即使在未指示而铺设的情况下,因为说法者不应被令起身,所以应当以波逸提罪论处;而客比丘方面,因为后到的年长者应被令起身,所以说为恶作。”巴利
Āvāsikānaṃyeva palibodhoti ettha āgantukehi āgantvā kiñci avatvā tattha nisinnepi āvāsikānaṃyeva palibodhoti adhippāyo. Mahāpaccarivāde pana ‘‘aññesu āgantvā nisinnesū’’ti idaṃ amhākanti vatvā vā avatvā vā nisinnesūti adhippāyo. Mahāaṭṭhakathāvāde ‘‘āpattī’’ti pācittiyameva vuttaṃ. Mahāpaccariyaṃ pana santharaṇasantharāpane sati pācittiyena bhavitabbanti anāṇattiyā paññattattā dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Idaṃ ussārakassa, idaṃ dhammakathikassā’’ti visuṃ paññattattā anāṇattiyā paññattepi pācittiyeneva bhavitabbanti adhippāyena ‘‘tasmiṃ āgantvā nisinne tassa palibodho’’ti vuttaṃ. Keci pana vadanti ‘‘anāṇattiyā paññattepi dhammakathikassa anuṭṭhāpanīyattā pācittiyena bhavitabbaṃ, āgantukassa pana pacchā āgatehi vuḍḍhatarehi uṭṭhāpetabbattā dukkaṭaṃ vutta’’nti.
112 “应铺在地面上”的意思是:如果有毡毯,就铺在它上面;如果没有,就铺在干净的地面上。应当知道,对狮皮等的禁止,只是在携带这一点上。巴利
112.Bhūmiyaṃ attharitabbāti cimilikāya sati tassā upari, asati suddhabhūmiyaṃ attharitabbā. Sīhacammādīnaṃ pariharaṇeyeva paṭikkhepo veditabboti iminā –
比丘们,不应该使用大兽皮,也就是狮皮、虎皮、豹皮。谁要是用了,就犯恶作罪。巴利
‘‘Na , bhikkhave, mahācammāni dhāretabbāni sīhacammaṃ byagghacammaṃ dīpicammaṃ, yo dhāreyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (mahāva. 255) –
这段是在阐明《犍度》圣典那句话的用意。这里说的是:因为学处是在“床内铺设、床外也铺设”这件事上制定的,所以被禁止的只是铺在床和凳子上使用,而作为铺地物来使用并没有被禁止。如果是这样,那为什么说“禁止仅限于携带”呢?这是为了说明:就像依“诸比丘,我允许受用一切殿堂”(《小品》320)这句话,即使在个人住所里,按住所受用的方式开许的金瓶等物虽然可以使用,但绝不能把它完全当成自己的东西来用;同样,这东西虽然可以作为铺地物使用,但不能把它当成自己的东西,带到各个精舍去使用。为了说明这一点,才说“应知禁止仅限于携带”。木制凳,就是指木板做的凳子。脚踏板,就是放没洗过的脚的地方。在露地煮染料之后……应当收起:这里如果染料工作已经做完,没有剩下的,就应当收起。巴利
Evaṃ vuttāya khandhakapāḷiyā adhippāyaṃ vibhāveti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘antopi mañce paññattāni honti, bahipi mañce paññattāni hontī’’ti imasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ sikkhāpadassa paññattattā mañcapīṭhesu attharitvā paribhogoyeva paṭikkhitto, bhūmattharaṇavasena paribhogo pana appaṭikkhittoti. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘pariharaṇeyeva paṭikkhepo’’ti idaṃ kasmā vuttanti? Yathā ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sabbaṃ pāsādaparibhoga’’nti (cūḷava. 320) vacanato puggalikepi senāsane senāsanaparibhogavasena niyamitaṃ suvaṇṇaghaṭādikaṃ paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭamānampi kevalaṃ attano santakaṃ katvā paribhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭati, evamidaṃ bhūmattharaṇavasena paribhuñjiyamānampi attano santakaṃ katvā taṃ taṃ vihāraṃ haritvā paribhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭatīti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘pariharaṇeyeva paṭikkhepo veditabbo’’ti vuttaṃ. Dārumayapīṭhanti phalakamayameva pīṭhaṃ vuttaṃ. Pādakathalikanti adhotapādaṭṭhapanakaṃ. Ajjhokāse rajanaṃ pacitvā…pe… paṭisāmetabbanti ettha theve asati rajanakamme niṭṭhite paṭisāmetabbaṃ.
113 有人说:因为经典里讲“比丘、沙弥或净人是有惭耻心的人”,所以不可以向无惭耻心的人告辞就离开。关于“晒晾时离去”这一条,有人说:虽然没有限定“必须走多远”,但还是不应该超过一掷土块的距离,走得太远。这里其余的内容都很清楚。不过,这里一共有五个条件:床座等属于僧团、在所说的那种地方铺设或让人铺设、没有障碍、没有危难、超过一掷土块的距离。巴利
113.‘‘Bhikkhu vā sāmaṇero vā ārāmiko vā lajjī hotīti vuttattā alajjiṃ āpucchitvā gantuṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. Otāpento gacchatīti ettha ‘‘kiñcāpi ‘ettakaṃ dūraṃ gantabba’nti paricchedo natthi, tathāpi leḍḍupātaṃ atikkamma nātidūraṃ gantabba’’nti vadanti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Mañcādīnaṃ saṅghikatā, vuttalakkhaṇe dese santharaṇaṃ vā santharāpanaṃ vā, apalibuddhatā, āpadāya abhāvo, leḍḍupātātikkamoti imāni panettha pañca aṅgāni.
《论母注释》(即《疑惑度释》中《第一坐卧处学处注释》)在解释“或不告辞而离去”时说:“如果有比丘、沙弥或净人是有惭耻心的,他把那人看作自己的障碍,不向那人告辞,也不把坐卧处交付给他,就无牵挂地离去,超过了中等体力男子一掷土块的距离——若一足跨出投石处犯恶作,第二足跨出犯波逸提。”说了之后,又以无挂念等六支来说明。然而在巴利文和注释中,都看不到“无牵挂地离去”这一差别。又说“令其热恼而离去”,只在令热恼的场合,有念而离去才说无罪。如果其他地方有念而离去也无罪,就应不分别地说“有念而离去无罪”,所以应考察后采取更妥当的说法。巴利
Mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paṭhamasenāsanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) pana anāpucchaṃ vā gaccheyyāti ettha ‘‘yo bhikkhu vā sāmaṇero vā ārāmiko vā lajjī hoti, attano palibodhaṃ viya maññati, tathārūpaṃ anāpucchitvā taṃ senāsanaṃ tassa aniyyātetvā nirapekkho gacchati, thāmamajjhimassa purisassa leḍḍupātaṃ atikkameyya, ekena pādena leḍḍupātātikkame dukkaṭaṃ, dutiyapādātikkame pācittiya’’nti vatvā aṅgesupi nirapekkhatāya saddhiṃ cha aṅgāni vuttāni. Pāḷiyaṃ pana aṭṭhakathāyañca ‘‘nirapekkho gacchatī’’ti ayaṃ viseso na dissati. ‘‘Otāpento gacchatī’’ti ca otāpanavisaye eva sāpekkhagamane anāpatti vuttā. Yadi aññatthāpi sāpekkhagamane anāpatti siyā, ‘‘anāpatti sāpekkho gacchatī’’ti avisesena vattabbaṃ bhaveyya, tasmā vīmaṃsitvā yuttataraṃ gahetabbanti.
5. 第二住处学处注释巴利
5. Dutiyasenāsanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
116 在第二坐卧处学处中,注释书只说了这么多。三篇《结文》则说:这是为了显示注释书里确实这样说过,其他类似铺在床座上的东西也同样是铺具。但《论母注释》限定说:所谓铺具,就是外衣和毛毯,只有这些。因此,《结文》的说法和这个不一致,应当审察之后再采纳。从坐卧处:就是从最后的所有坐卧处。任何人:就是他的亲属或非亲属,不管是谁。巴利
116. Dutiyasenāsanasikkhāpade ettakameva vuttanti aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ. ‘‘Idañca aṭṭhakathāsu tathāvuttabhāvadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ, aññampi tādisaṃ mañcapīṭhesu attharitaṃ paccattharaṇamevā’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘paccattharaṇaṃ nāma pāvāro kojavoti ettakamevā’’ti niyametvā vuttaṃ, tasmā gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ iminā na sameti, vīmaṃsitvā gahetabbaṃ. Senāsanatoti sabbapacchimasenāsanato. Yo kocīti tassa ñātako vā aññātako vā yo koci.
117 “周廊”是指每一座住处的围墙以内范围。为了把《库伦达注》里所说的意思特别显示出来,才引出“虽说”等这一段话。“在无遮蔽的殿堂中”应当单独接上去理解。正因如此,《论母注释》(《疑惑度释·第二坐卧处学处注释》)中说:“在无遮蔽的殿堂,或有遮蔽、大众集会之处。”在食堂里,这个差别也同样适用。没有什么特别要说的,就是没有任何需要特别说明的地方。“坏灭”就是毁坏。“若失坏”就是被盗贼等毁坏。巴利
117.Pariveṇanti ekekassa vihārassa parikkhepabbhantaraṃ. Kurundaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttamevatthaṃ savisesaṃ katvā dassetuṃ ‘‘kiñcāpi vutto’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. ‘‘Aparicchanne maṇḍape’’ti visuṃ yojetabbaṃ. Teneva mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. dutiyasenāsanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) ‘‘aparicchannamaṇḍape vā paricchanne vāpi bahūnaṃ sannipātabhūte’’ti vuttaṃ. Bhojanasālāyampi ayaṃ viseso labbhatiyeva. Vattabbaṃ natthīti visesetvā kiñci vattabbaṃ natthi. Palujjatīti vinassati. Nasseyyāti corādīhi vinasseyya.
118 118. 如果有人编织床或椅子,那就是床椅的编织物。“石窟中”指石头堆积处的住处,意思是山洞。由于“住处被白蚁啃食”这一事缘而制定,所以注释书中依据事缘本身说,在没有白蚁之患时无犯。在《仪轨品》中,制定远行仪轨时说“应告知住处”,因此这里说“而告知是义务”,只是为了显示应做之事的行相,并不是为了显示违越义务就有恶作。正因如此,《暗部注释书》在“应告知住处”这一处将会说:“若住处建在石板或石柱上、白蚁爬不上去,即使不告知也无犯。”所以,《结文》中说“对于那样的住处,不告知而离去者没有波逸提;但依远行仪轨,不告知而离去者就违越义务,因此犯恶作”,这种说法不应采纳。巴利
118. Yena mañcaṃ vā pīṭhaṃ vā vinanti, taṃ mañcapīṭhakavānaṃ. Siluccayaleṇanti siluccaye leṇaṃ, pabbataguhāti attho. ‘‘Senāsanaṃ upacikāhi khāyita’’nti imasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ paññattattā vatthuanurūpavasena aṭṭhakathāyaṃ upacikāsaṅkāya abhāve anāpatti vuttā. Vattakkhandhake gamikavattaṃ paññapentena ‘‘senāsanaṃ āpucchitabba’’nti vuttattā kevalaṃ itikattabbākāramattadassanatthaṃ ‘‘āpucchanaṃ pana vatta’’nti vuttaṃ, na pana vattabhedena dukkaṭanti dassanatthaṃ. Teneva andhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘senāsanaṃ āpucchitabba’’nti ettha ‘‘yaṃ pāsāṇapiṭṭhiyaṃ vā pāsāṇatthambhesu vā katasenāsanaṃ yattha upacikā nārohanti, taṃ anāpucchantassapi anāpattī’’ti vakkhati, tasmā yaṃ vuttaṃ gaṇṭhipade ‘‘tādise senāsane anāpucchā gacchantassa pācittiyaṃ natthi, gamikavattavasena pana anāpucchā gacchato vattabhedo hoti, tasmā dukkaṭaṃ āpajjatī’’ti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ.
由于后面已经没有其他跟随的人,所以说“以最后者的回护而无解脱”。在这里,“应委托一人后,方可离去”这句中,因为离去之心是从某个地方生起的,如果没告知就离开,在第二只脚抬起时就犯波逸提。虽然在露天放置床或椅子后离去的情况,这里没有单独说犯戒,但应当知道:非时在露天铺设床椅后离去,超出投石所及范围时,依前一条学处犯波逸提;超出围栏范围时,依这一条犯恶作。通过“在帐幕下或树根下”这句话,露天也被包括在内了,所以应当认为那里也有恶作,这里已经说到了。不过,把卧具铺在露天然后离去的人,两种情况下都只是恶作。有人说:“在僧团精舍里,铺好僧团的卧具后离去,说犯波逸提;因此在这两种情况下,每一处对僧团物都犯恶作。”其余内容在这里容易理解。具备所说特征的卧具、它属于僧团、在所说特征的住处铺设或让人铺设、没有贪恋、没有灾祸、不顾念而朝其他方向离去、越过近行界——这些就是这里的七项要素。巴利
Pacchimassa ābhogena mutti natthīti tassa pacchato gacchantassa aññassa abhāvato vuttaṃ. Ekaṃ vā pesetvā āpucchitabbanti ettha gamanacittassa uppannaṭṭhānato anāpucchitvā gacchato dutiyapāduddhāre pācittiyaṃ. Kiñcāpi mañcaṃ vā pīṭhaṃ vā ajjhokāse nikkhipitvā gacchantassa idha visuṃ āpatti na vuttā, tathāpi akāle ajjhokāse mañcapīṭhāni paññapetvā gacchantassa leḍḍupātātikkame purimasikkhāpadena pācittiyaṃ, parikkhepātikkame iminā dukkaṭanti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Maṇḍape vā rukkhamūle vā’’ti iminā ajjhokāsopi saṅgahitoyevāti tatthāpi dukkaṭaṃ idha vuttamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Seyyaṃ pana ajjhokāse santharitvā gacchantassa ubhayenapi dukkaṭameva. ‘‘Saṅghike vihāre saṅghikaṃyeva seyyaṃ santharitvā pakkamantassa pācittiyaṃ vuttanti ubhosu ekekasmiṃ saṅghike dukkaṭa’’nti vadanti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Vuttalakkhaṇaseyyā, tassā saṅghikatā, vuttalakkhaṇe vihāre santharaṇaṃ vā santharāpanaṃ vā, apalibuddhatā, āpadāya abhāvo, anapekkhassa disāpakkamanaṃ, upacārasīmātikkamoti imāni panettha satta aṅgāni.
第六,挤入住处学处的解释巴利
6. Anupakhajjasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
119-121 第六,“随后进入”,意思是靠近、进入。他观察多所饶益与功德殊胜,就是观察库房管理者的多所饶益,以及说法者等人的功德殊胜。“周围一肘半”,是就中间铺设的床椅而说的。巴利
119-121. Chaṭṭhe anupavisitvāti samīpaṃ pavisitvā. Bahūpakārataṃ guṇavisiṭṭhatañca sallakkhentoti bhaṇḍāgārikassa bahūpakārataṃ dhammakathikādīnaṃ guṇavisiṭṭhatañca sallakkhento. Samantā diyaḍḍho hatthoti majjhe paññattamañcapīṭhaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.
122 122.“除了近行处”意思是:除了上面所说的那种近行处。“同一住处”就是同一个坐卧处。“同一院落”就是那个住处的围墙范围之内。三部《结文》里都说:“‘病人进入’等情形,因为本身就有不犯戒的理由,所以以生病等状态想着‘我要进去’而进入近行处的人,即使有想排挤别人的意图,也仍然说是不犯戒。”这样一来,非病等状态也应该单独列在各项要素里说明;但《论母注释书》(《疑惑度释·挤入学处注释》)里只说了这么多:“僧团住处的情况、知道不可令其生起的状况、有排挤的意图、在近行处坐下或躺下——这些就是这里的四项要素。”所以需要进一步考察。巴利
122.Upacāraṃṭhapetvāti vuttalakkhaṇaṃ upacāraṃ ṭhapetvā. Ekavihāreti ekasmiṃ senāsane. Ekapariveṇeti tassa vihārassa parikkhepabbhantare. ‘‘Gilāno pavisatītiādīsu anāpattikāraṇasabbhāvato gilānāditāya pavisissāmīti upacāraṃ pavisantassa satipi sambādhetukāmatāya anāpatti vuttāyevā’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Evañca sati agilānādibhāvopi visuṃ aṅgesu vattabbo siyā, mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. anupakhajjasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) pana ‘‘saṅghikavihāratā, anuṭṭhāpanīyabhāvajānanaṃ, sambādhetukāmatā, upacāre nisīdanaṃ vā nipajjanaṃ vāti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgānī’’ti ettakameva vuttaṃ, tasmā vīmaṃsitabbaṃ.
7. 驱出学处注释巴利
7. Nikkaḍḍhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
126 第七,门房,就是门楼。有人说:即使听到“出去”这句话,如果是按自己的意愿出去的,也无犯。巴利
126. Sattame koṭṭhakānīti dvārakoṭṭhakāni. ‘‘Nikkhamāti vacanaṃ sutvāpi attano ruciyā nikkhamati, anāpattī’’ti vadanti.
128 在“驱赶无耻者”等条文里,最初是想着“我要以无耻等状态为由把他赶走”而驱赶,由于心念转变轻快,即使生起忿怒也无犯。这里其余的内容容易理解。僧团住处、被驱赶者是具足比丘且免于制造纷争等状态、以忿怒驱赶或教人驱赶,这些是这里的三项要素。巴利
128.Alajjiṃ nikkaḍḍhatītiādīsu paṭhamaṃ alajjīādibhāvena nikkaḍḍhissāmīti cintetvā nikkaḍḍhantassa cittassa lahuparivattitāya kope uppannepi anāpatti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Saṅghikavihāro, upasampannassa bhaṇḍanakārakabhāvādivinimuttatā, kopena nikkaḍḍhanaṃ vā nikkaḍḍhāpanaṃ vāti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
8. 空中小屋学处的注释巴利
8. Vehāsakuṭisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
129-131 129-131. 第八条的注释:因为上层地面没有铺板条,所以说“上层未覆盖地面”。所谓“如前所述”,就是依照《挤入学处》里已经讲过的方式。其余部分很容易理解。僧团精舍、不碰头的空中楼阁、下方有受用物,以及在未铺设脚踏板的悬空床上坐或躺——这些就是这里所说的四种情况。巴利
129-131. Aṭṭhame uparimatale padarānaṃ asantharitattā ‘‘upariacchannatalāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Pubbe vuttanayenevāti anupakhajjasikkhāpade vuttanayeneva. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva. Saṅghiko vihāro , asīsaghaṭṭā vehāsakuṭi , heṭṭhā saparibhogatā, apaṭāṇidinne āhaccapādake nisīdanaṃ vā nipajjanaṃ vāti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.
9. 大住处学处之解释巴利
9. Mahallakavihārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
135 第九:因为前面说过“所谓大住处,就是有主人的住处”,所以为了乞求而造的小屋不算犯戒。有人说“乃至二肘半”,这是按最高限度说的,与巴利律典相符,因此说“这个说法很好”。他们主张:“巴利律典和注释书都是按最高限度,指出二肘半大小的空间,所以门扇可以比二肘半的宽度小,也可以更大,但空间本身必须正好是二肘半。”巴利
135. Navame ‘‘mahallako nāma vihāro sasāmiko’’ti vuttattā saññācikāya kuṭiyā anāpatti. ‘‘Aḍḍhateyyahatthampī’’ti ukkaṭṭhaparicchedena vuttavacanaṃ pāḷiyā sametīti āha ‘‘taṃ suvutta’’nti. ‘‘Pāḷiyaṃ aṭṭhakathāyañca ukkaṭṭhaparicchedena aḍḍhateyyahatthappamāṇassa okāsassa dassitattā kavāṭaṃ aḍḍhateyyahatthavitthārato ūnakaṃ vā hotu adhikaṃ vā, aḍḍhateyyahatthappamāṇaṃyeva okāso’’ti vadanti.
“于其正中”是指在该住处的中央。即使它没有完整的边界区域,也没关系。意思是:门扇打开时碰到的那面墙,即使四周没有留出门宽那么大的空间,也没关系。“透光处”就是采光和遮闭的缝隙。他们说:“因为在这个事例中,由于‘一再让人覆盖、一再让人涂抹’的过失而制定了学处,虽然允许涂抹,但只允许在门框周围两肘半的范围内反复涂抹。所以,在别处反复涂抹或让人涂抹,把墙上的泥工活做完之后,再涂第四层泥,就犯波逸提。”但在《结文》中,这三处都说:“除了所说的量度范围之外,反复涂抹只是被禁止,并没有说犯波逸提,所以犯恶作才合适。”巴利
Yassa vemajjheti yassa vihārassa vemajjhe. Sā aparipūraupacārāpi hotīti vivariyamānaṃ kavāṭaṃ yaṃ bhittiṃ āhanati, sā samantā kavāṭavitthārappamāṇaupacārarahitāpi hotīti attho. Ālokaṃ sandheti pidhetīti ālokasandhi. ‘‘Punappunaṃ chādāpesi, punappunaṃ limpāpesīti imasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ uppannadosena sikkhāpadassa paññattattā lepaṃ anujānantena ca dvārabandhassa samantā aḍḍhateyyahatthappamāṇeyeva padese punappunaṃ lepassa anuññātattā tato aññattha punappunaṃ limpentassa vā limpāpentassa vā bhittiyaṃ mattikāya kattabbakiccaṃ niṭṭhāpetvā puna catutthalepe dinne pācittiyena bhavitabba’’nti vadanti. Gaṇṭhipadesu pana tīsupi ‘‘punappunaṃ lepadānassa vuttappamāṇato aññattha paṭikkhittamattaṃ ṭhapetvā pācittiyassa avuttattā dukkaṭaṃ anurūpa’’nti vuttaṃ.
“应当确定”意思是应当安排妥当。在“非绿色处”这个说法里,“非”这个字就像在“少欲”等词中一样,表示“没有”的意思,所以注释说“在无绿色处”。“坠落之处”是指因为那里有坠落的可能,站在那里的比丘上方可能会有东西掉下来。如果站在有绿色植物的地方作确定,就犯恶作。这句话说明:如果精舍周围在所说的范围内没有谷物等植物,就应该在那里建造精舍;如果那里有植物,却让人在那里建造,就犯恶作。巴利
Adhiṭṭhātabbanti saṃvidhātabbaṃ. Appahariteti ettha appa-saddo ‘‘appiccho’’tiādīsu viya abhāvatthoti āha ‘‘aharite’’ti. Patanokāsoti patanokāsattā tatra ṭhitassa bhikkhuno upari pateyyāti adhippāyo. Sace harite ṭhito adhiṭṭheti, āpatti dukkaṭassāti vacanena imamatthaṃ dīpeti – sace vihārassa samantā vuttappamāṇe paricchede pubbaṇṇādīni na santi, tattha vihāro kāretabbo. Yattha pana santi, tattha kārāpentassa dukkaṭanti.
136 136. 把每一条道都笔直地设立起来之后,顺着道来覆盖,就叫做“以道覆盖”。为了说明这一点,所以说“以道覆盖者”。按照这个方法,当整个精舍被覆盖一次时,就把那一次覆盖当作“一条道”,因此有了“两条道”等说法。三处《结文》都说:“按轮次覆盖时,也应当依照这个方法理解。”这与巴利经文“他让人反复覆盖”以及注释“所有这些覆盖,都应理解为在覆盖之上再覆盖”的说法相符。因此,“确定两条道,嘱咐第三条道之后就应该离开”这句话应当这样理解:确定两层覆盖之后,嘱咐第三层覆盖说“这样覆盖”,然后就应该离开。巴利
136. Ekekaṃ maggaṃ ujukameva uṭṭhapetvā chādanaṃ maggena chādanaṃ nāma hotīti dassetuṃ ‘‘maggena chādentassā’’ti vuttaṃ. Iminā pana nayena sabbasmiṃ vihāre ekavāraṃ chādite taṃ chadanaṃ ekamagganti gahetvā ‘‘dve magge’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Pariyāyena chādanepi imināva nayena yojetabba’’nti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ, taṃ ‘‘punappunaṃ chādāpesī’’ti imāya pāḷiyā ‘‘sabbampi cetaṃ chadanaṃ chadanūpari veditabba’’nti iminā aṭṭhakathāvacanena ca sameti, tasmā dve magge adhiṭṭhahitvā tatiyāya maggaṃ āṇāpetvā pakkamitabbanti ettha dve chadanāni adhiṭṭhahitvā tatiyaṃ chadanaṃ ‘‘evaṃ chādehī’’ti āṇāpetvā pakkamitabbanti evamattho gahetabbo.
有些人则说:首先,第一次要毫无遗漏地全部覆盖,然后再绑上覆盖用的木条,第二次也同样覆盖;到了第三、第四次时,确定两条道,嘱咐之后就可以离开。另一些人则说:在第一次覆盖时,就应该确定三条道,从第四次开始犯波逸提。这两种说法都与巴利经文和注释不符。第三道中的第三是目的格,用作受格,意思是第三道。三道是指以道次覆盖的三层覆盖。三轮也是如此。而于第四道或第四轮时,是指正在覆盖者的第四次覆盖本身。其余文义是明显的。在这里,大精舍性、自己居住的房屋性以及进一步确定,是这里的三个构成要素。巴利
Keci pana ‘‘paṭhamaṃ tāva ekavāraṃ aparisesaṃ chādetvā puna chadanadaṇḍake bandhitvā dutiyavāraṃ tatheva chādetabbaṃ, tatiyavāracatutthavāre sampatte dve magge adhiṭṭhahitvā āṇāpetvā pakkamitabba’’nti vadanti. Apare pana ‘‘paṭhamavāreyeva tayopi magge adhiṭṭhātuṃ vaṭṭati, catutthato paṭṭhāya āpatti pācittiya’’nti vadanti. Tadubhayampi pāḷiyā aṭṭhakathāya ca na sameti. Tatiyāya magganti ettha tatiyāyāti upayogatthe sampadānavacanaṃ, tatiyaṃ magganti attho. Tiṇṇaṃ maggānanti maggavasena chāditānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ chadanānaṃ. Tiṇṇaṃ pariyāyānanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Catutthe magge vā pariyāye vāti ca tathā chādentānaṃ catutthaṃ chādanameva vuttaṃ. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Mahallakavihāratā, attano vāsāgāratā, uttari adhiṭṭhānanti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
10. 有生物(水)学处的解释巴利
10. Sappāṇakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
140 在第十条学处中,应当知道:因为“自己浇洒或让别人浇洒”这条学处,是依外在受用的情况最先制定的;而“饮用有生命的水”这条学处,则是依自己洗澡、喝水等自身受用的情况制定的。或者说,即使前者最初也是依自身受用而制定,但由于后来这条学处再次制定时是依外在受用的情况,所以应当这样理解。巴利
140. Dasame imassa sikkhāpadassa ‘‘siñceyya vā siñcāpeyya vā’’ti bāhiraparibhogavasena paṭhamaṃ paññattattā ‘‘sappāṇakaṃ udakaṃ paribhuñjeyyā’’ti sikkhāpadaṃ attano nahānapānādiparibhogavasena paññattanti veditabbaṃ. Tasmiṃ vā paṭhamaṃ paññattepi attano paribhogavaseneva paññattattā puna imaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ bāhiraparibhogavaseneva paññattanti gahetabbaṃ.
对于有生命想的人,即使他事先就知道“这些生物会因为使用而死”,他的浇洒或让别人浇洒,就像明知“飞蛾等生物会扑进灯火里死掉”却仍然点灯一样,即使没有杀心,也照样构成犯戒,所以经文说这是“制戒罪”。其余部分意思很明白。水里有生物、知道“因为浇洒,生物会死”、水确实是这样,以及不是出于杀心,而是为了某种需要才浇洒草木等——这些就是这里所说的四个构成要素。巴利
Sappāṇakasaññissa ‘‘paribhogena pāṇakā marissantī’’ti pubbabhāge jānantassapi siñcanasiñcāpanaṃ ‘‘padīpe nipatitvā paṭaṅgādipāṇakā marissantī’’ti jānantassa padīpujjalanaṃ viya vināpi vadhakacetanāya hotīti āha ‘‘paṇṇattivajja’’nti. Sesaṃ uttānatthameva . Udakassa sappāṇakatā, ‘‘siñcanena pāṇakā marissantī’’ti jānanaṃ, tādisameva ca udakaṃ, vinā vadhakacetanāya kenacideva karaṇīyena tiṇādīnaṃ siñcananti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.
教诫学处的解释巴利
1. Ovādasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
144 在比丘尼品第一学处中,“随问话而说”是指顺着提问者所问的“那位长老戒行如何?威仪如何?从什么家族出家?”等问话而作答。“可以讲述”是指纯粹以不带染着的心来讲述。由于不能导向天界与解脱之道,这种像畜生一样的谈论,所以叫“畜生论”。因此说“即使能导向天界之道……”等。“即使”这个词,是在表明更不用说能导向解脱之道了。“像畜生一样”是指成为障碍、构成妨害,因为沉溺于畜生论确实会障碍天界与解脱。“圆满”就是完备。“义理连贯”就是意义契合。“深奥”是因为义理深邃等而深奥。“多味”是具有意义之味等多种滋味。“与相之通达相连”是因为它能带来通达无常等相的滋味,所以与相的通达相连。巴利
144. Bhikkhunivaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpade kathānusārenāti ‘‘so thero kiṃsīlo kiṃsamācāro katarakulā pabbajito’’tiādinā pucchantānaṃ pucchākathānusārena. Kathetuṃ vaṭṭantīti nirāmiseneva cittena kathetuṃ vaṭṭanti. Aniyyānikattā saggamokkhamaggānaṃ tiracchānabhūtā kathā tiracchānakathāti āha ‘‘saggamaggagamanepī’’tiādi. Api-saddena pageva mokkhamaggagamaneti dīpeti. Tiracchānabhūtanti tirokaraṇabhūtaṃ, bādhikanti vuttaṃ hoti. Laddhāsevanā hi tiracchānakathā saggamokkhānaṃ bādhikāva hoti. Samiddhoti paripuṇṇo. Sahitatthoti yuttattho. Atthagambhīratādiyogato gambhīro. Bahurasoti attharasādibahuraso. Lakkhaṇapaṭivedhasaṃyuttoti aniccādilakkhaṇapaṭivedharasaāvahanato lakkhaṇapaṭivedhasaṃyutto.
145-147 “在他处”是指别的地方,也就是“上方”的意思。“正在做”是指在对外在的事情上正在做。“巴帝摩卡”是指分为行持和禁止两部分的学处戒。因为它保护持守它的人,使人从地狱等苦中解脱出来,所以称为“巴帝摩卡”。“防护”就是约束,指关闭身门和语门。依靠它,身语二门被约束、被关闭,所以称为“防护”,这是对身语不违犯的称呼。“以巴帝摩卡防护而约束”是指身语二门被巴帝摩卡防护所关闭。而由于处于这种状态的人就叫做具足者,所以说“具足”。“转起”是指让自身持续运作。“住”则显示了安住在巴帝摩卡防护戒中的比丘的行住威仪。巴利
145-147.Paratoti parattha, uttarinti attho. Karontovāti paribāhire karontoyeva. Pātimokkhoti cārittavārittappabhedaṃ sikkhāpadasīlaṃ . Tañhi yo naṃ pāti rakkhati, taṃ mokkheti moceti āpāyikādīhi dukkhehi, tasmā ‘‘pātimokkha’’nti vuccati. Saṃvaraṇaṃ saṃvaro, kāyavacīdvārānaṃ pidahanaṃ. Yena hi te saṃvutā pihitā honti, so saṃvaro, kāyikavācasikassa avītikkamassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Pātimokkhasaṃvarena saṃvutoti pātimokkhasaṃvarena pihitakāyavacīdvāro. Tathābhūto ca yasmā tena samaṅgī nāma hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘samannāgato’’ti . Vattatīti attabhāvaṃ pavatteti. Viharatīti iminā pātimokkhasaṃvarasīle ṭhitassa bhikkhuno iriyāpathavihāro dassito.
为了用圣典把略说的义理详细讲清楚,所以接着开始说“已说”等这些话。其中,“分别”指的是禅那分别。“戒”“依止”等,都是巴帝摩卡的同义词。这里“戒”虽然确实是连同羯磨语结束而成就的巴帝摩卡的同义词,但即便如此,从法的角度来说,应当知道这个戒是指远离杀生等、或者圆满履行义务的人的思等诸法。然而,因为比丘靠巴帝摩卡戒而安立在教法中,所以称它为“依止”;或者比丘在这里安立,或者诸善法在这里安立,所以叫“依止”。这个含义应当依据“智者依戒而安立”“大王,戒是一切善法的依止”“大王,安住于戒的人,一切善法不退失”等经典来了知。巴利
Saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vitthārato pāḷiyā vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha vibhaṅgeti jhānavibhaṅge. Sīlaṃ patiṭṭhātiādīni pātimokkhasseva vevacanāni. Tattha (vibha. aṭṭha. 511) sīlanti kāmañcetaṃ saha kammavācāpariyosānena ijjhanakassa pātimokkhasseva vevacanaṃ, evaṃ santepi dhammato etaṃ sīlaṃ nāma pāṇātipātādīhi vā viramantassa vattapaṭipattiṃ vā pūrentassa cetanādayo dhammā veditabbā. Yasmā pana pātimokkhasīlena bhikkhu sāsane patiṭṭhāti nāma, tasmā taṃ ‘‘patiṭṭhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Patiṭṭhahati vā ettha bhikkhu, kusaladhammā eva vā ettha patiṭṭhahantīti patiṭṭhā. Ayamattho ‘‘sīle patiṭṭhāya naro sapañño’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.23, 192) ca ‘‘patiṭṭhā, mahārāja, sīlaṃ sabbesaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammāna’’nti (mi. pa. 2.1.9) ca ‘‘sīle patiṭṭhitassa kho, mahārāja, sabbe kusalā dhammā na parihāyantī’’ti ca ādisuttavasena veditabbo.
这个“初”是从最初生起的意思来说的。关于这一点也曾经说过:巴利
Tadetaṃ pubbuppattiatthena ādi. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
所以,优低耶,你应当从一开始就把善法清理干净。什么是善法的开始呢?就是极其清净的戒和正直的见。巴利
‘‘Tasmātiha tvaṃ, uttiya, ādimeva visodhehi kusalesu dhammesu. Ko cādi kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ? Sīlañca suvisuddhaṃ diṭṭhi ca ujukā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.382).
就像建城的人想要建一座城市,会先清理城址,然后再按街道、十字路口、广场等划分区域来建城;同样,修行人一开始先清净戒,之后才证悟定、观、道、果和涅槃。又像洗衣的人先用三种碱水洗衣服,然后在干净的衣服上随意染色;也像善巧的画师想画画,先处理墙面,之后再画出图像;同样,修行人从一开始就清净戒,之后才证悟止、观等法。因此,戒被称为“开始”。巴利
Yathā hi nagaravaḍḍhakī nagaraṃ māpetukāmo paṭhamaṃ nagaraṭṭhānaṃ sodheti, tato aparabhāge vīthicatukkasiṅghāṭakādiparicchedena vibhajitvā nagaraṃ māpeti, evameva yogāvacaro ādimhi sīlaṃ sodheti, tato aparabhāge samādhivipassanāmaggaphalanibbānāni sacchikaroti. Yathā vā pana rajako paṭhamaṃ tīhi khārehi vatthaṃ dhovitvā parisuddhe vatthe yadicchakaṃ raṅgajātaṃ upaneti, yathā vā pana cheko cittakāro rūpaṃ likhitukāmo ādito bhittiparikammaṃ karoti, tato aparabhāge rūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti, evameva yogāvacaro āditova sīlaṃ visodhetvā aparabhāge samathavipassanādayo dhamme sacchikaroti. Tasmā sīlaṃ ‘‘ādī’’ti vuttaṃ.
这个戒因为像脚一样能行走,所以就叫作“行”。“行”指的就是脚。就像一个人如果脚断了,就不会生起要去别处的念头,只有双脚完好的人才会生起;同样,如果一个人的戒被破坏、残缺、不圆满,那么他通往涅槃的智慧之行就无法成就;如果他的戒没有被破坏,不残缺,圆满,那么他通往涅槃的智慧之行就能成就。因此,戒被称为“行”。巴利
Tadetaṃ caraṇasarikkhatāya caraṇaṃ. ‘‘Caraṇā’’ti pādā vuccanti. Yathā hi chinnacaraṇassa purisassa disaṃgamanābhisaṅkhāro na jāyati, paripuṇṇapādasseva jāyati, evameva yassa sīlaṃ bhinnaṃ hoti khaṇḍaṃ aparipuṇṇaṃ, tassa nibbānagamanāya ñāṇagamanaṃ na sampajjati. Yassa pana taṃ abhinnaṃ hoti akhaṇḍaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ, tassa nibbānagamanāya ñāṇagamanaṃ sampajjati. Tasmā sīlaṃ ‘‘caraṇa’’nti vuttaṃ.
这个戒,从“约束”的角度叫“律仪”,从“防护”的角度叫“防护”,通过这两方面,就同时说明了戒的约束和戒的防护。不过从词义上看,“律仪”是指制止违犯的躁动,或者约束一个人,让他不因为违犯而躁动,所以叫律仪;“防护”是指关闭、堵住违犯进入的门,所以叫防护。“解脱”是指最上的,或者指成为入口。就像众生的四种食物从口进入后遍布身体各个肢节一样,修行者也是以戒为入口,四地善法由此进入而成就利益,因此说“解脱”。在入口处最为殊胜,就是“胜解脱”,意思是前导、最胜、首要。应当知道,为了获得四地善法,“胜解脱”就是前导、最胜、首要。巴利
Tadetaṃ saṃyamanavasena saṃyamo, saṃvaraṇavasena saṃvaroti ubhayenapi sīlasaṃyamo ceva sīlasaṃvaro ca kathito. Vacanattho panettha saṃyameti vītikkamavipphandanaṃ, puggalaṃ vā saṃyameti vītikkamavasena tassa vipphandituṃ na detīti saṃyamo, vītikkamassa pavesanadvāraṃ saṃvarati pidahatīti saṃvaro. Mokkhanti uttamaṃ mukhabhūtaṃ vā. Yathā hi sattānaṃ catubbidho āhāro mukhena pavisitvā aṅgamaṅgāni pharati, evaṃ yoginopi catubhūmakakusalaṃ sīlamukhena pavisitvā atthasiddhiṃ sampādeti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘mokkha’’nti. Pamukhe sādhūti pamokkhaṃ, pubbaṅgamaṃ seṭṭhaṃ padhānanti attho. Kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ samāpattiyāti catubhūmakakusalānaṃ paṭilābhatthāya pamokkhaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ seṭṭhaṃ padhānanti veditabbaṃ.
“身不违犯”指三种身善行。“语不违犯”指四种语善行。“身语不违犯”指这两者。用这个统摄说明了活命第八戒。“约束”就是关闭,意思是根门被守护、被关闭。就像门户关闭的房子被称为“闭户”,同样,这里根门被守护就说为“约束”。“以巴帝摩卡防护”指以称为巴帝摩卡的防护。“具足”等所有词都是彼此的同义词。巴利
Kāyiko avītikkamoti tividhaṃ kāyasucaritaṃ. Vācasikoti catubbidhaṃ vacīsucaritaṃ. Kāyikavācasikoti tadubhayaṃ. Iminā ājīvaṭṭhamakasīlaṃ pariyādāya dasseti. Saṃvutoti pihito, saṃvutindriyo pihitindriyoti attho. Yathā hi saṃvutadvāraṃ gehaṃ ‘‘saṃvutagehaṃ pihitageha’’nti vuccati, evamidha saṃvutindriyo ‘‘saṃvuto’’ti vutto. Pātimokkhasaṃvarenāti pātimokkhasaṅkhātena saṃvarena. Upetotiādīni sabbāni aññamaññavevacanāni.
通过“行”等七句,说明了安住于巴帝摩卡防护戒的比丘的威仪举止。其中,“行”是指因为具备四种威仪中的某一种而行。借着这四种威仪,像车身转动一样运转。用另一种威仪打断某一种威仪带来的苦,因为能长久保持而保护身体,所以叫“守护”。不固定在一种威仪上,而是在一切威仪中运转,所以叫“维持”。以这种那种威仪如此这般地维持身体,所以叫“令维持”。因为长时间运转,所以叫“行”。用威仪交替打断,以维持生命,所以叫“住”。巴利
Iriyatītiādīhi sattahipi padehi pātimokkhasaṃvarasīle ṭhitassa bhikkhuno iriyāpathavihāro kathito. Tattha iriyatīti catunnaṃ iriyāpathānaṃ aññatarasamaṅgibhāvato iriyati. Tehi iriyāpathacatukkehi kāyasakaṭavattanena vattati. Ekaṃ iriyāpathadukkhaṃ aparena iriyāpathena vicchinditvā ciraṭṭhitibhāvena sarīrarakkhaṇato pāleti. Ekasmiṃ iriyāpathe asaṇṭhahitvā sabbairiyāpathe vattanato yapeti. Tena tena iriyāpathena tathā tathā kāyassa yāpanato yāpeti. Cirakālavattāpanato carati. Iriyāpathena iriyāpathaṃ vicchinditvā jīvitaharaṇato viharati.
所谓“遮止邪命”——巴利
Micchājīvapaṭisedhakenāti –
在这里,有些人靠送竹子、送钵、送花、送果、送沐浴用品、送齿木,或者靠讨好奉承、靠像豆汤一样软语迎合、靠像抚养照顾那样殷勤侍奉、靠替人跑腿,或者靠其他某种被佛陀呵斥的邪命来过活,这就叫作非行。巴利
‘‘Idhekacco veḷudānena vā pattadānena vā puppha phala sinānadantakaṭṭhadānena vā cāṭukamyatāya vā muggasūpyatāya vā pāribhaṭayatāya vā jaṅghapesanikena vā aññataraññatarena vā buddhapaṭikuṭṭhena micchāājīvena jīvikaṃ kappeti, ayaṃ vuccati anācāro’’ti (vibha. 513) –
如此所说,是以与被称为非行的邪命相对治的方式。巴利
Evaṃ vuttaanācārasaṅkhātamicchājīvapaṭipakkhena.
不是以竹施等行为方式——巴利
Na veḷudānādinā ācārenāti –
在这里,有些人不是靠施舍竹子、施舍叶子、施舍花、施舍果实、施舍沐浴、施舍齿木,也不是靠谄媚、靠送豆汤、靠侍奉、靠跑腿,也不是靠任何被佛陀呵斥的邪命来过活,这就叫作“正行”。巴利
‘‘Idhekacco na veḷudānena na patta na puppha na phala na sināna na dantakaṭṭha na cāṭukamyatāya na muggasūpyatāya na pāribhaṭayatāya na jaṅghapesanikena na aññataraññatarena buddhapaṭikuṭṭhena micchāājīvena jīvikaṃ kappeti, ayaṃ vuccati ācāro’’ti (vibha. 513) –
以如此所说的非竹施等之正行。巴利
Evaṃ vuttena na veḷudānādinā ācārena.
舍弃了以妓女等作为行境的去处之后——巴利
Vesiyādiagocaraṃ pahāyāti –
在这里,有些人以妓女为往来对象,或者以寡妇、成年未婚女子、般哒格、比丘尼、酒肆为往来对象;与国王、国王的大臣、外道、外道弟子保持不正当的交往。还有那些没有信心、没有净信、不是可饮水之处、喜欢辱骂诽谤、想要不利比丘、比丘尼、近事男、近事女,想要无益、想要不安、想要行不安之事的家族,如果有人去亲近、结交、敬奉这样的家族,这就叫做非行境。巴利
‘‘Idhekacco vesiyagocaro vā hoti vidhava thullakumāri paṇḍaka bhikkhuni pānāgāragocaro vā, saṃsaṭṭho viharati rājūhi rājamahāmattehi titthiyehi titthiyasāvakehi ananulomikena saṃsaggena, yāni pana tāni kulāni assaddhāni appasannāni anopānabhūtāni akkosakaparibhāsakāni anatthakāmāni ahitakāmāni aphāsukakāmāni ayogakkhemakāmāni bhikkhūnaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ upāsakānaṃ upāsikānaṃ, tathārūpāni kulāni sevati bhajati payirupāsati, ayaṃ vuccati agocaro’’ti (vibha. 514) –
像这样,舍弃了去妓女等处的非行境之后。巴利
Evamāgataṃ vesiyādiagocaraṃ pahāya.
“具足信心的家族等”这里,“等”字涵盖了依止行境等。行境确实有三种:依止行境、守护行境、系缚行境。什么是依止行境?就是具足十论事功德的善友,依靠他,能听到未曾听闻的,让已听闻的教法变得清净,断除疑惑,使见解端正,令心生净信;或者跟随他学习,信心增长,戒、多闻、布施、智慧都增长——这就是依止行境。什么是守护行境?这里,比丘进入村落、走在街道上时,眼睛低垂,只看一轭之远,收摄而行;不张望象、马、车、步兵,不张望女人、男人;不向上看,不向下看,不东张西望地行走——这就是守护行境。什么是系缚行境?就是四念处,心系缚在这里。世尊确实说过:“诸比丘,什么是比丘自己的、祖传的行境?就是四念处。”(《相应部》5.372)这就是系缚行境。因此应当知道,这里“等”字就涵盖了这三种行境。巴利
Saddhāsampannakulādināti ettha ādi-saddena upanissayagocarādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Tividho hi gocaro upanissayagocaro ārakkhagocaro upanibandhagocaroti. Katamo upanissayagocaro? Dasakathāvatthuguṇasamannāgato kalyāṇamitto, yaṃ nissāya asutaṃ suṇāti, sutaṃ pariyodapeti, kaṅkhaṃ vitarati, diṭṭhiṃ ujuṃ karoti, cittaṃ pasādeti. Yassa vā pana anusikkhamāno saddhāya vaḍḍhati, sīlena sutena cāgena paññāya vaḍḍhati, ayaṃ upanissayagocaro. Katamo ārakkhagocaro? Idha bhikkhu antaragharaṃ paviṭṭho vīthiṃ paṭipanno okkhittacakkhu yugamattadassāvī saṃvuto gacchati, na hatthiṃ olokento, na assaṃ, na rathaṃ, na pattiṃ, na itthiṃ, na purisaṃ olokento, na uddhaṃ olokento, na adho olokento, na disāvidisaṃ vipekkhamāno gacchati, ayaṃ ārakkhagocaro. Katamo upanibandhagocaro? Cattāro satipaṭṭhānā, yattha cittaṃ upanibandhati. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘ko ca, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno gocaro sako pettiko visayo? Yadidaṃ cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.372), ayaṃ upanibandhagocaro. Iti ayaṃ tividho gocaro idha ādi-saddena saṅgahitoti daṭṭhabbo.
对于微细的罪过:就是指无意中犯的众学法、不善心生起等种种罪过。具有视罪过为可怕的见识:就是把像极微那么小的罪过,看成如同六百八十万由旬高的须弥山一样;或者把最轻微的恶说,看成等同于波罗夷罪一样,具有这样的见识。正确地受持:就是正确地、恭敬地、或者全面地受持。巴利
Appamattakesu vajjesūti asañcicca āpannasekhiyaakusalacittuppādādibhedesu vajjesu. Bhayato dassanasīloti paramāṇumattaṃ vajjaṃ aṭṭhasaṭṭhiyojanasatasahassubbedhasinerupabbatasadisaṃ katvā dassanasabhāvo, sabbalahukaṃ vā dubbhāsitamattaṃ pārājikasadisaṃ katvā dassanasabhāvo. Sammā ādāyāti sammadeva sakkaccaṃ sabbaso vā ādiyitvā.
为了从轮回之苦中解脱而应当听闻,所以称为“闻”,也就是教法。能持守这个闻,就叫持闻者,是闻的承载者。如果一个人从这里拿到的东西,转眼就从别处跑掉,像破瓶里的水一样留不住,在大众中连一部经或一个本生故事都讲不出来、诵不出来,这个人就不叫持闻者。但如果一个人领受的佛语,跟刚领受时一模一样,即使十年、二十年不诵习也不会丢失,这个人就叫持闻者。因此说“凡他所有的”等等。哪怕一句、一字都不坏失地积存起来,就是积聚;闻积聚在这个人身上,所以说“闻已积聚在此人身上,就是闻积聚者”。如果一个人的闻,像刻在石头上的字,又像放进金瓶里的狮子油一样,稳稳地安住在心匣中,这个人就叫闻积聚者。因此说“以此……显示不坏失”。巴利
Vaṭṭadukkhanissaraṇatthikehi sotabbato sutaṃ, pariyattidhammo. Taṃ dhāretīti sutadharo, sutassa ādhārabhūto. Yassa hi ito gahitaṃ etto palāyati, chiddaghaṭe udakaṃ viya na tiṭṭhati, parisamajjhe ekaṃ suttaṃ vā jātakaṃ vā kathetuṃ vā vācetuṃ vā na sakkoti, ayaṃ na sutadharo nāma. Yassa pana uggahitaṃ buddhavacanaṃ uggahitakālasadisameva hoti, dasapi vīsatipi vassāni sajjhāyaṃ akarontassa na nassati, ayaṃ sutadharo nāma. Tenevāha ‘‘yadassa ta’’ntiādi. Ekapadampi ekakkharampi avinaṭṭhaṃ hutvā sanniciyatīti sannicayo, sutaṃ sannicayo etasminti sutasannicayoti āha ‘‘sutaṃ sannicitaṃ asminti sutasannicayo’’ti. Yassa hi sutaṃ hadayamañjusāyaṃ sannicitaṃ silāya lekhā viya suvaṇṇaghaṭe pakkhittā sīhavasā viya ca sādhu tiṭṭhati, ayaṃ sutasannicayo nāma. Tenāha ‘‘etena…pe… avināsaṃ dassetī’’ti.
“已持”是指熟练、已经能上口。有一种人,他学过的佛语并不是任何时候都能拿得出来。别人对他说“请讲某部经或某本生”,他会说:“等我诵习过、再和别人核对、再通过反复提问把义理弄清楚之后,我才能知道。”另一种人则已经很熟练,因为没有间断,就像恒河的水流、像有分的水流一样,自然顺畅地运行。别人对他说“请讲某部经或某本生”,他当场就能抽出来讲。针对这种情况,才说“已持”。以言语使之熟练,就是依照十经、十品、五十等,用口诵习,标记“十经过、十品过”等等,用口诵习。这里的意思并不是只对部分经文或单部经文以言语熟悉,而是按品等来说的。以意随观,就是以意反复观察,也就是一部分一部分地审虑、思惟。转向的时候,就是用口诵习佛语、用意思惟的时候。善通达,就是除去缠结、没有丛刺,如实地善加通达。巴利
Dhātāti paguṇā vācuggatā. Ekassa hi uggahitabuddhavacanaṃ niccakālikaṃ na hoti, ‘‘asukasuttaṃ vā jātakaṃ vā kathehī’’ti vutte ‘‘sajjhāyitvā aññehi saṃsanditvā paripucchāvasena atthaṃ ogāhitvā jānissāmī’’ti vadati. Ekassa paguṇaṃ pabandhavicchedābhāvato gaṅgāsotasadisaṃ bhavaṅgasotasadisañca akittimaṃ sukhappavatti hoti, ‘‘asukasuttaṃ vā jātakaṃ vā kathehī’’ti vutte uddharitvā tameva katheti. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘dhātā’’ti. Vācāya paguṇā katāti suttadasakavaggadasakapaṇṇāsadasakavasena vācāya sajjhāyitā, dasa suttāni gatāni, dasa vaggāni gatānītiādinā sallakkhetvā vācāya sajjhāyitāti attho. Suttekadesassa hi suttamattassa ca vacasā paricayo idha nādhippeto, atha kho vaggādivaseneva. Manasā anupekkhitāti manasā anu anu pekkhitā, bhāgaso nijjhāyitā cintitāti attho. Āvajjantassāti vācāya sajjhāyituṃ buddhavacanaṃ manasā cintentassa. Suṭṭhu paṭividdhāti nijjaṭaṃ niggumbaṃ katvā suṭṭhu yāthāvato paṭividdhā.
两种论母,就是比丘论母和比丘尼论母。“能诵持者”是前者的另一种说法。“三种随喜”是:在僧团供食时,与布施功德相关的随喜;在寺院等庆典时,以吉祥经等所作的随喜;在亡者供食等不吉祥场合,以墙外经等所作的随喜——这就是三种随喜。“业与非业的决断”,是指《附随》末尾《业品》中所说的决断。“以观修习而学习者,应以四界差别为门而学”,这在三部《结文》中都有说。因为在四方都没有障碍,所以它拥有四方,称为“四方者”;“四方者”本身就是“遍四方者”;或者,它能胜任四方,或者在四方当中是善巧的,所以称为“遍四方者”。巴利
Dve mātikāti bhikkhumātikā bhikkhunīmātikā ca. Vācuggatāti purimasseva vevacanaṃ. Tisso anumodanāti saṅghabhatte dānānisaṃsapaṭisaṃyuttaanumodanā, vihārādimaṅgale maṅgalasuttādianumodanā, matakabhattādiavamaṅgale tirokuṭṭādianumodanāti imā tisso anumodanā . Kammākammavinicchayoti parivārāvasāne kammavagge vuttavinicchayo. ‘‘Vipassanāvasena uggaṇhantena catudhātuvavatthānamukhena uggahetabba’’nti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Catūsu disāsu appaṭihatattā catasso disā etassāti catuddiso, catuddisoyeva cātuddiso, catasso vā disā arahati, catūsu vā disāsu sādhūti cātuddiso.
“增上律”是指整部律藏。“调伏”是指教导、训练。有人说:“‘两部《分别》应当熟练、能够背诵’这句话,也是就通过反复问答来学习而说的。”因为一个人会忘掉,另一个人却熟练,所以说“应当与三个人一起做到能够轮诵”。“增上法”是指对名色的辨别。或者,“下方三品”是指从大品以下的有偈品、因缘品、蕴品这三品。由于《大灯》中说“法句连同本事也可以学习”,所以即使已经学了带义疏的本生,持诵本生的人仍然应当学法句连同本事。巴利
Abhivinayeti sakale vinayapiṭake. Vinetunti sikkhāpetuṃ. ‘‘Dve vibhaṅgā paguṇā vācuggatā kātabbāti idaṃ paripucchāvasena uggahaṇampi sandhāya vutta’’nti vadanti. Ekassa pamuṭṭhaṃ, itarassa paguṇaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘tīhi janehi saddhiṃ parivattanakkhamā kātabbā’’ti. Abhidhammeti nāmarūpaparicchede. Heṭṭhimā vā tayo vaggāti mahāvaggato heṭṭhā sagāthakavaggo nidānavaggo khandhakavaggoti ime tayo vaggā. ‘‘Dhammapadampi saha vatthunā uggahetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttattā jātakabhāṇakena sāṭṭhakathaṃ jātakaṃ uggahetvāpi dhammapadampi saha vatthunā uggahetabbameva.
善语是指他的言语美好、善妙,词句圆满。因此说“具足轻音、重音等……的言语”。其中,“圆满词句”是指:由于发音部位和发音方式都到位,加上修学上的成就,在任何地方都没有欠缺,所以他的词、句、字都是圆满的,这就叫“圆满词句”。或者说,词本身因为能表达意义而成为“词句”,在让字音完整、不丢失轻音重音等十种音声的觉知之后说出来,就称为圆满。因为字音完整,词句才圆满。因此说“以如法说出轻音、重音等的方式”。“圆满词句”就是他的词句是圆满的。另外,“词”是借以了知意义的,比如名词等;“句”是能表达所想表达的意义的,也就是语句。因为这两者都圆满,所以叫“圆满词句”。巴利
Kalyāṇā sundarā parimaṇḍalapadabyañjanā vācā assāti kalyāṇavāco. Tenāha ‘‘sithiladhanitādīnaṃ…pe… vācāya samannāgato’’ti. Tattha parimaṇḍalapadabyañjanāyāti ṭhānakaraṇasampattiyā sikkhāsampattiyā ca katthacipi anūnatāya parimaṇḍalapadāni byañjanāni akkharāni etissāti parimaṇḍalapadabyañjanā, padameva vā atthassa byañjanato padabyañjanaṃ, taṃ akkharapāripūriṃ katvā sithiladhanitādidasavidhaṃ byañjanabuddhiṃ aparihāpetvā vuttaṃ parimaṇḍalaṃ nāma hoti. Akkharapāripūriyā hi padabyañjanassa parimaṇḍalatā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sithiladhanitādīnaṃyathāvidhānavacanenā’’ti, parimaṇḍalaṃ padabyañjanaṃ etissāti parimaṇḍalapadabyañjanā. Atha vā pajjati ñāyati attho etenāti padaṃ, nāmādi. Yathādhippetamatthaṃ byañjetīti byañjanaṃ, vākyaṃ. Tesaṃ paripuṇṇatāya parimaṇḍalapadabyañjanā.
另外,如果一位比丘在大众中说法时,把一部经或本生搁在一边,另外引一部带有责难性质的经,为它讲譬喻,把其中的义理引到这里来,就这样抓一个丢一个,偏向一边地讲,然后看准时机就起身离开,那么被搁下的经就只是被搁下了而已,他的说法因为义理不完整,就叫作“不圆满”。但如果一位比丘把一部经或本生搁在一边后,一步也不向外岔开,只按照所搁下那部经的义理来解说,即使引入其他经文,也兼顾圣典的衔接和前后次第,站在师长所传的轨范上,像用笔划定界限一样,把每一个义理都妥善确定地显示出来,像把水引进深渠一样让深义流布,像良马走碎步一样逐词推敲,对同一个词用多种方式反复解说,那么他的说法因为法、义、衔接、前后次第、师承所学等各方面都圆满,就叫作“圆满”。正是针对这样的说法,才说“圆满词句”。巴利
Apica yo bhikkhu parisati dhammaṃ desento suttaṃ vā jātakaṃ vā nikkhipitvā aññaṃ upārambhakaraṃ suttaṃ āharati, tassa upamaṃ katheti, tadatthaṃ otāreti, evaṃ idaṃ gahetvā ettha khipanto ekapasseneva pariharanto kālaṃ ñatvā vuṭṭhahati, nikkhittasuttaṃ pana nikkhittamattameva hoti, tassa kathā aparimaṇḍalā nāma hoti atthassa aparipuṇṇabhāvato. Yo pana suttaṃ vā jātakaṃ vā nikkhipitvā bahi ekapadampi agantvā yathānikkhittassa suttassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanāvaseneva suttantarampi ānento pāḷiyā anusandhiñca pubbāparañca apekkhanto ācariyehi dinnanaye ṭhatvā tulikāya paricchindanto viya taṃ taṃ atthaṃ suvavatthitaṃ katvā dassento gambhīramātikāya udakaṃ pesento viya gambhīramatthaṃ gamento vaggihārigatiyā pade padaṃ koṭṭento sindhavājānīyo viya ekaṃyeva padaṃ anekehi pariyāyehi punappunaṃ saṃvaṇṇanto gacchati, tassa kathā parimaṇḍalā nāma hoti dhammato atthato anusandhito pubbāparato ācariyuggahatoti sabbaso paripuṇṇabhāvato. Evarūpampi kathaṃ sandhāya ‘‘parimaṇḍalapadabyañjanāyā’’ti vuttaṃ.
因为功德圆满而本来就有,所以叫“城市语”。那位比丘应当说这种话,意思是:从义理的功德圆满来说,它本来就已圆满存在。或者,因为本来就有,所以像城市妇女那样柔美,叫“城市语”,意思是:像在城市里长大的女子那样柔和。或者,“城市语”就是属于城市的,意思是:属于城市的人,也就是城市居民的说法。因为城市居民说话得体,对年纪像父亲的人就叫“父”,对年纪像兄弟的人就叫“兄”。这样的话为众人所喜爱、所欢喜,因此称为“城市语”。巴利
Guṇaparipuṇṇabhāvena pure bhavāti porī, tassa bhikkhuno tenetaṃ bhāsitabbaṃ atthassa guṇaparipuṇṇabhāvena pure puṇṇabhāve bhavāti attho. Pure vā bhavattā poriyā nāgarikitthiyā sukhumālattanena sadisāti porī, pure saṃvaḍḍhanārī viya sukumārāti attho. Purassa esātipi porī, purassa esāti nagaravāsīnaṃ kathāti attho. Nagaravāsino hi yuttakathā honti pitimattaṃ ‘‘pitā’’ti, bhātimattaṃ ‘‘bhātā’’ti vadanti. Evarūpī hi kathā bahuno janassa kantā hoti manāpā, tāya poriyā.
“vissaṭṭhā”(畅达)是指:不被胆汁、痰等所障蔽,远离了可见的迟疑等过失的言语。或者,不过快、不过慢、不间断,成就一味之后,随顺大众意乐而说法者的言语,名为“vissaṭṭhā”。如果比丘说法时,一开始讲经或本生,便从起始就急急忙忙,犹如钻木取火者、犹如咀嚼热食者,对巴利语的前后文脉,已把握的当作已把握,未把握的当作未把握,如同在枯叶间驱赶巨蜥般到处敲打,然后停下起身离去。因为巨蜥在枯叶间爬行时,时而可见,时而不见;同样,某些人的义理解释也时而可见,时而不见。又有说法者,时而快,时而慢,时而声低,时而声大,时而声小,犹如饿鬼口中出火,时而燃烧,时而熄灭,如是者名为“饿鬼说法者”;当大众欲起身时,他又重新开始。又有说法者,处处展开,却因缺乏辩才而陷入困境,如同因某种疾病而呻吟、哭泣般说法。所有这些人的说法,都不能称为“vissaṭṭhā”,因为不能安乐地流转。然而,若有人引用经文,安住于诸阿阇梨所传授的方法,不舍阿阇梨之教导,如同阿阇梨们注释彼彼经文那样,以同样的方法注释,不过快、不过慢,依上述所说的方法,使说法之流无有间断,如江河之流般流转,如从虚空恒河降下的水般不间断地说法,他的言语才名为“vissaṭṭhā”。正为此而说“vissaṭṭhā”。巴利
Vissaṭṭhāyāti pittasemhādīhi apalibuddhāya sandiṭṭhavilambitādidosarahitāya. Atha vā nātisīghaṃ nātisaṇikaṃ nirantaraṃ ekarasañca katvā parisāya ajjhāsayānurūpaṃ dhammaṃ kathentassa vācā vissaṭṭhā nāma. Yo hi bhikkhu dhammaṃ kathento suttaṃ vā jātakaṃ vā ārabhitvā āraddhakālato paṭṭhāya turitaturito araṇiṃ manthento viya uṇhakhādanīyaṃ khādanto viya pāḷiyā anusandhipubbāparesu gahitaṃ gahitameva, aggahitaṃ aggahitameva katvā purāṇapaṇṇantaresu caramānaṃ godhaṃ uṭṭhāpento viya tattha tattha paharanto osāpetvā uṭṭhāya gacchati . Purāṇapaṇṇantaresu hi paripātiyamānā godhā kadāci dissati kadāci na dissati, evamekaccassa atthavaṇṇanā katthaci dissati katthaci na dissati. Yopi dhammaṃ kathento kālena sīghaṃ, kālena saṇikaṃ, kālena mandaṃ, kālena mahāsaddaṃ, kālena khuddakasaddaṃ karoti, yathā nijjhāmataṇhikapetassa mukhato niccharaṇakaaggi kālena jalati kālena nibbāyati, evaṃ petadhammakathiko nāma hoti, parisāya uṭṭhātukāmāya puna ārabhati. Yopi kathento tattha tattha vitthāyati, appaṭibhānatāya āpajjati, kenaci rogena nitthunanto viya kandanto viya katheti, imesaṃ sabbesampi kathā vissaṭṭhā nāma na hoti sukhena appavattabhāvato. Yo pana suttaṃ āharitvā ācariyehi dinnanaye ṭhito ācariyuggahaṃ amuñcanto yathā ca ācariyā taṃ taṃ suttaṃ saṃvaṇṇesuṃ, teneva nayena saṃvaṇṇento nātisīghaṃ nātisaṇikantiādinā vuttanayena kathāpabandhaṃ avicchinnaṃ katvā nadīsoto viya pavatteti, ākāsagaṅgāto bhassamānaudakaṃ viya nirantarakathaṃ pavatteti, tassa kathā vissaṭṭhā nāma hoti. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘vissaṭṭhāyā’’ti.
“无涎语”是指远离涎语的言语。有人说话时,口水流出来,或者唾沫飞溅,他的言语就被叫作“涎语”;这里说的是与它相反的情况。“能让人了知意义”是指:能把意义的开头、中间、结尾都清楚地呈现出来,具备让听者了知所说之义的能力,足以成办让人知义这件事。巴利
Anelagaḷāyāti elagaḷavirahitāya. Kassaci hi kathentassa elaṃ gaḷati, lālā paggharati, kheḷaphusitāni vā nikkhamanti, tassa vācā elagaḷā nāma hoti, tabbiparītāyāti attho. Atthassa viññāpaniyāti ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā bhāsitatthassa viññāpanasamatthatāya atthañāpane sādhanāya.
“言语就是所作”指言语的造作,也就是说出来的声音。他的言语造作善妙、甜美,所以叫“善妙言语者”。因此说“甜美声音”。“轻视”就是看不起。“女人”是关联语。“令心增长”就是使心欢喜,所以叫“令心欢喜者”。因此说“令心增长者”。“以轮回的恐怖来威吓”是指:用轮回的恐怖,去吓唬那些沉醉于青春骄慢等的比库尼们。“在俗家时”指自己还在俗家的时候。“与比库尼行淫,就成为玷污比库尼的人”,这里只说的是与比库尼发生身体接触。但对于在学尼和沙弥尼,即使行淫也不成为玷污比库尼的人,所以说“对在学尼、沙弥尼行淫法”。从“穿着袈裟者”这句话来看,应当知道:对于犯戒的比库尼、在学尼、沙弥尼,先前已犯过重法的人,是已被遮止的。即使那位比库尼不在场,凡是听到她话语的女人们,也都会同样这样认为,所以说“女人确实……”等等。巴利
Vācāva karaṇanti vākkaraṇaṃ, udāhāraghoso. Kalyāṇaṃ madhuraṃ vākkaraṇaṃ assāti kalyāṇavākkaraṇo. Tenevāha ‘‘madhurassaro’’ti. Hīḷetīti avajānāti. Mātugāmoti sambandho. Manaṃ apāyati vaḍḍhetīti manāpo. Tenāha ‘‘manavaḍḍhanako’’ti. Vaṭṭabhayena tajjetvāti yobbanamadādimattā bhikkhuniyo saṃsārabhayena tāsetvā. Gihikāleti attano gihikāle. Bhikkhuniyā methunena bhikkhunīdūsako hotīti bhikkhuniyā kāyasaṃsaggameva vadati. Sikkhamānāsāmaṇerīsu pana methunenapi bhikkhunīdūsako na hotīti āha ‘‘sikkhamānāsāmaṇerīsu methunadhamma’’nti. ‘‘Kāsāyavatthavasanāyā’’ti vacanato dussīlāsu bhikkhunīsikkhamānāsāmaṇerīsu garudhammaṃ ajjhāpannapubbo paṭikkhittoyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tassā bhikkhuniyā abhāvepi yā yā tassā vacanaṃ assosuṃ, tā tā tatheva maññantīti āha ‘‘mātugāmo hī’’tiādi.
现在为了把八项条件综合起来说明,所以开始讲“ettha ca”等话。不过,若以白四羯磨任命不具备这八项条件的人,主持羯磨的人会犯恶作罪,但那位比丘本身仍然算是已经被任命了。巴利
Idāni aṭṭha aṅgāni samodhānetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘ettha cā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Imehi pana aṭṭhahaṅgehi asamannāgataṃ ñatticatutthena kammena sammannento dukkaṭaṃ āpajjati, bhikkhu pana sammatoyeva hoti.
148 “Garukehi”是指应当被尊重、应当被恭敬对待的人。“Ekatoupasampannāya”这个形式,是在表达“受格”的意义上用了“处格”。如果“ovadati”或“vadati”取“说”的意思,那么用“与格”也说得通。所谓“在比丘们面前受具足戒的upasampannā”,指的是改变身份形相的人,或者指五百位释迦族女子。巴利
148.Garukehīti garukātabbehi. Ekatoupasampannāyāti upayogatthe bhummavacanaṃ. ‘‘Ovadatī’’ti vā imassa ‘‘vadatī’’ti atthe sati sampadānavacanampi yujjati. Bhikkhūnaṃ santike upasampannā nāma parivattaliṅgā vā pañcasatasākiyāniyo vā.
149 149.“敷设座位”在这里,三本结集纲要书里都说:“如果地面令人满意,不敷设座位也可以。”由于提到了“女人”,比丘尼也被包含在内,所以说“为了说法、为了免除罪过”。因为到了布萨日,所有比丘尼都必须前往被委派的比丘那里请求教诫,所以用“姐妹们,你们都到齐了吗?”这句话来询问是否所有人都来了,因此说“大家都到了吗”。对于生病的比丘尼,即使没有来,因为病人不来已经得到允许,而凡是能来的都已经来了,所以说“我们都到齐了”是可以的。“在村落内”等处——如果在某个地方无法将五体投地贴在地面上行礼,那么站在原地,把身体向前弯下,合掌说“我礼敬,尊者”,然后离开,也是可以的。“在室内”——有些地方,从城门门槛开始往里,就叫“村落内”;有些地方,从家门开始往里,就叫“室内”。但这里既然另外说了“在村落内”,那么“在室内”就应该理解为是指屋子里面。“无论在何处”,就是指在村落内等任何地方。巴利
149.Āsanaṃ paññapetvāti ettha ‘‘sace bhūmi manāpā hoti, āsanaṃ apaññāpetumpi vaṭṭatī’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Mātugāmaggahaṇena bhikkhunīpi saṅgahitāti āha ‘‘dhammadesanāpattimocanattha’’nti. Sammatassa bhikkhuno santikaṃ pāṭipade ovādatthāya sabbāhi bhikkhunīhi āgantabbato ‘‘samaggāttha bhaginiyo’’ti iminā sabbāsaṃ āgamanaṃ pucchatīti āha ‘‘sabbā āgatātthā’’ti. Gilānāsu anāgatāsupi gilānānaṃ anāgamanassa anuññātattā āgantuṃ samatthāhi ca sabbāhi āgatattā ‘‘samaggāmhayyā’’ti vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Antogāme vātiādīsu yattha pañca aṅgāni bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhāpetvā vandituṃ na sakkā hoti, tattha ṭhitāya eva kāyaṃ purato nāmetvā ‘‘vandāmi ayyā’’ti añjaliṃ paggayha gantumpi vaṭṭati. Antaragharanti katthaci nagaradvārassa bahiindakhīlato paṭṭhāya antogāmo vuccati, katthaci gharummārato paṭṭhāya antogehaṃ. Idha pana ‘‘antogāme vā’’ti visuṃ vuttattā ‘‘antaraghare vā’’ti antogehaṃ sandhāya vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yattha katthacīti antogāmādīsu yattha katthaci.
“可以住”的意思是:相信“请住下,尊者们,我们会把比丘们带来”这句话而住下,是允许的。“不是受了邀请才想去”的意思是:不是受了人们邀请才想去,而是想就在那里入雨安居。“从那里”指从比丘尼的住处。“请求之后”是指请求说:“我们就依你们带来的教诫而住。”“在那里”指在那个比丘尼住处。“应当依来到者的教诫而住”是指应当以随后的方式入雨安居。“在无比丘的住处居住者有罪”——这是通过举罪的方式,从一般情况指出有犯戒的可能,但并不是她真的犯了这条戒。“即使破了雨安居而离开者也有罪”是指未入雨安居这一根本犯戒。由于另一条犯戒存在无犯的理由,所以说“应当守护它”,意思是应当守护那未入雨安居的根本犯戒,意在说明在无比丘的住处,遇到这样的灾厄时也应当入雨安居。因此说:“因为在灾厄中……说为无犯。”然而对于另一条犯戒,则是无犯;在没有理由的情况下,也不应以随后的方式入雨安居。因为若有比丘在而不入雨安居,就有犯戒。“应当去那里并自恣”此处,是因为若不自恣就有犯戒的可能。如果比丘们的住处即使很远,但能在初九日前往自恣,就应当去那里自恣。但如果初九日出发仍不能到达,则不去者无犯。巴利
Vaṭṭatīti ‘‘vasatha ayye, mayaṃ bhikkhū ānessāmā’’ti vuttavacanaṃ saddahantīhi vasituṃ vaṭṭati. Na nimantitā hutvā gantukāmāti manussehi nimantitā hutvā gantukāmā na hontīti attho, tattheva vassaṃ upagantukāmā hontīti adhippāyo. Yatoti bhikkhunupassayato. Yācitvāti ‘‘tumhehi ānītaovādeneva mayampi vasissāmā’’ti yācitvā. Tatthāti tasmiṃ bhikkhunupassaye. Āgatānaṃ santike ovādena vasitabbanti pacchimikāya vassaṃ vasitabbaṃ. Abhikkhukāvāse vasantiyā āpattīti codanāmukhena sāmaññato āpattippasaṅgaṃ vadati, na pana tassā āpatti. Vassacchedaṃ katvā gacchantiyāpi āpattīti vassānupagamamūlaṃ āpattiṃ vadati. Itarāya āpattiyā anāpattikāraṇasabbhāvato ‘‘sā rakkhitabbā’’ti vuttaṃ, sā vassānupagamamūlā āpatti rakkhitabbāti attho, abhikkhukepi āvāse īdisāsu āpadāsu vassaṃ upagantabbanti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘āpadāsu hi…pe… anāpatti vuttā’’ti. Itarāya pana āpattiyā anāpatti, kāraṇe asati pacchimikāyapi vassaṃ na upagantabbaṃ. Santesu hi bhikkhūsu vassaṃ anupagacchantiyā āpatti. Tattha gantvā pavāretabbanti ettha apavārentīnaṃ āpattisambhavato. Sace dūrepi bhikkhūnaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, sakkā ca hoti navamiyaṃ gantvā pavāretuṃ, tattha gantvā pavāretabbaṃ. Sace pana navamiyaṃ nikkhamitvā sampāpuṇituṃ na sakkā hoti, agacchantīnaṃ anāpatti.
问布萨叫做“布萨问”;这个词把音节省略、又把元音缩短,就说成“布萨问者”,所以注释里说“布萨问”。应当问布萨,也就是应当问:“尊者,布萨在什么时候?”比丘也应当说:“姊妹,布萨在明天。”比丘们有时因为某种原因,把十五日的布萨改成十四日,或者把十四日的布萨改成十五日;比丘们在哪一天举行布萨,比丘尼们也应该在同一天举行布萨。出于这个意思,所以说“就在半月的十三日先去”等等。这样问过之后,如果比丘们在十四日举行布萨,就应当说:“姊妹,是十四日的。”如果是在十五日举行,就应当告诉她们:“姊妹,是十五日的。”“为了教诫”就是为了请求教诫。从初一日开始,为了听法而应当前往;也就是说,在初一日为了接受教诫,从初二日起应当隔三差五地为了听法而前往。接受教诫也被不加区分地说成“听法”。“不间断地前往精舍”,是就大多数情况下的前往而说的。通过“因为已说”等语句,为了说明“我们将依照教导去做”,所以引经文来显示所有比丘尼都前往。“去教诫”就是去请求教诫。“二、三”就是两个、三个。这里是用主格来表达具格的意义。巴利
Uposathassa pucchanaṃ uposathapucchā, sāyeva ka-ppaccayaṃ rassattañca katvā uposathapucchakanti vuttāti āha ‘‘uposathapucchana’’nti. Uposatho pucchitabboti ‘‘kadā, ayya, uposatho’’ti pucchitabbo. Bhikkhunāpi ‘‘sve, bhagini, uposatho’’ti vattabbaṃ. Bhikkhū kadāci kenaci kāraṇena pannarasikaṃ vā cātuddasīuposathaṃ, cātuddasikaṃ vā pannarasīuposathaṃ karonti, yasmiñca divase bhikkhūhi uposatho kato, tasmiṃyeva bhikkhunīhipi uposatho kātabboti adhippāyena ‘‘pakkhassa terasiyaṃyeva gantvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Evaṃ pucchitena bhikkhunā sace cātuddasiyaṃ uposathaṃ karonti, ‘‘cātuddasiko bhaginī’’ti vattabbaṃ. Sace pana pannarasiyaṃ karonti, ‘‘pannarasiko bhaginī’’ti ācikkhitabbaṃ. Ovādatthāyāti ovādayācanatthāya. Pāṭipadadivasato pana paṭṭhāya dhammasavanatthāya gantabbanti pāṭipadadivase ovādaggahaṇatthāya dutiyadivasato paṭṭhāya antarantarā dhammasavanatthāya gantabbaṃ. Ovādaggahaṇampi hi ‘‘dhammasavanamevā’’ti abhedena vuttaṃ. Nirantaraṃ vihāraṃ upasaṅkamiṃsūti yebhuyyena upasaṅkamanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Vuttañhetantiādinā yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjissāmāti sabbāsaṃyeva bhikkhunīnaṃ upasaṅkamanadīpanatthaṃ pāḷi nidassitā. Ovādaṃ gacchatīti ovādaṃ yācituṃ gacchati. Dve tissoti dvīhi tīhi. Karaṇatthe cetaṃ paccattavacanaṃ.
“以令人欢喜的”是指能让人生起净信、没有过失的身业等。“令成就”是指成就三种学。如果比丘尼们只见到诵戒者就请求教诫,那该怎么办?在布萨堂里比丘僧团聚集时,按照前行事务的流程问“有没有比丘尼请求教诫”时,接受教诫的人应说“你该这样说”,让另一位比丘把这话转述给诵戒者,诵戒者自己说出该说的话之后,还要亲自去告诉比丘尼们;或者由另一位比丘在那一天代他诵戒。这里所说的“她们”用的是复数形式。巴利
Pāsādikenāti pasādajanakena niddosena kāyakammādinā. Sampādetūti tividhaṃ sikkhaṃ sampādetu. Sace pātimokkhuddesakaṃyeva disvā tāhi bhikkhunīhi ovādo yācito bhaveyya, tena kiṃ kātabbanti? Uposathagge sannipatite bhikkhusaṅghe pubbakiccavasena ‘‘atthi kāci bhikkhuniyo ovādaṃ yācamānā’’ti pucchiyamāne ‘‘evaṃ vadehī’’ti ovādapaṭiggāhakena vattabbavacanaṃ aññena bhikkhunā kathāpetvā pātimokkhuddesakena vattabbavacanaṃ attanā vatvā puna sayameva gantvā bhikkhunīnaṃ ārocetabbaṃ, aññena vā bhikkhunā tasmiṃ divase pātimokkhaṃ uddisāpetabbaṃ. Etaṃ vuttanti ‘‘tāhī’’ti etaṃ bahuvacanaṃ vuttaṃ.
“一位比丘尼”这句话,是针对从许多比丘尼住处而来、只由一位比丘尼来接受教诫的情形说的,并不是说没有第二位比丘尼。“从许多比丘尼住处”是指在路上,或者就在那个村子里有许多比丘尼住处。“比丘尼僧团、诸位尊者比丘尼以及比丘尼”这句话,是显示从不同住处接受教诫后回来的比丘尼应该说的话。这只是举出一种情形作为示例,实际上在各个比丘尼住处,要先了解比丘尼的人数,再按相应的方式来说。“致比丘僧团、诸位尊者、尊者”这是简略的说法。巴利
Ekā bhikkhunī vāti idaṃ bahūhi bhikkhunupassayehi ekāya eva bhikkhuniyā sāsanapaṭiggahaṇaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na pana dutiyikāya abhāvaṃ sandhāya. Bahūhi bhikkhunupassayehīti antarāmagge vā tasmiṃyeva vā gāme bahūhi bhikkhunupassayehi. ‘‘Bhikkhunisaṅgho ca ayya bhikkhuniyo ca bhikkhunī cā’’ti iminā nānāupassayehi sāsanaṃ gahetvā āgatabhikkhuniyā vattabbavacanaṃ dasseti. Idañca ekena pakārena mukhamattanidassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ, tasmiṃ tasmiṃ pana bhikkhunupassaye bhikkhunīnaṃ pamāṇaṃ sallakkhetvā tadanurūpena nayena vattabbaṃ. Bhikkhusaṅghassa ayyānaṃ ayyassāti idaṃ saṅkhipitvā vuttaṃ.
“诵戒者”这一说法,是只就僧团布萨的情况来说的。但在三个或两个比丘居住的地方,如果没有诵戒,那么在那里也应当由提出动议的比丘或其他比丘,按照同样的方式来说。即使只有一个人,在布萨日接受了教诫的请求之后,对在布萨日次日到来的比丘尼们,也应当说“没有谁”等话。如果自己就是被选任的人,就应当说“我是被选任的”。不知道这个规则的人,在这里就被认为是愚者。巴利
Pātimokkhuddesakenapīti idaṃ saṅghuposathavaseneva dassitaṃ. Yattha pana tiṇṇaṃ dvinnaṃ vā vasanaṭṭhāne pātimokkhuddeso natthi, tatthāpi ñattiṭhapanakena itarena vā bhikkhunā imināva nayena vattabbaṃ. Ekapuggalenapi uposathadivase ovādayācanaṃ sampaṭicchitvā pāṭipade āgatānaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ ‘‘natthi kocī’’tiādi vattabbameva. Sace sayameva, ‘‘sammato aha’’nti vattabbaṃ. Imaṃ vidhiṃ ajānanto idha bāloti adhippeto.
150 在“非法羯磨中,作非法羯磨想,对别众的比丘尼僧团作别众想而给予教诫,犯波逸提”等情形里,虽然也存在以别众等为因的恶作罪,但经文中处处都只说以非法羯磨为根本的波逸提。所以注释中说:“就非法羯磨而言,依两类九种情况,共有十八个波逸提。”这里其余的内容容易理解。在这里,未获选任、比丘尼已圆满受具足戒、以教诫的方式宣说八敬法,这三项是构成此罪的要素。巴利
150.Adhammakamme adhammakammasaññī vaggaṃ bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ vaggasaññī ovadati, āpatti pācittiyassātiādīsu vijjamānesupi vaggādibhāvanimittesu dukkaṭesu adhammakammamūlakaṃ pācittiyameva pāḷiyaṃ sabbattha vuttanti āha ‘‘adhammakamme dvinnaṃ navakānaṃ vasena aṭṭhārasa pācittiyānī’’ti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Asammatatā, bhikkhuniyā paripuṇṇūpasampannatā, ovādavasena aṭṭhagarudhammabhaṇananti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
2. 日没学处注释巴利
2. Atthaṅgatasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
153 153. 第二,“对诸善法的持续实践”,这是就前行阶段的修行来说的。“牟尼”的意思是了知。“以那智慧”,就是以被称为阿罗汉果慧的那智慧。“于诸道”,就是于方便道。因为阿罗汉已圆满学处,所以说“此亦……如上所说”。或者,“不放逸者”和“学者”这几个词应当理解为表示原因:以不放逸为因、以学习为因,所以是增上心,这就是意思。“忧”,就是心的热恼。在这里应当知道:用“增上心”这个词指的是增上心学,用“不放逸”这个词指的是增上戒学,用“牟尼于牟尼道中学习”这些词指的是增上慧学;或者,“牟尼”这个词指增上慧学,“于牟尼道中学习”这个词指出世间诸学的前行修行,而“无忧”等句子则显示了学处圆满的利益。巴利
153. Dutiye kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ sātaccakiriyāyāti pubbabhāgappaṭipattivasena vuttaṃ. Munātīti jānāti. Tena ñāṇenāti tena arahattaphalapaññāsaṅkhātena ñāṇena. Pathesūti upāyamaggesu. Arahato pariniṭṭhitasikkhattā āha ‘‘idañca…pe… vutta’’nti. Atha vā ‘‘appamajjato sikkhato’’ti imesaṃ padānaṃ hetuatthatā daṭṭhabbā, tasmā appamajjanahetu sikkhanahetu ca adhicetasoti attho. Sokāti cittasantāpā. Ettha ca adhicetasoti iminā adhicittasikkhā, appamajjatoti iminā adhisīlasikkhā, munino monapathesu sikkhatoti etehi adhipaññāsikkhā, muninoti vā etena adhipaññāsikkhā, monapathesu sikkhatoti etena tāsaṃ lokuttarasikkhānaṃ pubbabhāgappaṭipadā, sokā na bhavantītiādīhi sikkhāpāripūriyā ānisaṃsā pakāsitāti veditabbaṃ.
所谓“Kokanuda”是莲花的一个修饰语,就像“kokāsaya”一样。据说这种莲花叶子很多、色泽饱满,而且极其芬芳。也有人称“名为Kokanuda的就是白莲花”。“Pāto”就是清晨。这里的意思是:正如名为Kokanuda的莲花,在清晨太阳升起时绽放盛开,香气未散,光彩夺目;同样,请你看那位以身体之香和功德之香而芬芳、在秋季如空中的太阳一般以自身光辉照耀、因肢体散发光明而被称为Angīrasa的正自觉者。巴利
Kokanudanti padumavisesanaṃ yathā ‘‘kokāsaya’’nti, taṃ kira bahupattaṃ vaṇṇasampannaṃ ativiya sugandhañca hoti. ‘‘Kokanudaṃ nāma setapaduma’’ntipi vadanti. Pātoti pageva. Ayañhettha attho – yathā kokanudasaṅkhātaṃ padumaṃ pāto sūriyuggamanavelāyaṃ phullaṃ vikasitaṃ avītagandhaṃ siyā virocamānaṃ, evaṃ sarīragandhena guṇagandhena ca sugandhaṃ saradakāle antalikkhe ādiccamiva attano tejasā tapantaṃ aṅgehi niccharaṇajutitāya aṅgīrasaṃ sammāsambuddhaṃ passāti.
“不能”的意思是:这个教法以修行为核心,而修行又以学习教理为根本,你没有能力学习教理,所以说“不能”。“一块干净的布片”是指以神通变化出来的清净布片。据说当时世尊说:“不能诵习的人,并不就是不能安住于我的教法中。比丘,不要忧愁!”于是拉着他的手臂进入精舍,用神通变化出一块布片,交给他并说:“来吧,比丘,你一边擦拭这块布,一边反复诵习‘除尘,除尘’。”他在那里,因为过去世所积累的善根……巴利
Abhabboti paṭipattisāramidaṃ sāsanaṃ, paṭipatti ca pariyattimūlikā, tvañca pariyattiṃ uggahetuṃ asamattho, tasmā abhabboti adhippāyo. Suddhaṃ pilotikakhaṇḍanti iddhiyā abhisaṅkhataṃ parisuddhaṃ coḷakhaṇḍaṃ. Tadā kira bhagavā ‘‘na sajjhāyaṃ kātuṃ asakkonto mama sāsane abhabbo nāma hoti, mā soci bhikkhū’’ti taṃ bāhāyaṃ gahetvā vihāraṃ pavisitvā iddhiyā pilotikakhaṇḍaṃ abhinimminitvā ‘‘handa, bhikkhu, imaṃ parimajjanto ‘rajoharaṇaṃ rajoharaṇa’nti punappunaṃ sajjhāyaṃ karohī’’ti vatvā adāsi tattha pubbekatādhikārattā.
据说他过去生中曾做国王,右绕都城巡行时,额头出汗,就用一块干净的布擦额头,布被弄脏了。他心想:“依靠这个身体,这样一块原本干净的布竟失去本色而变脏,诸行确实无常!”于是获得了无常想。因为这件事,那块擦尘布就成了他的助缘。擦除尘垢,就是除尘布。生起悚惧感,是指现起不净想和无常想而生起悚惧感。他如理地擦拭时,心想:“布是干净的,这里没有过错;这是身体本身的过错。”由此获得不净想和无常想,再以把握名色等将智导入五蕴,依聚思惟等次第培育毗婆舍那,依生灭智等次第使毗婆舍那达到顺随智与种姓智的邻近。针对此而说“发起毗婆舍那”。说示了以光耀为答的偈颂,称为光耀偈,他宣说了此偈,这是其含义。巴利
So kira pubbe rājā hutvā nagaraṃ padakkhiṇaṃ karonto nalāṭato sede muccante parisuddhena sāṭakena nalāṭaṃ puñchi, sāṭako kiliṭṭho ahosi . So ‘‘imaṃ sarīraṃ nissāya evarūpo parisuddhasāṭako pakatiṃ jahitvā kiliṭṭho jāto, aniccā vata saṅkhārā’’ti aniccasaññaṃ paṭilabhati, tena kāraṇenassa rajoharaṇameva paccayo jāto. Rajaṃ haratīti rajoharaṇaṃ. Saṃvegaṃ paṭilabhitvāti asubhasaññaṃ aniccasaññañca upaṭṭhapento saṃvegaṃ paṭilabhitvā. So hi yoniso ummajjanto ‘‘parisuddhaṃ vatthaṃ, natthettha doso, attabhāvassa panāyaṃ doso’’ti asubhasaññaṃ aniccasaññañca paṭilabhitvā nāmarūpapariggahādinā pañcasu khandhesu ñāṇaṃ otāretvā kalāpasammasanādikkamena vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā udayabbayañāṇādipaapāṭiyā vipassanaṃ anulomagotrabhusamīpaṃ pāpesi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘vipassanaṃ ārabhī’’ti. Obhāsagāthaṃ abhāsīti obhāsavissajjanapubbakabhāsitagāthā obhāsagāthā, taṃ abhāsīti attho.
在这里,关于“以‘增上心’宣说了这首光耀偈”这句话,就是在这个地方说的。而在《清净论》(清净论 2.386)、《法句经注》(法句经注 1.周利槃陀伽长老事)以及《长老偈注》(长老偈注 2.566)中:巴利
Ettha ca ‘‘adhicetasoti imaṃ obhāsagāthaṃ abhāsī’’ti idheva vuttaṃ. Visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.386) pana dhammapadaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.cūḷapanthakattheravatthu) theragāthāsaṃvaṇṇanāyañca (theragā. aṭṭha. 2.566) –
贪是尘垢,但并不是人们所说的微尘;
这是贪欲的别名,叫做尘垢。
智者舍断此尘垢后,
他们安住于离尘者的教法中。
嗔……(中略)……在教法中。
愚痴是尘垢,但并不是人们所说的微尘。
这是“尘垢”的另一种说法,指的就是愚痴。
智者舍断此尘垢后,
他们安住在离尘垢者的教法里。巴利
‘‘Rāgo rajo na ca pana reṇu vuccati; Rāgassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ rajoti; Etaṃ rajaṃ vippajahitvā paṇḍitā; Viharanti te vigatarajassa sāsane. ‘‘Doso…pe… sāsane. ‘‘Moho rajo na ca pana reṇu vuccati; Mohassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ rajoti; Etaṃ rajaṃ vippajahitvā paṇḍitā; Viharanti te vigatarajassa sāsaneti. –
世尊说了这三首光耀偈。而“增上心”这首偈颂,是周利槃陀伽长老的优陀那偈,这在这部巴利圣典中就有记载。不过在《长老偈》里,这首偈并没有收在周利槃陀伽长老的优陀那偈中,那里说的是:“这是一优陀那长老的优陀那偈。”尽管如此,既然这部巴利圣典和注疏都这样记载,就应当理解为:这首优陀那偈也是周利槃陀伽长老的,而且是世尊以光耀偈的形式宣说的。他证得了阿罗汉果:也就是具足神通和无碍解的阿罗汉果。从“你不能”等话来看,出于悲悯把共住弟子等人赶出僧园,似乎是无犯的。因为这位长老不可能故意那样做,或者应当理解为:这是在驱出学处尚未制定时,长老那样做的。巴利
Imā tisso obhāsagāthā abhāsī’’ti vuttaṃ. Adhicetasoti ca ayaṃ cūḷapanthakattherassa udānagāthāti imissāyeva pāḷiyā āgataṃ. Theragāthāyaṃ pana cūḷapanthakattherassa udānagāthāsu ayaṃ anāruḷhā, ‘‘ekudāniyattherassa pana ayaṃ udānagāthā’’ti (theragā. aṭṭha. 1.ekudāniyattheragāthāvaṇṇanā) tattha vuttaṃ. Evaṃ santepi imissā pāḷiyā aṭṭhakathāya ca evamāgatattā cūḷapanthakattherassapi ayaṃ udānagāthā obhāsagāthāvasena ca bhagavatā bhāsitāti gahetabbaṃ. Arahattaṃ pāpuṇīti abhiññāpaṭisambhidāparivāraṃ arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. Abhabbo tvantiādivacanato anukampāvasena saddhivihārikādiṃ saṅghikavihārā nikkaḍḍhāpentassa anāpatti viya dissati. Abhabbo hi thero sañcicca taṃ kātuṃ, nikkaḍḍhanasikkhāpade vā apaññatte therena evaṃ katanti gahetabbaṃ.
156 第156条,教诫者的波逸提:太阳落山之后,用重法或其他法来教诫比丘尼,即使是被正式指派的,也犯波逸提。这里其余的内容很容易理解。太阳已落山、对方是已受具足戒者、教诫——这就是这里的三项要素。巴利
156.Ovadantassa pācittiyanti atthaṅgate sūriye garudhammehi vā aññena vā dhammeneva ovadantassa sammatassapi pācittiyaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Atthaṅgatasūriyatā, paripuṇṇūpasampannatā, ovadananti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
第三,比丘尼住处学处的注释巴利
3. Bhikkhunupassayasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
162 162. 第三项本身意思很直白。前往比丘尼的住处、对方是已受具足戒的比丘尼、时间不合适、以重法教诫,这些就是这里的四项要素。巴利
162. Tatiyaṃ uttānatthameva. Upassayūpagamanaṃ, paripuṇṇūpasampannatā, samayābhāvo, garudhammehi ovadananti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.
4. 利养学处注释巴利
4. Āmisasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
164 第四项中,“对已受具足戒者……比丘尼教诫者”这一句,和“想让他羞愧”这句话是连在一起的。不过,如果按“想说他的坏话、想让他名誉扫地”这层意思来理解,那么在“已受具足戒者”等词上,就应该把词尾变成“对已受具足戒者”的与格。正是针对这个意思,才说“应该按照说嫌责者那一段所讲的方式来理解”。如果说“为了衣服而教诫”等等,每说完一句,就要知道犯了波逸提。根据巴利经文“对未受僧团认可的已受具足戒者”,以及注释书里说的“由受认可者或由僧团托付责任而任命者”,应当知道:具足八种条件的受认可者,或者因为想要远行而请求“在我回来之前,责任由你承担”,因此被任命的人,在他不在的时候,或者由僧团同样托付责任而任命的人,可以用八敬法或其他法来教诫。因此,“若比丘未受认可而教诫比丘尼,犯波逸提”这句话,应当理解为是针对事先没有托付责任就任命的人说的。巴利
164. Catutthe ‘‘upasampannaṃ…pe… bhikkhunovādaka’’nti imesaṃ ‘‘maṅkukattukāmo’’ti iminā sambandho. ‘‘Avaṇṇaṃ kattukāmo ayasaṃ kattukāmo’’ti imesaṃ pana vasena ‘‘upasampanna’’ntiādīsu ‘‘upasampannassā’’ti vibhattivipariṇāmo kātabboti imamatthaṃ sandhāya ‘‘ujjhāpanake vuttanayenevattho veditabbo’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Cīvarahetu ovadatī’’tiādinā bhaṇantassa ekekasmiṃ vacane niṭṭhite pācittiyaṃ veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Upasampannaṃ saṅghena asammata’’nti pāḷivacanato ‘‘sammatena vā saṅghena vā bhāraṃ katvā ṭhapito’’ti aṭṭhakathāvacanato ca aṭṭhahi aṅgehi samannāgato sammatena vā vippavasitukāmena ‘‘yāvāhaṃ āgamissāmi, tāva te bhāro hotū’’ti yācitvā ṭhapito tassābhāvato saṅghena vā tatheva bhāraṃ katvā ṭhapito aṭṭhahi garudhammehi aññena vā dhammena ovadituṃ labhatīti veditabbaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘yo pana, bhikkhu, asammato bhikkhuniyo ovadeyya, pācittiya’’nti idaṃ pageva bhāraṃ katvā aṭṭhapitaṃ sandhāya vuttanti gahetabbaṃ.
168 不犯:如果对方本来就是因衣服的缘故……而教诫。这里,对于因利养的缘故而教诫的人,如果怀着“他是因为利养才教诫”的想法这样说,不犯;但如果心里认为“他并不是因为利养才教诫”,那就犯恶作。对于并非因利养而教诫的人,即使怀着“他是因为利养才教诫”的想法这样说,也不犯,因为这条学处是以心念来判定的。其余部分在这里很容易理解。已受具足戒、如法获得认可、没有利养方面的动机、怀着想说坏话的心而这样说——这些就是这里的四个条件。巴利
168.Anāpatti pakatiyā cīvarahetu…pe… ovadantaṃ bhaṇatīti ettha āmisahetu ovadantaṃ ‘‘āmisahetu ovadatī’’ti saññāya evaṃ bhaṇantassa anāpatti, ‘‘na āmisahetu ovadatī’’ti saññino pana dukkaṭaṃ, na āmisahetu ovadantaṃ pana ‘‘āmisahetu ovadatī’’ti saññāya bhaṇantassapi anāpatti sacittakattā sikkhāpadassa. Sesamettha uttānameva. Upasampannatā, dhammena laddhasammutitā, anāmisantaratā, avaṇṇakāmatāya evaṃ bhaṇananti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.
169 第五项,只是字面意思而已。巴利
169. Pañcamaṃ uttānatthameva.
第六项,缝衣学处的注释巴利
6. Cīvarasibbāpanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
175 第六项:如果那位比丘尼一开始就把那件衣披在身上,别的比丘尼看见后可能会提出批评,她心想“这样一来大众就看不到了”,于是说出“就像把收集起来的东西拿走收起来”之类的话。巴利
175. Chaṭṭhe sace sā bhikkhunī taṃ cīvaraṃ āditova pārupeyya, aññā bhikkhuniyo disvā ujjhāpeyyuṃ, tato mahājano passituṃ na labhatīti maññamāno ‘‘yathāsaṃhaṭaṃ haritvā nikkhipitvā’’tiādimāha.
176 “取出”就是一次取出。那些依附于他们的人,与此相关联。所谓“裁缝义务”,是指按照“应当为同梵行者做”这一应作之事来做针线活。对戒师和依止师犯恶作,是因为以不如法的方式受用。所谓欺骗,就是不说“为了你的亲属”,而只说“为某一位比丘尼”。听了“为某一位比丘尼”之后,他们可能会以为不是自己的亲属,所以说“因为被指使去做不如法的事”。即使没有说“这是你母亲的衣”等话,只要以清净心说“请缝这件衣”而让人缝制,也无犯。巴利
176.Nīharatīti sakiṃ nīharati. Yepi tesaṃ nissitakāti sambandho. Kathinavattanti ‘‘sabrahmacārīnaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti itikattabbatāvasena sūcikammakaraṇaṃ. Ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ dukkaṭanti akappiyasamādānavasena dukkaṭaṃ. Vañcetvāti ‘‘tava ñātikāyā’’ti avatvā ‘‘ekissā bhikkhuniyā’’ti ettakameva vatvā. ‘‘Ekissā bhikkhuniyā’’ti sutvā te aññātikasaññino bhaveyyunti āha ‘‘akappiye niyojitattā’’ti . ‘‘Idaṃ te mātu cīvara’’ntiādīni avatvāpi ‘‘idaṃ cīvaraṃ sibbehī’’ti suddhacittena sibbāpentassapi anāpatti.
179 “鞋袋等”中的“等”字,也包括那种不能用来下着或上披的衣。这里其余的部分容易理解。衣属于非亲里比丘尼所有、可以用来下着或上披、按前面所说的方式缝制或叫人缝制,这就是这里的三支。巴利
179.Upāhanatthavikādinti ādi-saddena yaṃ cīvaraṃ nivāsetuṃ vā pārupituṃ vā na sakkā hoti, tampi saṅgaṇhāti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā santakatā, nivāsanapārupanūpagatā, vuttanayena sibbanaṃ vā sibbāpanaṃ vāti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
第七、关于约定同行的学处注释巴利
7. Saṃvidahanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
181 181. 在第七项中,原文说“盗贼抢走了走在后面的人的……”,这里经文省略语作“钵与衣”,所以注释说“走在后面的人的钵与衣”。那些比丘尼,就是走在后面的比丘尼们。这里要明白,“走在后面的人”是通过格的变化来建立关联的。巴利经文里,如果约定时以比丘为先,就说“我们走吧,姊妹;我们走吧,尊者”;如果以比丘尼为先,就说“我们走吧,尊者;我们走吧,姊妹”。“同一段路程”是指一段被称为路程的道路,或者是一起走一段路程。“昨天”是指明天。“后天”是指第三天。巴利
181. Sattame ‘‘pacchā gacchantīnaṃ corā acchindiṃsū’’ti ettha ‘‘pattacīvara’’nti pāṭhasesoti āha ‘‘pacchā gacchantīnaṃ pattacīvara’’nti. Tā bhikkhuniyoti pacchā gacchantiyo bhikkhuniyo. ‘‘Pacchā gacchantīna’’nti ca vibhattivipariṇāmenettha sambandho veditabbo. Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘gacchāma bhagini, gacchāma ayyā’’ti bhikkhupubbakaṃ saṃvidhānaṃ vuttaṃ, ‘‘gacchāma ayya, gacchāma bhaginī’’ti bhikkhunīpubbakaṃ. Ekaddhānamagganti ekaṃ addhānasaṅkhātaṃ maggaṃ, ekato vā addhānamaggaṃ. Hiyyoti suve. Pareti tatiyadivase.
182-183 所谓“两种方式”,是指按步行方式或按派别方式说,所以叫“两种说法的分类”。四条道路交汇的地方叫四叉路口,三条道路交汇的地方叫三叉路口。“村与村之间”这句话里,另一个村就叫“村间”,所以说“出村时无犯……比丘犯波逸提”。巴利经文里“约定后”这个词没有特别区分说明,所以说“不符经文”;又因为说“在这段范围内即使约定,比丘也犯恶作”,所以说“也不符其余注释书”。超过半由旬,是指在没有村庄的地方超过半由旬。凡是半由旬范围内没有别的村庄,这里就指无村的林野;如果半由旬内有村庄,那就按村间来计数而犯罪。巴利
182-183.Dvidhā vuttappakāroti pādagamanavasena pakkhagamanavasena vāti dvidhā vuttappabhedo . Catunnaṃ maggānaṃ sambandhaṭṭhānaṃ catukkaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ sambandhaṭṭhānaṃ siṅghāṭakaṃ. ‘‘Gāmantare gāmantare’’ti ettha añño gāmo gāmantaranti āha ‘‘nikkhamane anāpatti…pe… bhikkhuno pācittiya’’nti. ‘‘Saṃvidhāyā’’ti pāḷiyaṃ avisesena vuttattā ‘‘neva pāḷiyā sametī’’ti vuttaṃ, ‘‘etthantare saṃvidahitepi bhikkhuno dukkaṭa’’nti vuttattā ‘‘na sesaaṭṭhakathāya sametī’’ti vuttaṃ. Addhayojanaṃ atikkamantassāti asati gāme addhayojanaṃ atikkamantassa. Yattha hi addhayojanabbhantare añño gāmo na hoti, taṃ idha agāmakaṃ araññanti adhippetaṃ, addhayojanabbhantare pana gāme sati gāmantaragaṇanāya eva āpatti.
185 “国土分裂”是指国土被掠夺。“登上轮”是指登上行走的轮子或车轮。其余部分容易理解。两人约定之后上路、不失约、没有适当因缘、不是灾祸时、进入村与村之间或超过半由旬,这些就是这里的五个条件。不过,与单方面受具足戒的人等同行时,则按有关妇女的学处而犯戒。巴利
185.Raṭṭhabhedeti raṭṭhavilope. Cakkasamāruḷhāti iriyāpathacakkaṃ sakaṭacakkaṃ vā samāruḷhā. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Dvinnampi saṃvidahitvā maggappaṭipatti , avisaṅketaṃ, samayābhāvo, anāpadā, gāmantarokkamanaṃ vā addhayojanātikkamo vāti imāni panettha pañca aṅgāni. Ekatoupasampannādīhi saddhiṃ gacchantassa pana mātugāmasikkhāpadena āpatti.
8. 登船学处的注释巴利
8. Nāvābhiruhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
188 第八条里,以贪著世间滋味、亲近结交朋友为动机,事先约好以游戏为先,这个差别是由“就这样……和比丘尼们一起在船上嬉戏”以及“向上游或向下游”这两句成立的。巴利
188. Aṭṭhame lokassādamittasanthavavasena kīḷāpurekkhārā saṃvidahitvāti ayaṃ viseso ‘‘evamime…pe… bhikkhunīhi saddhiṃ nāvāya kīḷantī’’ti iminā ‘‘uddhaṃgāminiṃ vā adhogāminiṃ vā’’ti iminā ca siddho.
189 189. 对于“河流从何处到他乡”这一句,论师说“于某条河流”等等。他们说:“由于‘那条有聚落的河岸……乃至以半由旬计算’是仅就沿着每一岸行走而说的,所以对于沿着这样一条河的中央行走的人,按聚落间计算和按半由旬计算都构成罪。”接着用“一切注释书中”等语,论证自己所说的这个意思。他们说:“因为以游戏为先导而与比丘尼相约乘船,在河流中即构成波逸提;所以在湖泊、大海等处,以游戏为先导只构成恶作,不构成波逸提。”有人依据“以世间利养、交友亲近为缘,以游戏为先导而相约”这句话,说“这条学处是不善心、世间罪”,这不应采纳。因为即使以游戏为先导登船后,在进入聚落间或超过半由旬时,即使具足善心或无记心,也会犯罪。如果他因此生起悚惧感而证得阿拉汉果,或者入睡,或者作意业处而行,他哪里还有不善心俱,而称这条学处为不善心、世间罪呢?因此,成立为“制立罪、三心”。其余此处易明。巴利
189. Nadiyā kuto gāmantaranti āha ‘‘yassā nadiyā’’tiādi. ‘‘Tassā sagāmakatīrapassena…pe… addhayojanagaṇanāyāti ekekapasseneva gamanaṃ sandhāya vuttattā tādisikāya nadiyā majjhena gacchantassa gāmantaragaṇanāya addhayojanagaṇanāya ca āpattī’’ti vadanti. Sabbaaṭṭhakathāsūtiādinā attanā vuttamevatthaṃ samattheti. ‘‘Kīḷāpurekkhāratāya bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ saṃvidhāya nāvaṃ abhiruhantassa nadiyaṃyeva pācittiyassa vuttattā vāpisamuddādīsu kīḷāpurekkhāratāya dukkaṭameva, na pācittiya’’nti vadanti. ‘‘Lokassādamittasanthavavasena kīḷāpurekkhārā saṃvidahitvā’’ti vacanato keci ‘‘imaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ akusalacittaṃ lokavajja’’nti vadanti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Kīḷāpurekkhāratāya hi abhiruhitvāpi gāmantarokkamane addhayojanātikkame vā kusalābyākatacittasamaṅgīpi hutvā āpattiṃ āpajjati . Yadi hi so saṃvegaṃ paṭilabhitvā arahattaṃ vā sacchikareyya, niddaṃ vā okkameyya, kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā manasi karonto gaccheyya, kuto tassa akusalacittasamaṅgitā, yenidaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ akusalacittaṃ lokavajjanti vuccati, tasmā paṇṇattivajjaṃ ticittanti siddhaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva.
第9章 熟食学处的注释巴利
9. Paripācitasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
194 第九条中,“已准备好”是指为了比丘们而备办的。关于“是亲属或已受邀请”:在这里,即使比丘那一方的施主不是亲属、也没有邀请过,而比丘尼那一方的施主是亲属、已经邀请过,也是可以的。巴利
194. Navame paṭiyāditanti bhikkhūnaṃ atthāya sampāditaṃ. Ñātakā vā honti pavāritā vāti ettha sacepi bhikkhuno aññātakā appavāritā ca siyuṃ, bhikkhuniyā ñātakā pavāritā ce, vaṭṭati.
197 这条规定是为了断绝恶比丘的朋党势力而制定的,所以只在五种主食上说了结罪。至于“除了五种主食以外,其他一切情况都不犯戒”,这是为了说明依这条学处不犯戒的情形。因为如果食用通过乞求得到的东西,按照其他地方所说的方式,就犯恶作罪。其余内容容易理解。比丘尼参与煮食、事先知道、不是居士自己筹办的、属于米饭等当中的一种、吞咽下去,这些就是这里的五个要素。巴利
197. Pāpabhikkhūnaṃ pakkhupacchedāya idaṃ paññattaṃ, tasmā pañcabhojaneyeva āpatti vuttā. Pañca bhojanāni ṭhapetvā sabbattha anāpattīti idaṃ pana iminā sikkhāpadena anāpattidassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Viññattiyā uppannaṃ paribhuñjantassa hi aññattha vuttanayena dukkaṭaṃ. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Bhikkhuniparipācitabhāvo, jānanaṃ, gihisamārambhābhāvo, odanādīnaṃ aññataratā, tassa ajjhoharaṇanti imāni panettha pañca aṅgāni.
10. 独坐学处的解释巴利
10. Rahonisajjasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
198 第十条中说的“以乌巴难达的第四学处”,是指与女人在无遮蔽处共坐的学处。虽然它在裸形衣品中是第五学处,但因为这是以乌巴难达长老为缘而制定的学处中排在第四的,所以说“以乌巴难达的第四学处”。由于这个学处的事缘比第四学处的事缘先发生,所以这个学处先被制定。还应当知道:这个学处只制定了与比丘尼独坐的犯戒,而后来与女人共坐的犯戒是另外单独制定的。巴利
198. Dasame upanandassa catutthasikkhāpadenāti appaṭicchanne mātugāmena saddhiṃ rahonisajjasikkhāpadaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Kiñcāpi taṃ acelakavagge pañcamasikkhāpadaṃ hoti, upanandattheraṃ ārabbha paññattesu pana catutthabhāvato ‘‘upanandassa catutthasikkhāpadenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Catutthasikkhāpadassa vatthuto imassa sikkhāpadassa vatthuno paṭhamaṃ uppannattā idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paṭhamaṃ paññattaṃ. Iminā ca sikkhāpadena kevalaṃ bhikkhuniyā eva rahonisajjāya āpatti paññattā, upari mātugāmena saddhiṃ rahonisajjāya āpatti visuṃ paññattāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
住处食学处的注释巴利
1. Āvasathapiṇḍasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
206 206. 在《食篇》第一个学处中,“能够走半由旬或一由旬”:在这里,即使能够走那么远,走了那么远之后没有获得食物,从那里取来吃也是可以的。“正是这些”就是指这些外道。“这么多”是指在此外道中,属于这么多人的。“应当一天吃”意思是一天只应当吃一次。不过,不能因为“应当一天吃”这句话,就认为在同一天里可以反复吃。从最初开始就不能再吃,这就表明:在已经吃过的地方,哪怕只是其中一个地方,也不能再吃。巴利
206. Bhojanavaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpade addhayojanaṃ vā yojanaṃ vā gantuṃ sakkotīti ettha tattakaṃ gantuṃ sakkontassapi tāvatakaṃ gantvā aladdhabhikkhassa ito bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Imesaṃyevāti imesaṃ pāsaṇḍānaṃyeva. Ettakānanti imasmiṃ pāsaṇḍe ettakānaṃ. Ekadivasaṃ bhuñjitabbanti ekadivasaṃ sakiṃyeva bhuñjitabbaṃ. ‘‘Ekadivasaṃ bhuñjitabba’’nti vacanato pana ekasmiṃ divase punappunaṃ bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭatīti na gahetabbaṃ. Puna ādito paṭṭhāya bhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭatīti iminā paṭhamaṃ bhuttaṭṭhānesu puna ekasmimpi ṭhāne bhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭatīti dasseti.
208 诸师说:“‘去时或来时’,这应该按半由旬来理解。”“在中途已走到的地方”,是就属于同一个人而言。为了详细解释简要说过的意思,而说“去了又返回”等话,说明“来时也是同样的道理”。如果在犯戒的地方又吃,就应说无犯。在去时和来时,除了最初的食物以外,显示了在中途一日所行之处和一日停留之处可以反复吃;但在去的那天和来的那天,如果想着“我要去”“我要来”而吃,是可以的。即使以清净心反复吃,反复吃也无犯。凡是别人指定施设给某位比丘的,那位比丘根本不应该拿,所以说“唯为比丘众”。其余在这里容易理解。住处所施之食、无病、居住之后而食,这里是三个要素。巴利
208.‘‘Gacchanto vā āgacchanto vāti idaṃ addhayojanavasena gahetabba’’nti vadanti. Antarāmagge gataṭṭhāneti ekasseva santakaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. ‘‘Āgacchantepi eseva nayo’’ti saṅkhepena vuttamevatthaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘gantvā paccāgacchanto’’tiādimāha. Āpattiṭṭhāneyeva puna bhuñjantassa anāpatti vattabbāti gamane āgamane ca paṭhamaṃ bhojanaṃ avatvā antarāmagge ekadivasaṃ gataṭṭhāne ca ekadivasanti punappunaṃ bhojanameva dassitaṃ, gamanadivase pana āgamanadivase ca ‘‘gamissāmi āgamissāmī’’ti bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Suddhacittena punappunaṃ bhuñjantassapi punappunaṃ bhojane anāpatti. Aññassatthāya uddisitvā paññattaṃ bhikkhuno gahetumeva na vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘bhikkhūnaṃyeva atthāyā’’ti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Āvasathapiṇḍatā, agilānatā, anuvasitvā bhojananti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
2. 众食学处注释巴利
2. Gaṇabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
209 第二项中,“向谋杀者”是指那些前往并被指派去杀害世尊的弓箭手。“隐密覆藏”是指不显露。“射”是指发射。从“难道不是也让人杀了国王吗”这句话来看,可以确定这条学处是在阿阇世王时期制定的。既然如此,在后面补充制定时——巴利
209. Dutiye abhimāreti abhigantvā bhagavato māraṇatthāya niyojite dhanuddhare. Guḷhapaṭicchannoti apākaṭo. Pavijjhīti vissajjesi. Nanu rājānampi mārāpesīti vacanato idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ ajātasattuno kāle paññattanti siddhaṃ, evañca sati parato anupaññattiyaṃ –
那时,摩揭陀国频婆娑罗王有一个血缘亲属在邪命外道中出家了。于是,那位邪命外道来到摩揭陀国频婆娑罗王那里,到了以后,对摩揭陀国频婆娑罗王这样说……中略……他们心生疑悔,不肯接受。巴利
‘‘Tena kho pana samayena rañño māgadhassa seniyassa bimbisārassa ñātisālohito ājīvakesu pabbajito hoti. Atha kho so ājīvako yena rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā rājānaṃ māgadhaṃ seniyaṃ bimbisāraṃ etadavoca…pe… kukkuccāyantā nādhivāsentī’’ti –
这段话为什么这么说呢?据说,那位邪命外道从频婆娑罗王时代起就开始做这种布施。后来到了阿阇世王时代,因为学处已经制定,比丘们心生疑虑,就不再接受这种布施了。所以应当知道,这是为了从一开始就把这件事的来龙去脉展示出来。至于“那时,那位邪命外道派使者到比丘们那里去”这一句,是说从那时起,那位邪命外道时不时地邀请比丘们并做布施;在阿阇世王时代学处制定之后,他派使者到比丘们那里去,指的就是这件事。巴利
Idaṃ kasmā vuttanti? So kira ājīvako taṃ dānaṃ dento bimbisārakālato paṭṭhāya adāsi, pacchā ajātasattukāle sikkhāpadapaññattito paṭṭhāya bhikkhū kukkuccāyantā taṃ dānaṃ na paṭiggaṇhiṃsu, tasmā ādito paṭṭhāya taṃ vatthu dassitanti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Atha kho so ājīvako bhikkhūnaṃ santike dūtaṃ pāhesī’’ti idañca tato pabhuti so ājīvako antarantarā bhikkhū nimantetvā dānaṃ dento ajātasattukāle sikkhāpade paññatte yaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ santike dūtaṃ pāhesi, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.
215 215. 因为彼此不同、各自区别,所以叫“异国”——也就是不同的王国;从那里来的,或者生在那里的,或者住在那里的人,就叫“异国者”。不过,因为他们在族姓、行为等方面有种种差别,所以经文说“种种异国者”。而在义注里,则解释为“从种种不同的其他国家而来”,这是只就王国本身来说其种类不同。巴利
215. Aññamaññavisiṭṭhattā visadisaṃ rajjaṃ virajjaṃ, tato āgatā, tattha vā jātā, bhavāti vā verajjā, te eva verajjakā. Te pana yasmā gottacaraṇādivibhāgena nānappakārā, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘nānāverajjake’’ti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana nānāvidhehi aññarajjehi āgateti rajjānaṃyeva vasena nānappakāratā vuttā.
217-218 这条学处因为把“表示”作为条件、又是在吃饭这件事上制定的,所以“众食”从表示本身、也就是从事相来说就已经很清楚了。因此这里不直接说它,而是依邀请的方式在分别文中说明众食:“所谓众食,就是……受邀请而吃。”有人可能会怀疑:“有些学处也许和事相不符,但按分别文所说的,仅凭邀请的方式就成了众食。”为了消除这种怀疑,所以说“然而,这众食由两种方式产生”。关于“取五种食物的名称”这一句,这里有人说:“即使说‘请取食物’,也仍然构成众食。”在三处结文里则说:“在下面的行路事相和登船事相中,当说‘尊者,请就在这里吃’时,比丘们因为心有疑虑而没有接受,所以即使说‘请吃’,也不构成众食。”不过,既然说的是“取五种食物的名称而邀请”,那就应当知道:只有取了食物的名称,说“请吃米饭”或“请吃饭食”时,才构成众食,不是这样就不然。至于“尊者,请就在这里吃”这一句,也应当理解为:他们是在说了“米饭”或“饭食”之后才这样邀请的。或者,因为他们是以团体方式被邀请,那些比丘因为不明实情而生疑虑,所以没有接受——这是我们的主张,应当审慎考量后采纳更妥当的说法。巴利
217-218. Imassa sikkhāpadassa viññattiṃ katvā bhuñjanavatthusmiṃ paññattattā viññattito gaṇabhojanaṃ vatthuvaseneva pākaṭanti taṃ avatvā ‘‘gaṇabhojanaṃ nāma yattha…pe… nimantitā bhuñjantī’’ti nimantanavaseneva padabhājane gaṇabhojanaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Kiñci pana sikkhāpadaṃ vatthuananurūpampi siyāti padabhājane vuttanayena nimantanavaseneva gaṇabhojanaṃ hotīti kesañci āsaṅkā bhaveyyā’’ti taṃnivattanatthaṃ ‘‘taṃ panetaṃ gaṇabhojanaṃ dvīhākārehi pasavatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ nāmaṃ gahetvāti ettha ‘‘bhojanaṃ gaṇhathāti vuttepi gaṇabhojanaṃ hotiyevā’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Heṭṭhā addhānagamanavatthusmiṃ nāvābhiruhanavatthusmiñca ‘idheva, bhante, bhuñjathā’ti vutte yasmā kukkuccāyantā na paṭiggaṇhiṃsu, tasmā ‘bhuñjathā’ti vuttepi gaṇabhojanaṃ na hotiyevā’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. ‘‘Pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ nāmaṃ gahetvā nimantetī’’ti vuttattā pana ‘‘odanaṃ bhuñjathā’’ti vā ‘‘bhattaṃ bhuñjathā’’ti vā bhojananāmaṃ gahetvāva vutte gaṇabhojanaṃ hoti, na aññathā. ‘‘Idheva, bhante, bhuñjathā’’ti etthāpi ‘‘odana’’nti vā ‘‘bhatta’’nti vā vatvāva te evaṃ nimantesunti gahetabbaṃ. Gaṇavasena vā nimantitattā te bhikkhū apakataññutāya kukkuccāyantā na paṭiggaṇhiṃsūti ayaṃ amhākaṃ khanti, vīmaṃsitvā yuttataraṃ gahetabbaṃ.
“一起拿”在这里的意思是:彼此之间不放开十二肘的距离而站着,这就叫作“一起拿”。从“他们可能会说:‘请给我们四个人饭食’”这句话,以及前面“你给一位比丘饭食,你给两位”这样暗示之后,应当理解:即使是通过别人为自己暗示,只要接受,就仍然构成众食。关于“这样由暗示而产生”,应当知道:有暗示时,如果拿的人合在一起拿,就依这条学处犯戒;如果分开拿,则依对精美食物和米饭的暗示而犯戒。巴利
Ekato gaṇhantīti ettha aññamaññassa dvādasahatthaṃ amuñcitvā ṭhitā ekato gaṇhanti nāmāti gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Amhākaṃ catunnampi bhattaṃ dehīti vā viññāpeyyu’’nti vacanato heṭṭhā ‘‘tvaṃ ekassa bhikkhuno bhattaṃ dehi, tvaṃ dvinnanti evaṃ viññāpetvā’’ti vacanato ca attano atthāya aññehi viññattampi sādiyantassa gaṇabhojanaṃ hotiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evaṃ viññattito pasavatīti ettha viññattiyā sati gaṇhantassa ekato hutvā gahaṇe iminā sikkhāpadena āpatti, visuṃ gahaṇe paṇītabhojanasūpodanaviññattīhi āpatti veditabbā.
“整理”是指按五部分等方式来整理。“碰触”是指剪断缘边之后,用手或小木杖去碰触。“作线”是指搓线。“缠绕”是指缠在小木杖或手上。有人说:“在这里,制作全新的衣叫做‘衣作’,在旧衣上缝针就不叫‘衣作’。”有人针对这一点说:“根据‘第四个人来了就不能度过’这句话,如果没有其他任何人来,只有四个人坐在那里也无法度过,那也是不允许的。”巴利
Vicāretīti pañcakhaṇḍādivasena saṃvidahati. Ghaṭṭetīti anuvātaṃ chinditvā hatthena daṇḍakena vā ghaṭṭeti. Suttaṃ karotīti suttaṃ vaṭṭeti. Valetīti daṇḍake vā hatthe vā āvaṭṭeti. ‘‘Abhinavasseva cīvarassa karaṇaṃ idha cīvarakammaṃ nāma, purāṇacīvare sūcikammaṃ nāma na hotī’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Catutthe āgate na yāpentīti vacanato sace añño koci āgacchanto natthi, cattāroyeva ca tattha nisinnā yāpetuṃ na sakkonti, na vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti.
220 因为这是导致众食犯戒的邀请,所以叫“不净邀请”。“使进入”就是让他坐下。“众坏”的意思是僧团不犯戒。和“凡有四位比丘……而食”这段巴利文对照来看,所以说“其余的人则凑满众数”。“无差别”就是不区分“病人”或“作衣者”,用统称来说。因此,就是因为没有加以区分。“食后离去者”,这里即使还没离去,只要吃饭的事已经结束,就可以取用。而那些食物没有被他们一起取用,是说那些不会引起疑虑的食物,那些比丘没有一起取用,而是由一个人后来取用。“大长老”是就比丘们说的。因为担心使者又迎面走回来说“请取饭食”,所以说“就站在村门口”。各处前往,就是前往站在各条巷子等处的人那里。即使是为比丘们放在屋门前布施,也是同样的道理。关于“请返回”这句话,因为先说了“请返回”就中断了,后来才说“请取饭食”,所以返回是允许的。其余在这里容易明白。在这里,众食性、无因缘、吞咽,这三个是构成要素。巴利
220. Gaṇabhojanāpattijanakanimantanabhāvato ‘‘akappiyanimantana’’nti vuttaṃ. Sampavesetvāti nisīdāpetvā. Gaṇo bhijjatīti gaṇo āpattiṃ na āpajjatīti adhippāyo. ‘‘Yattha cattāro bhikkhū…pe… bhuñjantī’’ti imāya pāḷiyā saṃsandanato ‘‘itaresaṃ pana gaṇapūrako hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Avisesenāti ‘‘gilāno vā cīvarakārako vā’’ti avisesetvā sabbasādhāraṇavacanena. Tasmāti avisesitattā. Bhutvā gatesūti ettha agatesupi bhojanakicce niṭṭhite gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭati . Tāni ca tehi ekato na gahitānīti yehi bhojanehi visaṅketo natthi, tāni bhojanāni tehi bhikkhūhi ekato na gahitāni ekena pacchā gahitattā. Mahāthereti bhikkhū sandhāya vuttaṃ. Dūtassa puna paṭipathaṃ āgantvā ‘‘bhattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vacanabhayena ‘‘gāmadvāre aṭṭhatvāvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha tattha gantvāti antaravīthiādīsu tattha tattha ṭhitānaṃ santikaṃ gantvā. Bhikkhūnaṃ atthāya gharadvāre ṭhapetvā diyyamānepi eseva nayo. Nivattathāti vuttapade nivattituṃ vaṭṭatīti ‘‘nivattathā’’ti vicchinditvā pacchā ‘‘bhattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vuttattā vaṭṭati. Sesamettha uttānameva. Gaṇabhojanatā, samayābhāvo, ajjhoharaṇanti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
3. 辗转食学处的注释巴利
3. Paramparabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
221 在第三项学处里,因为按照家族次第不间断地施食,所以巴利文中说“饭食次第未中断”,意思就是中间不停顿、连续不断地进行。“依惯用语”就是依照通常的说法。因为他并不是只给像枣子那么一点点,而是依照惯用语这样称呼。用枣粉、砂糖等调制的东西,就称为“枣子酱”。巴利
221. Tatiye kulapaṭipāṭiyā abbocchinnaṃ katvā nirantaraṃ diyyamānattā ‘‘bhattapaṭipāṭi aṭṭhitā hotī’’ti pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ, antarā aṭṭhatvā nirantaraṃ pavattāti vuttaṃ hoti. Upacāravasenāti vohāravasena. Na hi so badaramattameva deti, upacāravasena pana evaṃ vadati. Badaracuṇṇasakkharādīhi payojitaṃ ‘‘badarasāḷava’’nti vuccati.
226 226. 仅仅因为采用净施的方式,那顿饭食就被称为“不存在”。所以,除了随增制所设立的净施之外,只保留了按照最初制定而立的学处。然而在《附随》中,允许净施也被看作等同于随增制,因此说“四种随增制”。后来讲述《大灯》等注疏中所说的方法时,由于与巴利圣典对照,他确立的只是“背地净施”。不过有些人说:“那时长老在自己身边除了世尊之外没有其他人,他没有作当面净施;而世尊也没有单独开许当面净施,即便如此,当面净施也是可以的。”正因如此,在《本母注》中也说:“如果有比丘,在五位同梵行者中的某一位面前,或者当面说‘我把我的餐食施给你’或‘我净施’,或者背地说‘我施给某某’或‘我净施’,这样没有对最初的邀请作净施,后来在受邀的家中得到食物,哪怕只吞下一粒米,也犯波逸提。”巴利
226. Vikappanāvaseneva taṃ bhattaṃ asantaṃ nāma hotīti anupaññattivasena vikappanaṃ aṭṭhapetvā yathāpaññattaṃ sikkhāpadameva ṭhapitaṃ. Parivāre pana vikappanāya anujānanampi anupaññattisamānanti katvā ‘‘catasso anupaññattiyo’’ti vuttaṃ. Mahāpaccariādīsu vuttanayaṃ pacchā vadanto pāḷiyā saṃsandanato parammukhāvikappanameva patiṭṭhāpesi. Keci pana ‘‘tadā attano santike ṭhapetvā bhagavantaṃ aññassa abhāvato thero sammukhāvikappanaṃ nākāsi, bhagavatā ca visuṃ sammukhāvikappanā na vuttā, tathāpi sammukhāvikappanāpi vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. Teneva mātikāaṭṭhakathāyampi (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paramparabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) ‘‘yo bhikkhu pañcasu sahadhammikesu aññatarassa ‘mayhaṃ bhattapaccāsaṃ tuyhaṃ dammī’ti vā ‘vikappemī’ti vā evaṃ sammukhā vā ‘itthannāmassa dammī’ti vā ‘vikappemī’ti vā evaṃ parammukhā vā paṭhamanimantanaṃ avikappetvā pacchā nimantitakule laddhabhikkhato ekasitthampi ajjhoharati, pācittiya’’nti vuttaṃ.
229 229. 对于受五种主食邀请的人,如果没有先对最初受邀的那一餐作净施,就依次食用其他各餐——这叫做“辗转食”。所以经文说:“如果最初的邀请在下面,后面的邀请依次在上面,从上面开始吃的人,犯戒。”把手伸进容器里,抓取最底下的食物时,中间的食物也成了手中之物,因此经文说:“然而,把手……中略……无论以什么方式吃,都无犯。”因为牛奶和汤汁没有和饭混在一起,浮在上面,所以说:“只喝牛奶或汤汁的人,无犯。”巴利
229. Pañcahi bhojanehi nimantitassa yena yena paṭhamaṃ nimantito, tassa tassa bhojanato uppaṭipāṭiyā avikappetvā vā parassa parassa bhojanaṃ paramparabhojananti āha ‘‘sace pana mūlanimantanaṃ heṭṭhā hoti, pacchimaṃ pacchimaṃ upari, taṃ uparito paṭṭhāya bhuñjantassa āpattī’’ti. Hatthaṃ anto pavesetvā sabbaheṭṭhimaṃ gaṇhantassa majjhe ṭhitampi antohatthagataṃ hotīti āha ‘‘hatthaṃ pana…pe… yathā tathā vā bhuñjantassa anāpattī’’ti. Khīrassa rasassa ca bhattena amissaṃ hutvā upari ṭhitattā ‘‘khīraṃ vā rasaṃ vā pivato anāpattī’’ti vuttaṃ.
“大近事男”是指家主。《大义注》里说“犯戒”,而《库伦达》里说“可以”,这两种说法看起来好像矛盾,但两者的意旨已经在《大灯》里阐明清楚了——这是《大结节》里说的。“众人都邀请”是指用不如法的邀请来请人。因为经中说:“所谓辗转食,就是受了五种食物中某一种的邀请之后,把那个邀请搁在一边,去吃另外五种食物中的某一种,这就叫辗转食。”所以,即使最初是靠乞食得到食物,只要吃了乞食所得的那一餐,也说是“犯戒”。因为没有作净施,所以说成是“语业”。这里剩下的内容很容易明白。在这里,辗转食性、没有开许的时节、吞咽——这三项是构成要素。巴利
Mahāupāsakoti gehasāmiko. ‘‘Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘āpattī’ti vacanena kurundiyaṃ ‘vaṭṭatī’ti vacanaṃ viruddhaṃ viya dissati, dvinnampi adhippāyo mahāpaccariyaṃ vibhāvito’’ti mahāgaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Sabbe nimantentīti akappiyanimantanena nimantenti. ‘‘Paramparabhojanaṃ nāma pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññatarena bhojanena nimantito, taṃ ṭhapetvā aññaṃ pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññataraṃ bhojanaṃ bhuñjati, etaṃ paramparabhojanaṃ nāmā’’ti vuttattā satipi bhikkhācariyāya paṭhamaṃ laddhabhāve ‘‘piṇḍāya caritvā laddhabhattaṃ bhuñjati, āpattī’’ti vuttaṃ. Avikappavasena ‘‘vacīkamma’’nti vuttaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Paramparabhojanatā, samayābhāvo, ajjhoharaṇanti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
独眼母学处注释巴利
4. Kāṇamātāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
230-231 230-231. 第四项中,“迦那之母”是指那个名叫迦那的女孩的母亲。那她为什么一出生就叫迦那呢?于是说“据说她……”等等。在她小时候,父母因为疼爱,就“迦那丫头,迦那丫头”这样叫她,她因此就得名迦那,而她的母亲也就被人称为“迦那母”——他们是这样说明其中缘由的。“西方”就是后方,也就是所谓太阳落下的方向。巴利
230-231. Catutthe kāṇāya mātāti kāṇāti laddhanāmāya dārikāya mātā. Kasmā panesā kāṇā nāma jātāti āha ‘‘sā kirassā’’tiādi. Imissā daharakāle mātāpitaro sinehavasena ‘‘amma kāṇe, amma kāṇe’’ti vohariṃsu, sā tadupādāya kāṇā nāma jātā, tassā ca mātā ‘‘kāṇamātā’’ti pākaṭā ahosīti evamettha kāraṇaṃ vadanti. Paṭiyālokanti pacchimaṃ disaṃ, paccādiccanti vuttaṃ hoti.
233 按糕饼数量计算,犯波逸提:就是从钵口下缘线算起,对放在这条线以上的糕饼来计数,犯波逸提。因为经上说“应当接受两钵或三钵的量”,所以只要没有超过钵口下缘线,接受两钵或三钵的量是可以的。巴利
233.Pūvagaṇanāya pācittiyanti mukhavaṭṭiyā heṭṭhimalekhato upariṭṭhitapūvagaṇanāya pācittiyaṃ. ‘‘Dvattipattapūrā paṭiggahetabbā’’ti hi vacanato mukhavaṭṭiyā heṭṭhimalekhaṃ anatikkante dve vā tayo vā pattapūre gahetuṃ vaṭṭati.
235 注疏里说“……”,这只是为了说明注疏中有这样的记载,并不是为了成立那种主张。因为注疏所说的和巴利圣典并不一致。为了说明在额外接受的情况下可以无犯,才说“亲属的、已受请的”。否则,既然“接受装满两三钵的”这一句本身就已经成立按量接受无犯,那就不需要另外再说“亲属的、已受请的”。如果是这样,为什么不说“这和巴利圣典不一致”呢?因为按照前面在额外学处中已经说过的方式就可以理解,所以没有再说。那里确实说过:“然而,注疏中说,在亲属和已受请的情况下,平时即使很多也可以,只有在因缘断绝时才仅限定量,这和巴利圣典不一致。”即使是以“为非路粮等目的而准备的”这种认知来接受,也同样犯戒,因为这个学处是无心的。通过说“交到这个人手里”等话语来为自己接受也会犯戒,所以说这是“语业”。其余内容容易理解。具有上述特征的糕饼、非残余、未作舍还而离去、非亲属等、额外接受,这些就是此处的五个构成要素。巴利
235.Aṭṭhakathāsu pana…pe… vuttanti idaṃ aṭṭhakathāsu tathā āgatabhāvamattadīpanatthaṃ vuttaṃ, na pana tassa vādassa patiṭṭhāpanatthaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāsu vuttañhi pāḷiyā na sameti. Tatuttarigahaṇe anāpattidassanatthañhi ‘‘ñātakānaṃ pavāritāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Aññathā ‘‘anāpatti dvattipattapūre paṭiggaṇhātī’’ti imināva pamāṇayuttaggahaṇe anāpattisiddhito ‘‘ñātakānaṃ pavāritāna’’nti visuṃ na vattabbaṃ. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘taṃ pāḷiyā na sametī’’ti kasmā na vuttanti? Heṭṭhā tatuttarisikkhāpade vuttanayeneva sakkā viññātunti na vuttaṃ. Vuttañhi tattha (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.526) ‘‘aṭṭhakathāsu pana ñātakapavāritaṭṭhāne pakatiyāva bahumpi vaṭṭati, acchinnakāraṇā pamāṇameva vaṭṭatīti vuttaṃ, taṃ pāḷiyā na sametī’’ti. ‘‘Apātheyyādiatthāya paṭiyādita’’nti saññāya gaṇhantassapi āpattiyeva acittakattā sikkhāpadassa. Attanoyeva gahaṇatthaṃ ‘‘imassa hatthe dehī’’ti vacanenapi āpajjanato ‘‘vacīkamma’’nti vuttaṃ. Sesaṃ uttānameva . Vuttalakkhaṇapūvamanthatā, asesakatā, apaṭippassaddhagamanatā, na ñātakāditā, atirekapaṭiggahaṇanti imāni panettha pañca aṅgāni.
第五,第一受请满足学处的注释巴利
5. Paṭhamapavāraṇāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
236 236. 第五项中,“已食者”就是指已经吃过饭的人、已经用过餐的人,也就是说已经完成了吃饭这件事。“已受请拒”在这里是说:在四种自恣中,有“随意饱足的自恣”和“拒绝的自恣”,所以这样说:“婆罗门……以拒绝的自恣而受请拒。”自恣一共有四种:雨安居结束后的自恣、资具的自恣、拒绝的自恣、随意饱足的自恣。其中,“诸比丘,我允许雨安居结束的比丘以三种方式行自恣”,这是雨安居结束后的自恣。通过所见等方式来阻止,让人分享僧团等物,在食物方面这样做,因此称为自恣,也就是为了清净罪过而给出自己表白的机会。不过,因为这种自恣大多数是由雨安居结束的人来做的,所以称为“雨安居结束后的自恣”。“尊者,我愿意以四个月的药物向僧团行自恣”,以及“除非另有自恣,除非常住自恣”,这是资具的自恣,也就是通过它让人对资具生起欲求,是拿衣等物来邀请的另一种说法。“所谓已受请拒,就是座位已经摆好、食物已经摆好、站在手臂范围内递上、拒绝已经表现出来,这就叫已受请拒”,这是拒绝的自恣。这里说的正是具备进食中途等五种情况的拒绝食物,也就是与方式相应的阻止,因此叫自恣。“用殊胜的嚼食和噉食亲手令他满足、令他饱足”,这是随意饱足的自恣。对食物随意饱足,就是随意饱足的自恣。巴利
236. Pañcame bhuttāvīti bhuttāvino bhuttavanto, katabhattakiccāti vuttaṃ hoti. Pavāritāti ettha catūsu pavāraṇāsu yāvadatthapavāraṇā paṭikkhepapavāraṇā ca labbhatīti āha ‘‘brāhmaṇena…pe… paṭikkhepapavāraṇāya pavāritā’’ti. Catubbidhā hi pavāraṇā vassaṃvutthapavāraṇā, paccayapavāraṇā , paṭikkhepapavāraṇā, yāvadatthapavāraṇāti. Tattha ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, vassaṃvutthānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ tīhi ṭhānehi pavāretu’’nti (mahāva. 209) ayaṃ vassaṃvutthapavāraṇā. Pakārehi diṭṭhādīhi vāreti saṅghādike bhajāpeti bhatte karoti etāyāti pavāraṇā, āpattivisodhanāya attavossaggokāsadānaṃ. Sā pana yasmā yebhuyyena vassaṃvutthehi kātabbā vuttā, tasmā ‘‘vassaṃvutthapavāraṇā’’ti vuccati. ‘‘Icchāmahaṃ, bhante, saṅghaṃ cātumāsaṃ bhesajjena pavāretu’’nti (pāci. 303) ca, ‘‘aññatra puna pavāraṇāya aññatra niccapavāraṇāyā’’ti (pāci. 306) ca ayaṃ paccayapavāraṇā pavāreti paccaye icchāpeti etāyāti katvā, cīvarādīhi upanimantanāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. ‘‘Pavārito nāma asanaṃ paññāyati, bhojanaṃ paññāyati, hatthapāse ṭhito abhiharati, paṭikkhepo paññāyati, eso pavārito nāmā’’ti (pāci. 239) ayaṃ paṭikkhepapavāraṇā. Vippakatabhojanatādipañcaṅgasahito bhojanapaṭikkhepoyeva hettha pakārayuttā vāraṇāti pavāraṇā. ‘‘Paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappesi sampavāresī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.363) ayaṃ yāvadatthapavāraṇā. Yāvadatthaṃ bhojanassa pavāraṇā yāvadatthapavāraṇā.
237 没有说“ti-kāra”而……是可以说的,这句话是为了显示应当说的方式。“然而,即使说了‘ti-kāra’,也不成为未作”——这在三部《甘提帕达》中都有说到。巴利
237.Ti-kāraṃ avatvā…pe… vattuṃ vaṭṭatīti idaṃ vattabbākāradassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ti-kāre pana vuttepi akataṃ nāma na hotī’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ.
238-239 238-239.“已请拒”就是被拒绝。因为一个人正在吃饭时,如果不想接受侍者递来的食物而加以拒绝,他就因此被称为“已请拒”,也就是被拒绝。不过,为了不纠缠字面,只显示其含义,所以说“已作请拒、已作拒绝”。由于“asana”(食)这个词本身已经表达了“已食者”的意思,它就没有任何单独存在的必要。如果它还有单独存在的必要,那么请拒就会具足六支——想到这一点,为了显示只具足五支,就引用了“此亦曾说”等巴利文。然而,也有人把“站在手臂距离内递上”单独算作一支,而说“具足四支的请拒”。巴利
238-239.Pavāritoti paṭikkhepito. Yo hi bhuñjanto parivesakena upanītaṃ bhojanaṃ anicchanto paṭikkhipati, so tena pavārito paṭikkhepito nāma hoti. Byañjanaṃ pana anādiyitvā atthamattameva dassetuṃ ‘‘katapavāraṇo katapaṭikkhepo’’ti vuttaṃ. Yasmā ‘‘asana’’nti imināva padena ‘‘bhuttāvī’’ti imassa attho vutto, tasmā na tassa kiñci payojanaṃ visuṃ upalabbhati. Yadi hi upalabbheyya, pavāraṇā chaḷaṅgasamannāgatā āpajjeyyāti manasi katvā pañcasamannāgatattaṃyeva dassetuṃ ‘‘vuttampi ceta’’ntiādinā pāḷiṃ āharati. Keci pana ‘‘hatthapāse ṭhito abhiharatī’’ti ekameva aṅgaṃ katvā ‘‘caturaṅgasamannāgatā pavāraṇā’’tipi vadanti.
酸乳粥等:用“等”这个字,把牛乳粥等也包括进来。其中,举出酸乳粥,是指与酪等酸味混合的浓粥;举出牛乳粥,则包括与牛乳混合的粥。不产生自恣,就是说不构成以非残食罪为根据的拒绝。即使作了拒绝,也不成为以非残食罪为根据的拒绝,只是停留在未作的状态,所以说“不产生自恣”。三部《甘提帕达》都说:“因为‘粥’这个词也通于能产生自恣的粥,所以即使说‘请取粥’,也会产生自恣,也就是确实产生自恣。”这与后面“取来与饭混合的粥”那里所说的理由不相符。因为那里说:“在下无粥的邀请中,是针对与清水、酸粥、牛乳等混合揉捏的饭而说‘请取粥’,所以产生自恣;但在‘取来与饭混合的粥’这里,因为粥是单独存在的,所以不产生自恣。”因此,应当依照那里所说的道理来说明这里的理由:是针对与牛乳等混合揉捏的饭而说“请取粥”,而且那里并没有粥,所以产生自恣。这样才与后面注释中“因被问者存在”所说的理由相符合;否则,仅在《甘提帕达》中就会出现前后矛盾,也与注释的说法不符。如果……可见:这是用来说明所述量的鱼肉块或筋腱仅仅是有无而已。以那些,就是指以嫩谷粒。巴利
Ambilapāyāsādīsūti ādi-saddena khīrapāyāsādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Tattha ambilapāyāsaggahaṇena takkādiambilasaṃyuttā ghanayāgu vuttā. Khīrapāyāsaggahaṇena khīrasaṃyuttā yāgu saṅgayhati. Pavāraṇaṃ na janetīti anatirittabhojanāpattinibandhanaṃ paṭikkhepaṃ na sādheti. Katopi paṭikkhepo anatirittabhojanāpattinibandhano na hotīti akataṭṭhāneyeva tiṭṭhatīti āha ‘‘pavāraṇaṃ na janetī’’ti. ‘‘Yāgu-saddassa pavāraṇajanakayāguyāpi sādhāraṇattā ‘yāguṃ gaṇhathā’ti vuttepi pavāraṇā hotīti pavāraṇaṃ janetiyevāti vutta’’nti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ, taṃ parato tattheva ‘‘bhattamissakaṃ yāguṃ āharitvā’’ti ettha vuttakāraṇena na sameti. Vuttañhi tattha ‘‘heṭṭhā ayāguke nimantane udakakañjikakhīrādīhi saddhiṃ madditaṃ bhattameva sandhāya ‘yāguṃ gaṇhathā’ti vuttattā pavāraṇā hoti, ‘bhattamissakaṃ yāguṃ āharitvā’ti ettha pana visuṃ yāguyā vijjamānattā pavāraṇā na hotī’’ti. Tasmā tattha vuttanayeneva khīrādīhi saṃmadditaṃ bhattameva sandhāya ‘‘yāguṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vuttattā yāguyā ca tattha abhāvato pavāraṇā hotīti evamettha kāraṇaṃ vattabbaṃ. Evañhi sati parato ‘‘yenāpucchito, tassa atthitāyā’’ti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttakāraṇenapi saṃsandati, aññathā gaṇṭhipadesuyeva pubbāparavirodho āpajjati. Aṭṭhakathāvacanena ca na sameti. Sace…pe… paññāyatīti iminā vuttappamāṇassa macchamaṃsakhaṇḍassa nahāruno vā sabbhāvamattaṃ dasseti. Tāhīti puthukāhi.
用稻米、麦子等做成的炒粉,这是按多数情况来说的;不过,把七种谷物炒熟后做成的,也还是炒粉。所以经文才说“稗子、野谷……都归入炒粉一类”。炒粉团,就是把炒粉捏成团做成的、还没煮过的炒粉球。因为以五种正食中的任何一种,中断了还没吃完的进食状态,所以说“即使口中还有芥子那么一点……也不构成请拒”。按照“拒绝不该吃的肉,不构成请拒”这句话,如果知道或不知道僧团得到的东西不会落到自己手里而拒绝,就不构成请拒;因为所拒绝的正是应拒绝之物。拒绝无惭者之物也不构成请拒。所谓非事,是因为不是能成就非残食罪的请拒之事。以此显示所拒绝的正是应拒绝之物。凡是应拒绝之物,拒绝它并不构成罪的因素,这就被称为“请拒的非事”。巴利
Sālivīhiyavehi katasattūti yebhuyyanayena vuttaṃ, satta dhaññāni pana bhajjitvā katopi sattuyeva. Tenevāha ‘‘kaṅguvaraka…pe… sattusaṅgahameva gacchatī’’ti. Sattumodakoti sattuyo piṇḍetvā kato apakko sattuguḷo. Pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññataravasena vippakatabhojanabhāvassa upacchinnattā ‘‘mukhe sāsapamattampi…pe… na pavāretī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Akappiyamaṃsaṃ paṭikkhipati, na pavāretī’’ti vacanato sace saṅghikaṃ lābhaṃ attano apāpuṇantaṃ jānitvā vā ajānitvā vā paṭikkhipati, na pavāreti paṭikkhipitabbasseva paṭikkhittattā. Alajjisantakaṃ paṭikkhipantopi na pavāreti. Avatthutāyāti anatirittāpattisādhikāya pavāraṇāya avatthubhāvato. Etena paṭikkhipitabbasseva paṭikkhittabhāvaṃ dīpeti . Yañhi paṭikkhipitabbaṃ hoti, tassa paṭikkhepo āpattiaṅgaṃ na hotīti taṃ ‘‘pavāraṇāya avatthū’’ti vuccati.
“递近”这个词,是用来说明身体上的递送动作。对于站在手臂可及范围之外的人,即使有想布施的递送动作,如果对方拒绝,那么因为距离远,就不构成自恣邀请。为了说明长老仅仅因为距离远就不构成邀请,所以说“因为长老距离远”,而不是因为长老有递送动作本身。即使拿了食物走过去,站在手臂可及范围内,但如果什么也没说,只是站在放置物品的地方,那就不叫递送,所以说“因为使者没有递送”。三处结语都说:“拿了走过去之后,如果说了‘请取食物’,那就叫递送;因此‘如果拿了来的比丘……则构成自恣邀请’。”不过有些人说:“把钵稍微递过去后说‘请取这食物’,这应当理解为递送。”这看起来似乎合理,因为这里并不侧重以言语来递送。巴利
Upanāmetīti iminā kāyābhihāraṃ dasseti. Hatthapāsato bahi ṭhitassa satipi dātukāmābhihāre paṭikkhipantassa dūrabhāveneva pavāraṇāya abhāvato therassapi dūrabhāvamattaṃ gahetvā pavāraṇāya abhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘therassa dūrabhāvato’’ti āha, na pana therassa abhihārasabbhāvato. Sacepi gahetvā gato hatthapāse ṭhito hoti, kiñci pana avatvā ādhārakaṭṭhāne ṭhitattā abhihāro nāma na hotīti ‘‘dūtassa ca anabhiharaṇato’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Gahetvā gatena ‘bhattaṃ gaṇhathā’ti vutte abhihāro nāma hotīti ‘sace pana gahetvā āgato bhikkhu…pe… pavāraṇā hotī’ti vutta’’nti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘pattaṃ kiñci upanāmetvā ‘imaṃ bhattaṃ gaṇhathā’ti vuttanti gahetabba’’nti vadanti, taṃ yuttaṃ viya dissati vācābhihārassa idha anadhippetattā.
“Parivesanā”是指在施食处。“已被递近”是指已被施食者递近。在这里,若有人因想布施而递近,接受者拒绝,就构成自恣;此处即使拒绝的是没有接受的人,也仍然构成自恣。为什么?因为是由于想布施而递近的。所以说“因此那是已被递近”。正因如此,三处结文都说:“当有想布施的递近时,仅仅‘我要给’这样的接受并不叫递近;无论是对‘我要给’而接受的人,还是没有接受的人,想布施的递近本身就叫做递近,因此在接受时或没有接受时,拒绝它都构成自恣。”现在为了说明:如果没有那种想布施的递近,即使在接受时拒绝,也不构成自恣,所以说“然而如果……”等。巴利
Parivesanāyāti bhattagge. Abhihaṭāva hotīti parivesakeneva abhihaṭā hoti. Tato dātukāmatāya gaṇhantaṃ paṭikkhipantassa pavāraṇā hotīti ettha agaṇhantampi paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā hotiyeva. Kasmā? Dātukāmatāya abhihaṭattā. ‘‘Tasmā sā abhihaṭāva hotī’’ti hi vuttaṃ. Teneva tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu ‘‘dātukāmābhihāre sati kevalaṃ ‘dassāmī’ti gahaṇameva abhihāro nāma na hoti, ‘dassāmī’ti gaṇhantepi agaṇhantepi dātukāmābhihārova abhihāro nāma hoti, tasmā gahaṇasamaye vā aggahaṇasamaye vā taṃ paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Idāni asati tassa dātukāmābhihāre gahaṇasamayepi paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā na hotīti dassetuṃ ‘‘sace panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“请取味道”这句话,因为是用不构成邀请的名称来说的,所以说“听了这话而拒绝,就不构成邀请”。不过,在“鱼味、肉味”这里,并不是只把鱼的味道理解为鱼味,而是鱼和鱼味两者都依“鱼味”这个能构成邀请的共通名称被认知,所以拒绝它就成了邀请。后面“鱼汤”那里,道理也一样。在“即使说了‘请取这个’”这里,应当知道:即使没有这样说,只要拒绝任何已被递上、足以构成邀请的东西,就照样成为邀请。“karambaka”是混合物的称呼。凡是把各种东西混在一起做成的,就叫做“karambaka”。即使它是混了肉做成的,因为是用“请取karambaka”这个不构成邀请的名称说的,拒绝它就不成为邀请。但如果说“请取肉karambaka”,那就是说请取混了肉的东西,所以就成了邀请。巴利
‘‘Rasaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti apavāraṇajanakassa nāmaṃ gahetvā vuttattā ‘‘taṃ sutvā paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā natthī’’ti vuttaṃ. Maccharasaṃ maṃsarasanti ettha pana na kevalaṃ macchassa rasaṃ maccharasamicceva viññāyati, atha kho maccho ca maccharasañca maccharasanti evaṃ pavāraṇajanakasādhāraṇanāmavasenapi viññāyamānattā taṃ paṭikkhipato pavāraṇāva hoti. Parato macchasūpanti etthāpi eseva nayo. ‘‘Idaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vuttepīti ettha evaṃ avatvāpi pavāraṇapahonakaṃ yaṃkiñci abhihaṭaṃ paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā hotiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Karambakoti missakādhivacanametaṃ. Yañhi aññenaññena missetvā karonti, so ‘‘karambako’’ti vuccati. So sacepi maṃsena missetvā katova hoti, ‘‘karambakaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti apavāraṇārahassa nāmena vuttattā paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā na hoti. ‘‘Maṃsakarambakaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vutte pana maṃsamissakaṃ gaṇhathāti vuttaṃ hoti, tasmā pavāraṇāva hoti.
有人说,这里“认为是‘别请所作’”这句话的意思是:因为物品本身是如法的,即使以不如法的想法加以拒绝,这个学处仍然是无心的,所以构成邀请。另有人说:在下文不构成供奉的邀请中,是针对与酸粥、乳等混合在一起的饭食才说“请取粥”,因此构成邀请;但在“带来与饭混合的粥”这里,因为另有单独的粥存在,所以不构成邀请。这里所说的“此中意趣”,正是针对上面所说的含义而说。然而“此处理由难见”——对此,有些人说:所谓“与粥混合”并不只是饭,也可以是乳等,所以不应该像杂合物那样构成邀请。若如此,当粥较多或与饭相等时,不构成邀请;只有粥少饭多时才构成邀请——这里面的理由难以明了。另一些人则说:所谓“与粥混合”就是指饭,所以拒绝它必定构成邀请。若如此,那么此处构成邀请或不构成邀请的差别,理由也难以明了。巴利
‘‘Uddissakata’’nti maññamānoti ettha ‘‘vatthuno kappiyattā akappiyasaññāya paṭikkhipatopi acittakattā imassa sikkhāpadassa pavāraṇā hotī’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Heṭṭhā ayāguke nimantane udakakañjikakhīrādīhi saddhiṃ madditaṃ bhattameva sandhāya ‘yāguṃ gaṇhathā’ti vuttattā pavāraṇā hoti, ‘bhattamissakaṃ yāguṃ āharitvā’ti ettha pana visuṃ yāguyā vijjamānattā pavāraṇā na hotī’’ti vadanti. Ayamettha adhippāyoti ‘‘yenāpucchito’’tiādinā vuttamevatthaṃ sandhāya vadati. Kāraṇaṃ panettha duddasanti ettha eke tāva vadanti ‘‘yasmā yāgumissakaṃ nāma bhattameva na hoti, khīrādikampi hotiyeva, tasmā karambake viya pavāraṇāya na bhavitabbaṃ. Evañca sati yāgu bahutarā vā hoti samasamā vā, na pavāreti. ‘Yāgu mandā, bhattaṃ bahutaraṃ, pavāretī’ti ettha kāraṇaṃ duddasa’’nti. Keci pana vadanti ‘‘yāgumissakaṃ nāma bhattaṃ, tasmā taṃ paṭikkhipato pavāraṇāya eva bhavitabbaṃ. Evañca sati ‘idha pavāraṇā hoti na hotī’ti ettha kāraṇaṃ duddasa’’nti.
这里理由难以看清,后文“请取混合”处也应知道理由同样难以看清。因为能构成邀请之人的多与少,并不是邀请成不成立的判断依据;真正在此处起判定作用的,是能引发邀请的名称取用。所以,像“此不应与杂合饭等同”等所说的理由,与前面所说的对照起来并不一致。如果“混合”一词确实只固定用于饭的混合物,那么照这样说,当说“请取饭混合”时,不论饭多、相等还是少,都构成邀请;同样,说“请取混合”时,即使饭少,也应构成邀请,因为“混合”只固定用于饭的混合物。三部复注也都这样说:“因为‘混合’只固定用于饭的混合物,所以说‘此即饭混合’。”如果“混合”并非固定用于饭的混合物,而是针对混合饭而说“请取混合”,那么也像在不构成供奉的邀请中,针对与乳等混合的饭而说“请取粥”时构成邀请一样,这里针对混合饭而说“请取混合”时,不论饭少还是多,都应构成邀请。因此,无论“混合”是固定用于饭的混合物,还是针对混合饭而说,这两种情况下前后说法都不一致。既然如此,何必在这里推究理由?在这类地方,只应依据注释书的判定——这是我们的主张。巴利
Yathā cettha kāraṇaṃ duddasaṃ, evaṃ parato ‘‘missakaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti etthāpi kāraṇaṃ duddasamevāti veditabbaṃ. Na hi pavāraṇappahonakassa appabahubhāvo pavāraṇāya bhāvābhāvanimittaṃ, kiñcarahi pavāraṇajanakassa nāmaggahaṇamevettha pamāṇaṃ, tasmā ‘‘idañca karambakena na samānetabba’’ntiādinā yampi kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ, tampi pubbe vuttena saṃsandiyamānaṃ na sameti. Yadi hi ‘‘missaka’’nti bhattamissakeyeva ruḷhaṃ siyā, evaṃ sati yathā ‘‘bhattamissakaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vutte bhattaṃ bahutaraṃ vā samaṃ vā appataraṃ vā hoti, pavāretiyeva, evaṃ ‘‘missakaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vuttepi appatarepi bhatte pavāraṇāya bhavitabbaṃ missakanti bhattamissakeyeva ruḷhattā. Tathā hi ‘‘missakanti bhattamissakeyeva ruḷhavohārattā idaṃ pana ‘bhattamissakamevā’ti vutta’’nti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Atha ‘‘missaka’’nti bhattamissake ruḷhaṃ na hoti, missakabhattaṃ pana sandhāya ‘‘missakaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vuttanti. Evampi yathā ayāguke nimantane khīrādīhi saddhiṃ madditaṃ bhattameva sandhāya ‘‘yāguṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vutte pavāraṇā hoti, evamidhāpi missakabhattameva sandhāya ‘‘missakaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vutte bhattaṃ appaṃ vā hotu bahu vā, pavāraṇā eva siyā. Tasmā ‘‘missaka’’nti bhattamissake ruḷhaṃ vā hotu sandhāyabhāsitaṃ vā, ubhayatthāpi pubbenāparaṃ na sametīti kimettha kāraṇacintāya, īdisesu pana ṭhānesu aṭṭhakathāpamāṇeneva gantabbanti ayaṃ amhākaṃ khanti.
“分开来给”,意思是把饭食上层的汤汁等单独取出来再给——三部复注里都是这么说的。不过也有人这样说:“用手紧紧挤压、过滤,让饭粒不掉下来,然后给出去。”但即便如此,也看不出有什么道理。比如有人端来掺了饭粒的粥,说“请拿粥”,如果拒绝连饭粒一起混着给,并不算构成拒绝。同样在这里,对于多乳、多汁的饭食,若说了“请拿乳”等之后,无论是只给乳等,还是给混了乳等的饭食,两种情况下都不应该构成拒绝。所以“分开来给”是针对他们给的方式说的,并不是要表明拒绝混在一起的饭食就构成拒绝——应该这样理解。但如果复注的意思是“给混了饭粒的饭食时就构成拒绝”,所以才说“分开来给”,那么在这种情况下,就应当以复注为准,不必再去找别的道理了。巴利
‘‘Visuṃkatvā detīti bhattassa upari ṭhitaṃ rasādiṃ visuṃ gahetvā detī’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Kenaci pana ‘‘yathā bhattasitthaṃ na patati, tathā gāḷhaṃ hatthena pīḷetvā parissāvetvā detī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathāpi kāraṇaṃ na dissati. Yathā hi bhattamissakaṃ yāguṃ āharitvā ‘‘yāguṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vatvā yāgumissakaṃ bhattampi dentaṃ paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā na hoti, evamidhāpi bahukhīrarasādīsu bhattesu ‘‘khīraṃ gaṇhathā’’tiādīni vatvā khīrādīni vā detu khīrādimissakabhattaṃ vā, ubhayathāpi pavāraṇāya na bhavitabbaṃ, tasmā ‘‘visuṃ katvā detī’’ti tenākārena dentaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na pana bhattamissakaṃ katvā diyyamānaṃ paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā hotīti dassanatthanti gahetabbaṃ. Yadi pana bhattamissakaṃ katvā diyyamāne pavāraṇā hotīti adhippāyena aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘visuṃ katvā detī’’ti vuttaṃ, evaṃ sati aṭṭhakathāyevettha pamāṇanti gahetabbaṃ, na pana kāraṇantaraṃ gavesitabbaṃ.
如果蹲坐着的人脚没有挪开就坐到了地上,那就叫作破坏威仪。所以,为了不破坏蹲坐的姿势而能安稳地坐下,才说“然而在他下方……应当给坐具”。所谓“不移动座位”,是说臀部接触座位的那块肉不离开,也就是说不站起来。这里不应该像偷盗那样,理解成被赶离座位——三部复注里都是这么说的。巴利
Sace ukkuṭikaṃ nisinno pāde amuñcitvāpi bhūmiyaṃ nisīdati, iriyāpathaṃ vikopento nāma hotīti ukkuṭikāsanaṃ avikopetvāva sukhena nisīdituṃ ‘‘tassa pana heṭṭhā…pe… nisīdanakaṃ dātabba’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Āsanaṃ acāletvāti pīṭhe phuṭṭhokāsato ānisadamaṃsaṃ amocetvā, anuṭṭhahitvāti vuttaṃ hoti, adinnādāne viya ṭhānācāvanaṃ na gahetabba’’nti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ.
关于“未作净”这件事:因为未作净的东西本身就不算“剩余”,所以如果没让人作净,直接放进那个钵里的根、果等物就不算“剩余”;但其余属于钵里的食物,仍然算是“剩余”,可以吃。如果想食用那些根、果等物,就要从钵里取出来,让人作净后放到另一个容器里,再作一次“剩余”处理,然后才能吃。巴利
Akappiyakatanti ettha akappiyakatasseva anatirittabhāvato kappiyaṃ akārāpetvā tasmiṃ patte pakkhittamūlaphalādiyeva atirittaṃ na hoti, sesaṃ pana pattapariyāpannaṃ atirittameva hoti, paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Taṃ pana mūlaphalādiṃ paribhuñjitukāmena tato nīharitvā kappiyaṃ kārāpetvā aññasmiṃ bhājane ṭhapetvā atirittaṃ kārāpetvā bhuñjitabbaṃ.
他不能再做,是指就在同一个容器里做的时候,因为和先前所做的合在一起,就成了“已做”,所以他自己不能再做,别人可以做。但在另一个容器里,由他或由别人来做都可以。因此说:“没做的,应当做;凡是没做的,都应当做。”这里“也”这个字,表示不只是“由别人”的意思。所谓“这样做了”,是指在另一个容器里做的。“派人送去”,是指通过未受具足戒的人的手送去。由于这属于律仪行事,所以说“不应让未受具足戒的人手中的食物被做”。巴利
So puna kātuṃ na labhatīti tasmiṃyeva bhājane kariyamānaṃ paṭhamaṃ katena saddhiṃ kataṃ hotīti puna soyeva kātuṃ na labhati, añño labhati. Aññasmiṃ pana bhājane tena vā aññena vā kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Tenāha ‘‘yena akataṃ, tena kātabbaṃ. Yañca akataṃ, taṃ kātabba’’nti. Tenapīti ettha pi-saddo na kevalaṃ aññena vāti imamatthaṃ dīpeti. Evaṃ katanti aññasmiṃ bhājane kataṃ. Pesetvāti anupasampannassa hatthe pesetvā. Imassa vinayakammabhāvato ‘‘anupasampannassa hatthe ṭhitaṃ na kāretabba’’nti vuttaṃ.
如果食物混在一起,这里的意思是:如果口中还有没作残食的食物,跟它混在一起,就应该知道这本身就是波逸提。所以,已经受请的人即使让人作了残食之后再吃,也要把口和手弄干净,让食物不跟没作残食的混在一起。未受请的人在食前为了充饥而吃非时药等,虽然没有犯,但已受请的人因为受请这件事,本身就有恶作。因此律文里说:“非时药……吞咽时犯恶作。”巴利
Sace pana āmisasaṃsaṭṭhānīti ettha sace mukhagatenapi anatirittena āmisena saṃsaṭṭhāni honti , pācittiyamevāti veditabbaṃ. Tasmā pavāritena bhojanaṃ atirittaṃ kārāpetvā bhuñjantenapi yathā akatena missaṃ na hoti, evaṃ mukhañca hatthañca suddhaṃ katvā bhuñjitabbaṃ. Kiñcāpi appavāritassa purebhattaṃ yāmakālikādīni āhāratthāya paribhuñjatopi anāpatti, pavāritassa pana pavāraṇamūlakaṃ dukkaṭaṃ hotiyevāti ‘‘yāmakālikaṃ…pe… ajjhohāre āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ.
241 通过身体吃、用语言指使别人,以及不让人把不是剩下的食物做成剩食,由此而犯,所以说“从身语”。这里其余的部分很容易理解。不过,这里面有三个条件:已经受请的状态、食物没有成为剩食、在食时吞咽。巴利
241. Kāyena bhuñjanato vācāya āṇāpetvā atirittaṃ akārāpanato ca āpajjatīti ‘‘kāyavācato’’ti vuttaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Pavāritabhāvo, āmisassa anatirittatā, kāle ajjhoharaṇanti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
第六,第二受请满足学处注释巴利
6. Dutiyapavāraṇāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
243 第六项,“共通”是指:与“来,比丘,吃吧”等所说的自恣共通。因为论母中说“食已,波逸提”,所以是在吃饭结束时犯罪,不是每一口吞咽时都犯。“强劝自恣,犯波逸提”,这也应当知道是就吃饭结束时说的。这里其余的部分容易明白。不过,这里一共有五个要素:已受自恣的状态、有受自恣想、有期望触恼、以非余食强劝自恣、吃饭结束。巴利
243. Chaṭṭhe sādhāraṇamevāti ‘‘handa bhikkhu khāda vā’’tiādinā vuttapavāraṇāya sādhāraṇaṃ. ‘‘Bhuttasmiṃ pācittiya’’nti mātikāyaṃ vuttattā bhojanapariyosāne āpatti, na ajjhohāre ajjhohāre. Abhihaṭṭhuṃ pavāreti, āpatti pācittiyassāti idañca bhojanapariyosānaṃyeva sandhāya vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Pavāritatā, pavāritasaññitā, āsādanāpekkhatā, anatirittena abhihaṭṭhuṃ pavāraṇā, bhojanapariyosānanti imāni panettha pañca aṅgāni.
7. 非时食学处注释巴利
7. Vikālabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
247 第七项,“最上舞”是指最殊胜的舞蹈。据说他们是站在山顶上,为了供养某位天神而表演的。演员们演的戏剧叫“舞蹈戏剧”,比如抢悉多之类的节目。在戒条尚未制定时:是指未满二十岁出家受具足戒的戒条还没有制定的时候。他们给:是说“带回精舍去,你们就可以吃了”,这样给了他们。巴利
247. Sattame aggasamajjoti uttamaṃ naccaṃ. Taṃ kira pabbatamatthake ṭhatvā ekaṃ devataṃ uddissa karonti. Naṭānaṃ nāṭakāni naṭanāṭakāni, sītāharaṇādīni. Apaññatte sikkhāpadeti ūnavīsativassasikkhāpade apaññatte. Adaṃsūti ‘‘vihāraṃ netvā khādissathā’’ti adaṃsu.
248-249 248–249. 根、根本根等,只应当依据教导来理解。因为即使换一种方式来说,也不可能被人理解。如果换一种方式来说,对那些不知道那些名称的人,只会造成迷惑,所以这里不作任何说明。“硬食的作用”是指用硬食应当完成的事。“不遍满”是指不成就。关于“在各地各处”,这里有人说:“能在某一个地方完成食物作用的东西,在其余地方也不适用。” “树、藤等”是把前面说过的内容归纳起来说的。“进入地内者”是针对佳美的树干说的。“一切净物”是指根、干、皮、叶等一切都净。即使靠它们的名称,也无法显示其范围,这是这里的关联。为了说明阿奇瓦等未成熟的果实是尽形寿药,所以说了“未成熟的”。巴利
248-249. Mūlakamūlādīni upadesatoyeva veditabbāni. Na hi tāni pariyāyantarena vuccamānānipi sakkā viññātuṃ. Pariyāyantarepi hi vuccamāne taṃ taṃ nāmaṃ ajānantānaṃ sammohoyeva siyā, tasmā tattha na kiñci vakkhāma. Khādanīyatthanti khādanīyena kattabbakiccaṃ. Neva pharantīti na nipphādenti. Tesu tesu janapadesūti ettha ‘‘ekasmiṃ janapade āhārakiccaṃ sādhentaṃ sesajanapadesupi na kappatī’’ti vadanti. Rukkhavalliādīnanti heṭṭhā vuttameva sampiṇḍetvā vuttaṃ. Antopathavīgatoti sālakalyāṇīkhandhaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Sabbakappiyānīti mūlakhandhatacapattādivasena sabbaso kappiyāni. Tesampi nāmavasena na sakkā pariyantaṃ dassetunti sambandho. Acchivādīnaṃ aparipakkāneva phalāni yāvajīvikānīti dassetuṃ ‘‘aparipakkānī’’ti vuttaṃ.
关于“诃子等的核”这一说法,有些老师认为,是指去掉果肉之后留下来的、可以终生保存的果核。也有人认为,果仁本身也是可以终生保存的。“阿魏”是指从阿魏树流出的树脂。阿魏胶等,也都只是阿魏的加工品。其中,所谓阿魏胶,是把阿魏树的枝和叶煮过之后做成的树脂;所谓阿魏片,是把阿魏叶煮过之后做成的树脂。也有人说,那是“掺了别的东西做成的”。“树脂”是指从枝端流出的汁液。“树脂叶”是指从叶子流出的汁液。“树脂叶片”是指在阔叶中煎煮而成的汁液。巴利
Harītakādīnaṃ aṭṭhīnīti ettha miñjaṃ paṭicchādetvā ṭhitakapālāni yāvajīvikānīti ācariyā. Miñjampi yāvajīvikanti eke. Hiṅgūti hiṅgurukkhato paggharitaniyyāso. Hiṅgujatuādayopi hiṅguvikatiyo eva. Tattha hiṅgujatu nāma hiṅgurukkhassa daṇḍapattāni pacitvā kataniyyāso, hiṅgusipāṭikaṃ nāma hiṅgupattāni pacitvā kataniyyāso. ‘‘Aññena missetvā kato’’tipi vadanti. Takanti aggakoṭiyā nikkhantasileso. Takapattinti pattato nikkhantasileso. Takapaṇṇinti palāse bhajjitvā katasileso. ‘‘Daṇḍato nikkhantasileso tipi vadanti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Vikālatā, yāvakālikatā, ajjhoharaṇanti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
8. 蓄存食学处注释巴利
8. Sannidhikārakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
252-3 第八条里说的“这样的”是指没有汤也没有菜的食物。在“任何时限内食物或时分饮料”这句话中,用“时分饮料”这个词,是在说明:不只是对时限内食物,因蓄藏而犯波逸提;对时分饮料也一样。可是,时分饮料既不属于嚼食,也不属于啖食啊?正因为如此,在分别句里才说:“所谓嚼食,就是除去五种啖食、时分饮料、七日时限内食物、终生时限内食物之后,剩下的那些。所谓啖食,就是五种啖食。”又说:“如果有比丘吃或享用蓄藏的嚼食或啖食,犯波逸提。”那么,怎么理解对时分饮料也犯波逸提呢?回答说:在分别句里说“除去时分饮料”,是为了说明“嚼食”这个词的含义,并不是为了说明因蓄藏而无犯。因为凡是能嚼的东西,都叫嚼食;而时分饮料只能喝,没有能嚼的地方。所以,虽然时分饮料不被嚼食和啖食所包含,但在说明无犯时说:“无犯:把时分饮料在夜分内蓄藏后享用。”从这句话就能知道,一旦超过夜分,就会因蓄藏而犯波逸提。还有这句话也能成立这个意思:“诸比丘,对于时分饮料,七日时限内食物和终生时限内食物,如果当天接受,在夜分内可以使用,超过夜分就不能使用。”因此,那些了解世尊意趣的注释师们,对时分饮料也确实只说是波逸提。巴利
252-3. Aṭṭhame tādisanti asūpabyañjanaṃ. Yaṃkiñci yāvakālikaṃ vā yāmakālikaṃ vāti ettha ‘‘yāmakālika’’nti iminā na kevalaṃ yāvakālike eva sannidhipaccayā pācittiyaṃ, atha kho yāmakālikepīti dasseti. Nanu ca yāmakālikaṃ neva khādanīyesu antogadhaṃ, na bhojanīyesu. Teneva padabhājanīye ‘‘khādanīyaṃ nāma pañca bhojanāni yāmakālikaṃ sattāhakālikaṃ yāvajīvikaṃ ṭhapetvā avasesaṃ khādanīyaṃ nāma. Bhojanīyaṃ nāma pañca bhojanānī’’ti vuttaṃ, ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu sannidhikārakaṃ khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā khādeyya vā bhuñjeyya vā, pācittiya’’nti ca vuttaṃ, tasmā yāmakālike pācittiyena bhavitabbanti kathaṃ viññāyatīti? Vuccate – padabhājane khādanīya-saddassa atthadassanatthaṃ ‘‘yāmakālikaṃ ṭhapetvā’’ti vuttaṃ, na pana sannidhipaccayā anāpattidassanatthaṃ. Khāditabbañhi yaṃkiñci khādanīyanti adhippetaṃ, na ca yāmakālikesu kiñci khāditabbaṃ atthi pātabyabhāvato. Tasmā kiñcāpi yāmakālikaṃ khādanīyabhojanīyehi na saṅgahitaṃ, tathāpi anāpattiṃ dassentena ‘‘anāpatti yāmakālikaṃ yāme nidahitvā bhuñjatī’’ti vacanato yāmātikkame sannidhipaccayā pācittiyena bhavitabbanti viññāyati. ‘‘Yāmakālikena, bhikkhave, sattāhakālikaṃ yāvajīvikaṃ tadahupaṭiggahitaṃ yāme kappati, yāmātikkante na kappatī’’ti (mahāva. 305) imināpi cāyamattho siddho. Teneva bhagavato adhippāyaññūhi aṭṭhakathācariyehi yāmakālike pācittiyameva vuttaṃ.
“执受时”这句话,是就执取本身而说的。因为那东西已经是执受过的了,不需要再有一次执受的行为。正因如此,才说“对于以想吞咽之心而执取的人,在执受时”。不过《论母注》里只说是“对于以‘我要吞咽’之心而执取的人,在执受时”。“那”指的是那个钵。“显现”是指在粥的上面显现出来。即使钵是油色的,在并不油腻的情况下,用手指去擦,也仅仅因为颜色的关系而看得出划痕,所以为了说明这种情况不算犯戒,才说“那是无关紧要的”。所谓“自己执受后没有舍弃的”,到了第二天就不允许用了。在这里,通过不在意地舍掉执受,或者通过不在意地送给未受具足戒的人,从而舍弃了执受,才算是“已舍弃”。因此,“未舍弃”这个词,是指这两种方式都没有舍弃执受。所以应当知道:即使是别人没有舍弃并赠给别人的东西,如果已经通过不在意地舍掉执受而舍弃了执受,那么第二天也是可以用的。巴利
Paṭiggahaṇeti gahaṇameva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Paṭiggahitameva hi taṃ, puna paṭiggahaṇakiccaṃ natthi. Teneva ‘‘ajjhoharitukāmatāya gaṇhantassa paṭiggahaṇe’’ti vuttaṃ. Mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. sannidhikārakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) pana ‘‘ajjhoharissāmīti gaṇhantassa paṭiggahaṇe’’icceva vuttaṃ. Yanti yaṃ pattaṃ. Sandissatīti yāguyā upari sandissati. Telavaṇṇe patte satipi nisnehabhāve aṅguliyā ghaṃsantassa vaṇṇavaseneva lekhā paññāyati, tasmā tattha anāpattīti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘sā abbohārikā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sayaṃ paṭiggahetvā apariccattameva hi dutiyadivase na vaṭṭatīti ettha paṭiggahaṇe anapekkhavissajjanena anupasampannassa nirapekkhadānena vā vijahitapaṭiggahaṇaṃ pariccattameva hotīti ‘‘apariccatta’’nti iminā ubhayathāpi avijahitapaṭiggahaṇameva vuttaṃ. Tasmā yaṃ parassa pariccajitvā adinnampi sace paṭiggahaṇe nirapekkhavissajjanena vijahitapaṭiggahaṇaṃ hoti, tampi dutiyadivase vaṭṭatīti veditabbaṃ.
如果这样的话,为什么在“钵没有洗净”等说法里说有罪呢?三部《结文》里都说:“还没有舍弃执受的时候,自己或别人把钵倒空,没有好好洗净就放着,这时沾在钵上的东西也仍然属于没有舍弃的执受,所以在这种情况下有罪。”不过有些人说:“‘沙弥们舍弃’——在这一章里,因为说的是‘没有舍弃的’,所以给未受具足戒的人时,只有已经舍弃的才可以,没有舍弃的不可以。因此,即使以无所执着的心舍弃了执受,但如果没有舍弃给未受具足戒的人,也是不可以的。”这种说法看起来并不合理。因为从舍弃执受的那一刻起,就不再蓄藏了,已经舍弃执受的东西,和没有执受的东西是一样的。而且,只有在执受之后蓄藏起来的情况下,才说因为蓄藏而有罪。正如所说的:“这是指执受之后过了一夜的意思。”巴利
Yadi evaṃ ‘‘patto duddhoto hotī’’tiādīsu kasmā āpatti vuttāti? ‘‘Paṭiggahaṇaṃ avissajjetvāva sayaṃ vā aññena vā tucchaṃ katvā na sammā dhovitvā niṭṭhāpite patte laggampi avijahitapaṭiggahaṇameva hotīti tattha āpattī’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘sāmaṇerānaṃ pariccajantīti imasmiṃ adhikāre ṭhatvā ‘apariccattamevā’ti vuttattā anupasampannassa pariccattameva vaṭṭati, apariccattaṃ na vaṭṭatīti āpannaṃ, tasmā nirālayabhāvena paṭiggahaṇe vijahitepi anupasampannassa apariccattaṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti, taṃ yuttaṃ viya na dissati. Yadaggena hi paṭiggahaṇaṃ vijahati, tadaggena sannidhimpi na karoti vijahitapaṭiggahaṇassa appaṭiggahitasadisattā. Paṭiggahetvā nidahiteyeva ca sannidhipaccayā āpatti vuttā. ‘‘Paṭiggahetvā ekarattaṃ vītināmitassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti hi vuttaṃ.
在巴利圣典中,因为说到“为食用而接受七日药、尽形寿药,犯恶作”等,对于蓄藏的七日药和尽形寿药,即使在食前为食用而吞咽,也犯恶作。因此,对于夜分药,为食用而吞咽时,也应当另有恶作,所以说“为食用而吞咽者,伴随恶作而有波逸提”。“通常的食”是指米饭等适宜食用的食物。对于夜分药,若有因缘,以沾有食物的嘴吞咽时,有两罪:今天食前以沾有食物的嘴食用昨天接受的夜分药时,因蓄藏夜分药而有一波逸提,因与蓄藏食物混合而有一罪,共两波逸提。“在两种分别中”,是指所说的“沾有食物”和“不沾有食物”两种方式。“恶作增加”,是指因吞咽而增加的恶作。“偷兰遮和恶作增加”,是指在人肉中偷兰遮增加,在其他不适合的肉中恶作增加。巴利
Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘sattāhakālikaṃ yāvajīvikaṃ āhāratthāya paṭiggaṇhāti, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’tiādinā sannihitesu sattāhakālikayāvajīvikesu purebhattampi āhāratthāya ajjhoharaṇepi dukkaṭassa vuttattā yāmakālikepi āhāratthāya ajjhoharaṇe visuṃ dukkaṭenapi bhavitabbanti āha ‘‘āhāratthāya ajjhoharato dukkaṭena saddhiṃ pācittiya’’nti. Pakatiāmiseti odanādikappiyāmise. Yāmakālikaṃ sati paccaye sāmisena mukhena ajjhoharato dveti hiyyo paṭiggahitayāmakālikaṃ ajja purebhattaṃ sāmisena mukhena bhuñjato sannihitayāmakālikapaccayā ekaṃ pācittiyaṃ, sannihitena saṃsaṭṭhaāmisapaccayā ekanti dve pācittiyāni. Vikappadvayepīti sāmisena nirāmisenāti vuttavidhānadvaye. Dukkaṭaṃ vaḍḍhatīti āhāratthāya ajjhoharaṇapaccayā dukkaṭaṃ vaḍḍhati. Thullaccayañca dukkaṭañca vaḍḍhatīti manussamaṃse thullaccayaṃ, sesaakappiyamaṃsesu dukkaṭaṃ vaḍḍhati.
255 255. 先说“因接受而犯恶作”这一条:这里因为食物被蓄藏,所以即使在正午前吃也还是犯恶作。不过,如果有适当的因缘,即使蓄藏了七日药或尽形寿药,为了当药而接受、食用,就没有过失。这里剩下的内容都很浅显易懂。在这里,有“时药与夜分药的性质”“蓄藏的状态”“把它吞下去”这三项要素。巴利
255.Paṭiggahaṇapaccayā tāva dukkaṭanti ettha sannihitattā purebhattampi dukkaṭameva. Sati paccaye pana sannihitampi sattāhakālikaṃ yāvajīvikaṃ bhesajjatthāya gaṇhantassa paribhuñjantassa ca anāpattiyeva. Sesamettha uttānameva. Yāvakālikayāmakālikatā, sannidhibhāvo, tassa ajjhoharaṇanti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
9. 胜妙食学处注释巴利
9. Paṇītabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
257-259 257-259. 第九条里,与上等物品混在一起的食物,就叫上等食物。就像由良马驾的车被称为“良马车”一样,这里由七种谷物做成、又与上等物品混在一起的食物,也被称为“上等食物”。为了说明那些和它混在一起的上等物品有哪些类别,圣典里说:“比如,酥油、生酥”等等。“那些肉是允许的”这句话,是为了说明构成波逸提罪的范围,而不是为了说明允许物品的范围。因为对于肉不被允许的众生来说,他们的酥油等物并不是不被允许的。实际上,除了人油之外,在一切奶、酥油、生酥、油、脂当中,并没有所谓不被允许的东西。关于“酥油饭”:在这里,虽然混了酥油的饭可以叫酥油饭,酥油和饭也可以叫酥油饭,但注释书里举出“就像并不存在一种叫酥油饭的米饭”这个理由,更坚定地判为恶作,所以不能另作别的解释。因为注释书的阿阇梨们,正是在这类地方具有权威。巴利
257-259. Navame paṇītasaṃsaṭṭhāni bhojanāni paṇītabhojanāni. Yathā hi ājaññayutto ratho ‘‘ājaññaratho’’ti vuccati, evamidhāpi paṇītasaṃsaṭṭhāni sattadhaññanibbattāni bhojanāni ‘‘paṇītabhojanānī’’ti vuttāni. Yehi pana paṇītehi saṃsaṭṭhāni, tāni ‘‘paṇītabhojanānī’’ti vuccanti, tesaṃ pabhedadassanatthaṃ ‘‘seyyathidaṃ, sappi navanīta’’ntiādi pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Yesaṃ maṃsaṃ kappatī’’ti idañca pācittiyavatthuparicchedadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ, na pana kappiyavatthuparicchedadassanatthaṃ. Na hi akappiyamaṃsasattānaṃ sappiādīni na kappanti. Ekañhi manussavasātelaṃ ṭhapetvā sabbesaṃ khīrasappinavanītavasātelesu akappiyaṃ nāma natthi. Sappibhattanti ettha kiñcāpi sappisaṃsaṭṭhaṃ bhattaṃ sappibhattaṃ, sappi ca bhattañca sappibhattantipi viññāyati, aṭṭhakathāsu pana ‘‘sālibhattaṃ viya sappibhattaṃ nāma natthī’’ti kāraṇaṃ vatvā dukkaṭasseva daḷhataraṃ katvā vuttattā na sakkā aññaṃ vattuṃ. Aṭṭhakathācariyā eva hi īdisesu ṭhānesu pamāṇaṃ.
“根本”是就允许的物品来说的。“无犯”是指因为不涉及嫌疑,所以在一切罪过中都不算犯戒。不过有些人说:“这里说的无犯只是针对波逸提而言,乞求汤饭的恶作仍然存在。”这种说法不能采纳。“用允许的酥油、用不允许的酥油”:这是根据肉允许与不允许来说的,所以这里的含义应当理解为:用允许之肉做的酥油、用不允许之肉做的酥油。“不同事缘的”:是就酥油、生酥等不同种类来说的。巴利
Mūlanti kappiyabhaṇḍaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Anāpattīti visaṅketattā sabbāhiyeva āpattīhi anāpatti. Keci pana ‘‘pācittiyeneva anāpatti vuttā, sūpodanaviññattidukkaṭaṃ pana hotiyevā’’ti vadanti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Kappiyasappinā akappiyasappināti ca idaṃ kappiyākappiyamaṃsānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ, tasmā kappiyamaṃsasappinā akappiyamaṃsasappināti evamettha attho gahetabbo. Nānāvatthukānīti sappinavanītādīnaṃ vasena vuttaṃ.
261 关于大名学处,应当依此来处置。这里:巴利
261.Mahānāmasikkhāpadena kāretabboti ettha –
没有生病的比丘可以接受四个月资具的邀请,但再次邀请和长期邀请除外。如果超过这个范围还去接受,就犯波逸提。巴利
‘‘Agilānena bhikkhunā catumāsapaccayapavāraṇā sāditabbā aññatra punapavāraṇāya aññatra niccapavāraṇāya, tato ce uttari sādiyeyya, pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 306) –
这叫做大名学处。按照这条学处,如果僧团为病人接受资具邀请时,已经对天数或药物作了限定,说“只能乞求这么多天,或这么多药物”,那么,超过这个天数或药物数量的界限之后,向不是为药事而邀请的人乞求药物,或者向为另一种药事而邀请的人乞求另一种药物,就说是犯波逸提。因此,没有病却自认为有病,乞求五种药物,就叫做“向不是为药事而邀请的人乞求药物”,所以说“应当以大名学处来处理”。“这些是应悔过的事缘”,这是就巴利圣典中提到的酥油等而说的。不过应当知道,圣典中没有提到的不允许的酥油等,对比丘尼来说也是恶作的事缘。“乞求汤饭”,这是指除了比丘的波逸提事缘和比丘尼的应悔过事缘之外的其他乞求而说的。其余在这里浅显易懂。而在这里有四个要素:上妙食物、没有病、通过未经邀请的乞求而获得、吞咽。巴利
Idaṃ mahānāmasikkhāpadaṃ nāma. Iminā ca sikkhāpadena saṅghavasena gilānapaccayapavāraṇāya pavāritaṭṭhāne sace tattha rattīhi vā bhesajjehi vā paricchedo kato hoti, ettakāyeva rattiyo ettakāni vā bhesajjāni viññāpetabbānīti. Atha tato rattipariyantato vā bhesajjapariyantato vā uttari na bhesajjakaraṇīyena vā bhesajjaṃ aññabhesajjakaraṇīyena vā aññaṃ bhesajjaṃ viññāpentassa pācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Tasmā agilāno gilānasaññī hutvā pañca bhesajjāni viññāpento na bhesajjakaraṇīyena bhesajjaṃ viññāpento nāma hotīti ‘‘mahānāmasikkhāpadena kāretabbo’’ti vuttaṃ. Etāni pāṭidesanīyavatthūnīti pāḷiyaṃ āgatasappiādīni sandhāya vuttaṃ. Pāḷiyaṃ anāgatāni pana akappiyasappiādīni bhikkhunīnampi dukkaṭavatthūnīti veditabbaṃ. Sūpodanaviññattiyanti bhikkhūnaṃ pācittiyavatthūni bhikkhunīnaṃ pāṭidesanīyavatthūni ca ṭhapetvā avasesaviññattiṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Paṇītabhojanatā, agilānatā, akataviññattiyā paṭilābho, ajjhoharaṇanti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.
10. 齿木学处注释巴利
10. Dantaponasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
263 263. 第十条中,“被圣者丢弃的”:这是对父亲所给团食的称呼。“门槛”:指在坟场建的房子或自己房子的门槛。“紧密连结”:指由结实的肉连在一起,也就是说身体结实、紧密。巴利
263. Dasame ayyavosāṭitakānīti pitupiṇḍassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Ummāreti susāne katagehassa attano gehassa vā ummāre. Ghanabaddhoti ghanamaṃsena sambaddho, kathinasaṃhatasarīroti vuttaṃ hoti.
264 “口门”是指喉咙。“食物”是指任何应当吞咽的东西,比如时药等。“使进入”是指让食物进入口门。不管是从嘴进去还是从鼻子进去,因为都要通过喉咙吞咽,所以这一切都算是进入了口门。可是,那些比丘对非食物的水也生起食物想,对齿木也生起“这东西已经进入口门了”的想法,于是心生不安。因此经文说:“那些比丘……没有正确理解意义,心生不安。”因为水可以随意喝,齿木也可以按齿木的用法来使用,但齿木的汁液不可以吞下去。即使不知道的情况下把齿木的汁液吞进肚子里,也一样犯波逸提。如果不吞咽的话,不管是齿木还是别的东西,都可以放进嘴里。巴利
264.Mukhadvāranti galanāḷikaṃ. Āhāranti ajjhoharitabbaṃ yaṃkiñci yāvakālikādiṃ. Āhareyyāti mukhadvāraṃ paveseyya. Mukhena vā paviṭṭhaṃ hotu nāsikāya vā, galena ajjhoharaṇīyattā sabbampi taṃ mukhadvāraṃ pavesitameva hoti. Yasmā pana te bhikkhū anāhārepi udake āhārasaññāya dantapone ca mukhadvāraṃ āhaṭaṃ idanti saññāya kukkuccāyiṃsu, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘te bhikkhū adinnaṃ…pe… sammā atthaṃ asallakkhetvā kukkuccāyiṃsū’’ti. Udakañhi yathāsukhaṃ pātuṃ dantakaṭṭhañca dantaponaparibhogena paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati, tassa pana rasaṃ gilituṃ na vaṭṭati. Sacepi dantakaṭṭharaso ajānantassa anto pavisati, pācittiyameva. Anajjhoharantena pana dantakaṭṭhaṃ vā hotu aññaṃ vā, kiñci mukhe pakkhipituṃ vaṭṭati.
265 病弱者无法亲手受用时,可以用口接受。所谓“仅抬起”,就是仅仅抬起。所谓“仅一处”,就是仅仅用手指碰到。如果这样接受了,那就全部都算已经接受,因为是用竹竿末端绑好放着的。即使罐子放在地上,施主站在伸手可及的地方,说“我把罐子给你”而布施,比丘通过握住竹竿末端来接受,那么绑在两端的所有东西也都算已经接受了。关于“并非为了比丘的利益而挤压,而是自然被挤压的甘蔗汁”,因为说的是“拿取”,所以说“看不出有奉献”。不过,如果比丘站在伸手可及的地方,为了他的利益而挤压甘蔗,流出来的汁可以拿;在槽里自然流出的甘蔗汁,即使中间一再挡住再放出来,也可以拿。某些注释书里有这个说法。巴利
265.Akallakoti gilāno sahatthā paribhuñjituṃ asakkonto mukhena paṭiggaṇhāti. Uccāraṇamattanti ukkhipanamattaṃ. Ekadesenapīti aṅguliyāpi phuṭṭhamattena. Taṃ ce paṭiggaṇhāti, sabbaṃ paṭiggahitamevāti veṇukoṭiyā bandhitvā ṭhapitattā. Sacepi bhūmiyaṃ ṭhitameva ghaṭaṃ dāyakena hatthapāse ṭhatvā ghaṭaṃ dassāmīti dinnaveṇukoṭiggahaṇavasena paṭiggaṇhāti, ubhayakoṭibaddhaṃ sabbampi paṭiggahitameva hoti. Bhikkhussa atthāya apīḷetvā pakatiyā pīḷiyamānaucchurasaṃ sandhāya ‘‘gaṇhathā’’ti vuttattā ‘‘abhihāro na paññāyatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Hatthapāse ṭhitassa pana bhikkhussa atthāya pīḷiyamānā ucchuto paggharantaṃ rasaṃ gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭati, doṇikāya sayaṃ paggharantaṃ ucchurasaṃ majjhe āvaritvā āvaritvā vissajjitampi gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭati. Katthaci aṭṭhakathāsu.
“不可移动”是指中等力气的人无法移动它。由于说到“在丁提尼迦等叶上”,应当知道在树枝上接受是成立的。关于“擦拭后接受”,这里有人说:“擦拭后并没有接受这件事,所以应该理解为‘擦拭后拿取’。”在这里应当理解为“擦拭后接受”或“擦拭后拿取”。因为落在钵里的尘垢粉末,若不除去就不能用来内部食用,所以可以接受后食用。由于随顺先前的作意,所以说“可给予未受具足戒者……”。然而,仅仅心中生起“我要给他人”的念头,并不就成为他人所有,因此即使不给他,也可以接受后食用。巴利
Asaṃhārimeti thāmamajjhimena purisena asaṃhāriye. ‘‘Tintiṇikādipaṇṇesū’’ti vacanato sākhāsu paṭiggahaṇaṃ ruhatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Puñchitvā paṭiggahetvāti ettha ‘‘puñchite paṭiggahaṇakiccaṃ natthi, tasmā puñchitvā gahetvāti evamattho gahetabbo’’ti vadanti. Puñchitvā paṭiggahetvā vāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Patte patitarajanacuṇṇañhi abbhantaraparibhogatthāya aparihaṭabhāvato paṭiggahetvā paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Pubbābhogassa anurūpena ‘‘anupasampannassa datvā…pe… vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana taṃ ‘‘aññassa dassāmī’’ti cittuppādamattena parasantakaṃ nāma na hoti, tasmā tassa adatvāpi paṭiggahetvā paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati.
比丘给予,是指给予另一位比丘。酸粥,是针对乳浆等任何流质而说的。从手中放开后再拿取,就成了已执取,所以说“正是不放开手”。关于“搅拌者”,是指正在搅拌的人,或者这就是原文的读法。因为取来放在地上,所以不算奉献,因此说“钵应当接受”。关于“首先从杓中点滴落入钵中”,这里有人说:“正如首先落入的没有过失,同样,对于倒出后移开的人,后来落入的也因为已经奉献而没有过失。”关于“用小锅”,是指用小的容器。即使用口缘拿取,也就是抬起口缘让手接触到,也是可以拿取的。某些人,是指无畏山寺的住众。这个理趣是:与身体相连属之物所连属的东西,也仍然是与身体相连属的。同样地,在那里,对于与身体相连属的以及与之相连属的,都只说犯土喇咤亚。巴利
Bhikkhussa detīti aññassa bhikkhussa deti. Kañjikanti khīrarasādiṃ yaṃkiñci dravaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Hatthato mocetvā puna gaṇhāti, uggahitakaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘hatthato amocentenevā’’ti. Ālulentānanti ālolentānaṃ, ayameva vā pāṭho. Āharitvā bhūmiyaṃ ṭhapitattā abhihāro natthīti āha ‘‘patto paṭiggahetabbo’’ti. Paṭhamataraṃ uḷuṅkato thevā patte patantīti ettha ‘‘yathā paṭhamataraṃ patitatheve doso natthi, tathā ākiritvā apanentānaṃ pacchā patitathevepi abhihaṭattā nevatthi doso’’ti vadanti. Carukenāti khuddakabhājanena. Mukhavaṭṭiyāpi gahetuṃ vaṭṭatīti mukhavaṭṭiṃ ukkhipitvā hatthe phusāpite gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭati. Kecīti abhayagirivāsino. Esa nayoti kāyapaṭibaddhapaṭibaddhampi kāyapaṭibaddhamevāti ayaṃ nayo. Tathā ca tattha kāyapaṭibaddhe taṃpaṭibaddhe ca thullaccayameva vuttaṃ.
“由彼”说的是物品来到那位比丘跟前,所以是“由彼”。“因此”是因为只允许原主自己使用,所以这样说。当天用手拿了,第二天接受之后再使用,就成了“已执取、已接受”,所以文中说“未触摸”。因为还没有接受,所以文中说“以蓄藏为缘,无犯”。如果没接受就直接使用,就犯“未与而取”的口门罪,因此文中说“然而接受之后才可以使用”。由于文中说“当天……此后就不可以”,所以当天用手拿了也好、没拿而只是放着也好,第二天没接受就使用的话,就犯“未与而取”的口门罪;但如果是用手拿了之后放着,第二天接受之后再使用,就成了“已执取、已接受”。因为用手拿了之后放着的,本身就是没接受的东西。由于文中说“自己拿了之后使用”,所以允许当天使用没接受的东西。因此,复注里说的“‘正在给予时掉落’——这里,就像在群食等场合中,为患病等而心存疑虑的人被允许用群食一样,在这里,世尊也是为了消除疑虑而允许已接受的东西”,这段话不应该采纳。因为“正在给予时掉落”是笼统的说法,所以应当知道这个道理适用于四种时限。巴利
Tenāti yassa bhikkhuno santikaṃ gataṃ, tena. Tasmāti yasmā mūlaṭṭhasseva paribhogo anuññāto, tasmā. Taṃ divasaṃ hatthena gahetvā dutiyadivase paṭiggahetvā paribhuñjantassa uggahitakapaṭiggahitaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘anāmasitvā’’ti. Appaṭiggahitattā ‘‘sannidhipaccayā anāpattī’’ti vuttaṃ. Appaṭiggahetvā paribhuñjantassa adinnamukhadvārāpatti hotīti āha ‘‘paṭiggahetvā pana paribhuñjitabba’’nti. ‘‘Taṃ divasaṃ…pe… na tato para’’nti vacanato taṃ divasaṃ hatthena gahetvā vā aggahetvā vā ṭhapitaṃ dutiyadivase appaṭiggahetvā paribhuñjantassa adinnamukhadvārāpatti hoti, hatthena gahetvā ṭhapitaṃ dutiyadivase paṭiggahetvā paribhuñjantassa pana uggahitakapaṭiggahitaṃ hoti. Appaṭiggahitameva hi hatthena gahetvā ṭhapitaṃ. ‘‘Sāmaṃ gahetvā paribhuñjitu’’nti hi vacanato appaṭiggahitasseva tasmiṃ divase paribhogo anuññāto. Tasmā yaṃ vuttaṃ gaṇṭhipade ‘‘taṃ diyyamānaṃ patatīti ettha yathā gaṇabhojanādīsu gilānādīnaṃ kukkuccāyantānaṃ gaṇabhojanaṃ anuññātaṃ, evamidhāpi bhagavatā paṭiggahitameva kukkuccavinodanatthaṃ anuññāta’’nti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Taṃ diyyamānaṃ patatī’’ti avisesena vuttattā catūsupi kālikesu ayaṃ nayo veditabbo.
“以刀”是指用已接受的刀。那为什么在这里不会构成因拿取而储存的过失呢?回答说:“因为他们不是为了受用而持有它。”这句话就说明:为了外部受用,自己拿来后,或者拿来未受具足戒者给的东西后加以持有,是允许的。因此,如果为了涂钵等目的,自己拿来并持有油等物,想受用时,接受后受用的人无犯。但为了内部受用,自己拿来后接受而受用,就算“已拿取、已接受”;没有接受就受用,就犯“未与而取”的口门罪;为了内部受用,拿来未受具足戒者给的东西而持有,就像“生姜、盐的许可”那样,构成因储存而犯的罪。有些人说:“因为按照‘对中等力气的男子来说,仅仅提起就算’等所说的五支具足,接受就成立,所以即使是为了外部受用,如果拿来未受具足戒者给的东西,也仍然是已接受。”若照这样说,那么在这里,为了外部受用而拿来未受具足戒者给的东西并持有的人,就应当说构成因储存而犯的罪,而且也不应当说“因为他们不是为了受用而持有它”。所以应知:为了外部受用而拿来的东西,不算已接受。若问:“既然如此,在五种接受支中,是否要加上‘为了受用’这一限定?”答:“不必加。因为接受本来就是为了受用,所以没有另外说‘为了受用’,而只说‘如果比丘用手或与身体相连之物接受’这么多。”另有一些人说:“即使有接受,这里说‘因为他们不是为了受用而持有它’,是指为了非受用而持有时无犯。”在“臼和杵被磨损”这句中,如果臼和杵被用尽后,在捣碎、研磨的药物上出现了外来的颜色,那就不允许。巴利
Satthakenāti paṭiggahitasatthakena. Kasmā panettha uggahitapaccayā sannidhipaccayā vā doso na siyāti āha ‘‘na hi taṃ paribhogatthāya pariharantī’’ti. Imināva bāhiraparibhogatthaṃ sāmaṃ gahetvā anupasampannena dinnaṃ vā gahetvā pariharituṃ vaṭṭatīti dīpeti. Tasmā pattasammakkhanādiatthaṃ sāmaṃ gahetvā parihaṭatelādiṃ sace paribhuñjitukāmo hoti, paṭiggahetvā paribhuñjantassa anāpatti. Abbhantaraparibhogatthaṃ pana sāmaṃ gahitaṃ paṭiggahetvā paribhuñjantassa uggahitakapaṭiggahitaṃ hoti, appaṭiggahetvā paribhuñjantassa adinnamukhadvārāpatti hoti, abbhantaraparibhogatthameva anupasampannena dinnaṃ gahetvā pariharantassa siṅgīloṇakappo viya sannidhipaccayā āpatti hoti. Keci pana ‘‘thāmamajjhimassa purisassa uccāraṇamattaṃ hotītiādinā vuttapañcaṅgasampattiyā paṭiggahaṇassa ruhanato bāhiraparibhogatthampi sace anupasampannena dinnaṃ gaṇhāti, paṭiggahitamevā’’ti vadanti. Evaṃ sati idha bāhiraparibhogatthaṃ anupasampannena dinnaṃ gahetvā pariharantassa sannidhipaccayā āpatti vattabbā siyā, ‘‘na hi taṃ paribhogatthāya pariharantī’’ti ca na vattabbaṃ, tasmā bāhiraparibhogatthaṃ gahitaṃ paṭiggahitaṃ nāma na hotīti veditabbaṃ. Yadi evaṃ pañcasu paṭiggahaṇaṅgesu ‘‘paribhogatthāyā’’ti visesanaṃ vattabbanti? Na vattabbaṃ. Paṭiggahaṇañhi paribhogatthameva hotīti ‘‘paribhogatthāyā’’ti visuṃ avatvā ‘‘tañce bhikkhu kāyena vā kāyapaṭibaddhena vā paṭiggaṇhātī’’ti ettakameva vuttaṃ. Apare pana ‘‘satipi paṭiggahaṇe ‘na hi taṃ paribhogatthāya pariharantī’ti idha aparibhogatthāya pariharaṇe anāpatti vuttā’’ti vadanti. Udukkhalamusalāni khiyyantīti ettha udukkhalamusalānaṃ khayena pisitakoṭṭitabhesajjesu sace āgantukavaṇṇo paññāyati, na vaṭṭati.
“纯净的水”,这是指从树枝等地方滴落下来的水。所谓“或者他的钵应当被接受”,在这里也要知道:当人触碰钵里的食物再给出去时,因为手上沾了食物,为了避免这种过失,钵的接受应当理解成是为了内部食用而接受。在“落入沙弥的钵中……接受不失去”这一段里,如果是反复拿取、放进自己钵中,因为已经认定“这是我的东西”,所以手中的接受不会失去;但如果是拿取已经明确分给别人的东西,因为拿取的那一刻就已经认定“这是我的东西”,所以手中的接受就失去了。在“为某些人盛饭”这一段里,即使是为未受具足戒的人盛饭,如果是自己想“他会来拿”而亲自盛好放着,接受不会失去;但如果放进未受具足戒者的手里,那就等于是未受具足戒者自己放着的,因为已经舍弃了,所以接受就失去了。因此说:“沙弥……因为已经舍弃。”巴利
Suddhaṃ udakaṃ hotīti rukkhasākhādīhi gaḷitvā patanaudakaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Patto vāssa paṭiggahetabboti etthāpi pattagataṃ chupitvā dentassa hatthalaggena āmisena dosābhāvatthaṃ pattapaṭiggahaṇanti abbhantaraparibhogatthameva paṭiggahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Yaṃ sāmaṇerassa patte patati…pe… paṭiggahaṇaṃ na vijahatīti ettha punappunaṃ gaṇhantassa attano patte pakkhittameva ‘‘attano santaka’’nti sanniṭṭhānakaraṇato hatthagataṃ paṭiggahaṇaṃ na vijahati, paricchinditvā dinnaṃ pana gaṇhantassa gahaṇasamayeyeva ‘‘attano santaka’’nti sanniṭṭhānassa katattā hatthagataṃ paṭiggahaṇaṃ vijahati. Kesañci atthāya odanaṃ pakkhipatīti ettha anupasampannassa atthāya pakkhipantepi ‘‘āgantvā gaṇhissatī’’ti sayameva pakkhipitvā ṭhapanato paṭiggahaṇaṃ na vijahati, anupasampannassa hatthe pakkhittaṃ pana anupasampanneneva ṭhapitaṃ nāma hotīti paṭiggahaṇaṃ vijahati pariccattabhāvato. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sāmaṇera…pe… pariccattattā’’ti.
所谓“可以接受的负担”,是指中等力气的人能提得起来的重量。虽然不放手、只是用另一只手盖着并没有过错,但按照义注的标准,还是不应该盖,应当以义注为准。
关于“为了防止苍蝇”这一说法,有人说:“即使树枝上的灰尘掉进钵里,如果能方便地食用,那么因为已经由树枝接受了,所以在这里,为了内部食用,根本接受就已经足够了。”另一些人则说:“‘为了防止苍蝇’在这里只是就字面意思说的,是为了外部食用而拿取的。”
“如果没有那些”是指没有罐子或小盆。
“让未受具足戒的人拿”是指让未受具足戒的人拿那些可以吞食的食物。
“上座比丘的钵给下座比丘”是指自己拿上座比丘的钵,然后交给下座比丘。
“把你的粥给我”这里,是指这样说了之后,拿沙弥的钵,同时也把自己的钵给他。
“在这里”是指关于“聪明的沙弥”等换钵的那段讨论。
“应当审察其中的理由”意思是:就像为母亲等人拿油等物时,在那样的事情中,不跟未受具足戒的人交换就可以食用;但在这里,如果不换钵就不能食用,对此应当审察其中的理由。巴利
Paṭiggahaṇūpagaṃ bhāraṃ nāma thāmamajjhimassa purisassa ukkhepārahaṃ. Kiñcāpi avissajjetvāva aññena hatthena pidahantassa doso natthi, tathāpi na pidahitabbanti aṭṭhakathāpamāṇeneva gahetabbaṃ. Macchikavāraṇatthanti ettha ‘‘sacepi sākhāya laggarajaṃ patte patati, sukhena paribhuñjituṃ sakkāti sākhāya paṭiggahitattā abbhantaraparibhogatthamevidha paṭiggahaṇanti mūlapaṭiggahaṇameva vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Apare pana ‘‘macchikavāraṇatthanti ettha vacanamattaṃ gahetvā bāhiraparibhogatthaṃ gahita’’nti vadanti. Tasmimpi asatīti cāṭiyā vā kuṇḍake vā asati. Anupasampannaṃ gāhāpetvāti taṃyeva ajjhoharaṇīyabhaṇḍaṃ anupasampannena gāhāpetvā. Therassa pattaṃ anutherassāti therassa pattaṃ attanā gahetvā anutherassa deti. Tuyhaṃ yāguṃ mayhaṃ dehīti ettha evaṃ vatvā sāmaṇerassa pattaṃ gahetvā attanopi pattaṃ tassa deti. Ettha panāti paṇḍito sāmaṇerotiādipattaparivattanakathāya. Kāraṇaṃ upaparikkhitabbanti yathā mātuādīnaṃ telādīni haranto tathārūpe kicce anupasampannena aparivattetvāva paribhuñjituṃ labhati, evamidha pattaparivattanaṃ akatvā paribhuñjituṃ na labhatīti ettha kāraṇaṃ vīmaṃsitabbanti attho.
这里,他们说出这样的理由:当沙弥们拿来的米用完了,就可能生起这样的念头——“我们的沙弥一定会来照顾我们”,所以必须把米换过之后才能吃。但如果是为了父母,或者为了树荫等而拿取,就没有受用的期待,所以那是可以的。正因如此,阿阇梨佛授长老也这样说:巴利
Ettha pana ‘‘sāmaṇerehi gahitataṇḍulesu parikkhīṇesu avassaṃ amhākaṃ sāmaṇerā saṅgahaṃ karontīti vitakkuppatti sambhavati, tasmā taṃ parivattetvāva paribhuñjitabbaṃ. Mātāpitūnaṃ atthāya pana chāyatthāya vā gahaṇe paribhogāsā natthi, tasmā taṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti kāraṇaṃ vadanti. Teneva ācariyabuddhadattattherenapi vuttaṃ –
为了父母,或者为了拿油等东西。
为了树枝、树荫等用途,对这些人并没有区别。
因此,对于它的这种差别,应当思考其成因。
至于我们为什么说它有“有顾恋”这种差别,我们接着来推究。巴利
‘‘Mātāpitūnamatthāya, telādiharatopi ca; Sākhaṃ chāyādiatthāya, imesaṃ na visesati. ‘‘Tasmā hissa visesassa, cintetabbaṃ tu kāraṇaṃ; Tassa sālayabhāvaṃ tu, visesaṃ takkayāma ta’’nti.
在这里,这个说法更合理,因为必定会有那样的寻思生起。因为在这里确实无法净化寻思。然而,为了母亲等人而拿取时,就不一定会有那样的寻思生起,因此可以净化寻思。因为,在能够净化寻思的地方,就没有过失。正因如此,下文会说:“如果他能够净化寻思,那么从那里得到的东西也可以吃。”巴利
Idamevettha yuttataraṃ avassaṃ tathāvidhavitakkuppattiyā sambhavato. Na sakkā hi ettha vitakkaṃ sodhetunti. Mātādīnaṃ atthāya haraṇe pana nāvassaṃ tathāvidhavitakkuppattīti sakkā vitakkaṃ sodhetuṃ. Yattha hi vitakkaṃ sodhetuṃ sakkā, tattha nevatthi doso. Teneva vakkhati ‘‘sace pana sakkoti vitakkaṃ sodhetuṃ, tato laddhaṃ khāditumpi vaṭṭatī’’ti.
不能让它移动,就是指不能移动之后把砂砾去掉。钵已经放在钵架上,这是针对应当接受的钵说的。摇动,就是没有理由地摇动。即使有理由,也不该摇动比丘们受用之物。虽然世尊说过“比丘们,我允许在非人造成的病痛时用生肉、生血”,在那种病痛时为了自己而接受生肉是被允许的,但总体上又禁止说“他远离接受生肉”,尽管如此,因为不是为自己或其他比丘而拿的,所以说“狮子吃剩的等等……是可以的”。能够净化寻思,是指他能觉察到“他也会给我吧”这样的寻思还没有生起,或者能觉察到“我是以‘要给沙弥’的清净心拿的”。巴利
Niccāletuṃ na sakkotīti niccāletvā sakkharā apanetuṃ na sakkoti. Ādhārake patto ṭhapitohotīti paṭiggahetabbapattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Cāletīti vinā kāraṇaṃ cāleti. Satipi kāraṇe bhikkhūnaṃ paribhogārahaṃ cāletuṃ na vaṭṭati. Kiñcāpi ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, amanussikābādhe āmakamaṃsaṃ āmakalohita’’nti (mahāva. 264) tādise ābādhe attano atthāya āmakamaṃsapaṭiggahaṇaṃ anuññātaṃ, ‘‘āmakamaṃsapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hotī’’ti ca sāmaññato paṭikkhittaṃ, tathāpi attano aññassa vā bhikkhuno atthāya aggahitattā ‘‘sīhavighāsādiṃ…pe… vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Sakkoti vitakkaṃ sodhetunti mayhampi detīti vitakkassa anuppannabhāvaṃ sallakkhetuṃ sakkoti, sāmaṇerassa dassāmīti suddhacittena mayā gahitanti vā sallakkhetuṃ sakkoti.
如果连根茎也已经接受了,这里有人解释说:如果带着“他拿走之后也会给我吧”这样的想法而接受了,那就是已经接受。所谓“分成份”,就是让比丘和沙弥各自拿自己喜欢的一份,所以是给所有人分成均等的份。所谓“取后剩余”,就是从沙弥们取走的那一份中剩下的部分。所谓“拿了之后”,就是想着“我要拿这个”而拿走。这里说的“取后剩余”,是指他拿了之后又重新放回去的。所谓“接受后”,是指在当天接受后。因此说:“时药和尽形寿药混在一起,没有过失。”但如果是前一天接受后放着的,就不能用沾了食物的嘴去吸那药卷的烟。所谓“用海水”,是指用没有接受过的海水。因为洁净石使水变清后单独留在那里,所以说不算食物。“附着”是指在嘴里、手上,以及水里或干的时候显出白色的东西附着在上面。所谓“取了饮用水”,是指为了自己而取。但如果想着“我要把喝剩的倒回原处”而拿,就不需要再次接受。所谓“推开”,就是拨开、移走的意思。巴利
Sace pana mūlepi paṭiggahitaṃ hotīti ettha ‘‘gahetvā gate mayhampi dadeyyunti saññāya sace paṭiggahitaṃ hotī’’ti vadanti. Koṭṭhāse karotīti bhikkhusāmaṇerā ca attano attano abhirucitaṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ gaṇhantūti sabbesaṃ samake koṭṭhāse karoti. Gahitāvasesanti sāmaṇerehi gahitakoṭṭhāsato avasesaṃ. Gaṇhitvāti ‘‘mayhaṃ idaṃ gaṇhissāmī’’ti gahetvā. Idha gahitāvasesaṃ nāma tena gaṇhitvā puna ṭhapitaṃ. Paṭiggahetvāti tadahu paṭiggahetvā. Teneva ‘‘yāvakālikena yāvajīvikasaṃsagge doso natthī’’ti vuttaṃ. Sace pana purimadivase paṭiggahetvā ṭhapitā hoti, sāmisena mukhena tassā vaṭṭiyā dhūmaṃ pivituṃ na vaṭṭati. Samuddodakenāti appaṭiggahitasamuddodakena. Yasmā katakaṭṭhi udakaṃ pasādetvā visuṃ tiṭṭhati, tasmā ‘‘abbohārika’’nti vuttaṃ. Laggatīti mukhe hatthe ca udake sukkhe setavaṇṇaṃ dassentaṃ laggati. Pānīyaṃ gahetvāti attanoyeva atthāya gahetvā. Sace pana pītāvasesaṃ tattheva ākirissāmīti gaṇhāti, puna paṭiggahaṇakiccaṃ natthi. Vikkhambhetvāti viyūhitvā, apanetvāti attho.
在依靠身体的大种上。掉落是指切断后掉下来。只有切断后掉下来的才可以接受,别的则不行。即使是从树上砍下湿木来用,也是可以的。这里应当知道,为了取黏土而挖地也是可以的。只有在有蛇等危险的那一刻挖才被允许。如果没有作净的人,可以自己拿来用;其他时候则要让人受持后再用。其余在这里意思很明显。未受持、未允许、非如烟等不算食物之物、吞咽——这些就是这里的四个条件。巴利
Mahābhūtesūti sarīranissitesu mahābhūtesu. Patatīti vicchinditvā patati. Vicchinditvā patitameva hi paṭiggahetabbaṃ, na itaraṃ. Alladāruṃ rukkhato chinditvāpi kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti ettha mattikatthāya pathaviṃ khaṇitumpi vaṭṭatīti veditabbaṃ. Sappadaṭṭhakkhaṇeyeva vaṭṭatīti asati kappiyakārake sāmaṃ gahetvā paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati, aññadā paṭiggahāpetvā paribhuñjitabbaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Appaṭiggahitatā, ananuññātatā, dhūmādiabbohārikābhāvo, ajjhoharaṇanti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.
裸行者学处的注释巴利
1. Acelakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
273 273. 在裸行者品第一学处中,“他们的”是指外道。“在那里”是指在容器里。“从此”是指从钵里。如果外道说:“这是最先专门为我拿来放好的,是我的东西,请倒在这个容器里。”这样说就可以。这里其余的内容很清楚。所施对象是外道、是可吞咽之物、为了吞咽而亲手放在未放置(在地上、仍拿在手中)的容器里——这里是三个条件。巴利
273. Acelakavaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpade tesanti titthiyānaṃ. Tatthāti bhājane. Itoti pattato. Sace titthiyo vadatīti ‘‘paṭhamameva maṃ sandhāya abhiharitvā ṭhapitaṃ mayhaṃ santakaṃ hoti, imasmiṃ bhājane ākirathā’’ti vadati, vaṭṭati. Sesamettha uttānameva. Aññatitthiyatā, ajjhoharaṇīyatā , ajjhoharaṇatthāya sahatthā anikkhittabhājane dānanti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
2. 遣离学处的注释巴利
2. Uyyojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
274 274. 第二项内容本身很浅显。想要做不合规矩的事,为了这个目的而遣离已经受具足戒的人,这样遣离时对方越过了近行区域——这里就是这三个条件。巴利
274. Dutiyaṃ uttānatthameva. Anācāraṃ ācaritukāmatā, tadatthameva upasampannassa uyyojanā, evaṃ uyyojentassa upacārātikkamoti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
3. 有食学处注释巴利
3. Sabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
280 280. 在第三学处中,“背梁”是门闩的别名。所谓“小”卧室,按宽度来说有五肘长,而它中间的位置从背梁算起正好是两肘半。因此,在那样的小卧室里,离开背梁一肘而坐,就叫做“越过背梁而坐”。这样坐着,也叫“越过中间而坐”,所以说“以此显示越过中间”。无论怎样做——“或架在背梁上、或没架在背梁上”——都算在内。“有心的”是指进入后,以坐下时的那个心成为有心的。这里其余的内容都很清楚。夫妇二人有被贪欲缠缚的心而共处一室、是卧室、没有第二位比丘、潜入而坐——这些就是这里的四个条件。巴利
280. Tatiye piṭṭhasaṅghāṭoti dvārabāhāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Khuddakaṃ nāma sayanigharaṃ vitthārato pañcahatthappamāṇaṃ hoti, tassa ca majjhimaṭṭhānaṃ piṭṭhasaṅghāṭato aḍḍhateyyahatthappamāṇameva hoti, tasmā tādise sayanighare piṭṭhasaṅghāṭato hatthapāsaṃ vijahitvā nisinno piṭṭhivaṃsaṃ atikkamitvā nisinno nāma hoti. Evaṃ nisinno ca majjhaṃ atikkamitvā nisinno nāma hotīti āha ‘‘iminā majjhātikkamaṃ dassetī’’ti. Yathā vā tathā vā katassāti piṭṭhivaṃsaṃ āropetvā vā anāropetvā vā katassa. Sacittakanti anupavisitvā nisīdanacittena sacittakaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Pariyuṭṭhitarāgajāyampatikānaṃ sannihitatā, sayanigharatā, dutiyassa bhikkhuno abhāvo, anupakhajja nisīdananti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.
284-289 关于第四和第五条学处,没有什么需要说明的。巴利
284-289. Catutthapañcamesu natthi kiñci vattabbaṃ.
第六学处:行仪学处的注释巴利
6. Cārittasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
298 298. 第六学处中,所谓“自然声”,是指站在十二肘范围内能够听到的声音,这就叫自然声。所谓“应当告知”,是指应当用“我去某某家”或“我行仪”这样的话来告知。这里其余的内容都很清楚。接受五种食物中任何一种的邀请、有比丘在场却不告知、从施食之家进入其他人家、未过正午、没有因缘或危难——这些就是这里的五个条件。巴利
298. Chaṭṭhe pakativacanenāti ettha yaṃ dvādasahatthabbhantare ṭhitena sotuṃ sakkā bhaveyya, taṃ pakativacanaṃ nāma. Āpucchitabboti ‘‘ahaṃ itthannāmassa gharaṃ gacchāmī’’ti vā ‘‘cārittaṃ āpajjāmī’’ti vā īdisena vacanena āpucchitabbo. Sesamettha uttānameva. Pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññatarena nimantanasādiyanaṃ, santaṃ bhikkhuṃ anāpucchanā, bhattiyagharato aññagharappavesanaṃ, majjhanhikānatikkamo, samayassa vā āpadānaṃ vā abhāvoti imāni panettha pañca aṅgāni.
7. 大名学处注释巴利
7. Mahānāmasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
303 303. 在第七学处中,“名叫大名”指的是阿努卢陀长老的兄弟,也就是世尊的叔父之子。净饭王、斛饭王、白饭王、甘露饭王、阿弥饭王,这五个人是兄弟。名叫阿弥陀的王后是他们的姐妹,提舍长老是她的儿子。如来和难陀长老是净饭王的儿子,摩诃男和阿努卢陀长老是斛饭王的儿子,阿难陀长老是甘露饭王的儿子。他是世尊的堂弟,而大名年纪更大,是一位证得斯陀含果的圣弟子。因此经文说“名叫大名……圣弟子”。巴利
303. Sattame mahānāmo nāmāti anuruddhattherassa bhātā bhagavato cūḷapitu putto. Suddhodano sakkodano sukkodano dhotodano amitodanoti ime hi pañca janā bhātaro. Amitā nāma devī tesaṃ bhaginī, tissatthero tassā putto. Tathāgato ca nandatthero ca suddhodanassa puttā, mahānāmo ca anuruddhatthero ca sukkodanassa, ānandatthero amitodanassa. So bhagavato kaniṭṭho, mahānāmo mahallakataro sakadāgāmī ariyasāvako. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘mahānāmo nāma…pe… ariyasāvako’’ti.
305-306 305-306. 巴利文里,“ajjaṇho”的意思是“今天”,也就是指一天;或者也可以取“ajjano”这个意思,但不是我们这里要取的意思。“kālaṃ āharissatha”意思是“你们明天带来”。如果在那之后还继续接受,就是说,如果已经对夜晚或药物作了限定——“只应告知这么多夜晚”或“只应告知这么多药物”——那么,在超过夜晚的限度或药物的限度之后,如果再告知而接受,就犯。即使说明“我们已经被您用这些药物邀请过了,我们正需要这种药物”,也只有病人才能这样告知。巴利
305-306. Pāḷiyaṃ ajjaṇhoti ajja ekadivasanti attho, ‘‘ajjano’’ti vā attho gahetabbo, no amhākaṃ. Kālaṃ āharissathāti sve harissatha. Tato ce uttari sādiyeyyāti sace tattha rattīhi vā bhesajjehi vā paricchedo kato hoti ‘‘ettakāyeva vā rattiyo ettakāni vā bhesajjāni viññāpetabbānī’’ti, tato rattipariyantato vā bhesajjapariyantato vā uttari viññāpento sādiyeyya. ‘‘Imehi tayā bhesajjehi pavāritamha, amhākañca imināva bhesajjena attho’’ti ācikkhitvā viññāpetumpi gilānova labhati.
310 因为这条规定只适用于僧团的自恣,所以才说“那些依自己的个人自恣而自恣的人”。其余内容浅显易懂。这里共有四个要素:属于僧团的自恣、告知药物、没有生病、超出期限。巴利
310. Yasmā saṅghapavāraṇāyamevāyaṃ vidhi, tasmā ‘‘ye attano puggalikāya pavāraṇāya pavāritā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Saṅghapavāraṇatā , bhesajjaviññatti, agilānatā, pariyantātikkamoti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.
8. 出征军学处注释巴利
8. Uyyuttasenāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
311 第八条本身的意思很浅显。这里一共有四个构成条件:军队已经出发;为了去看而前往;在允许范围之外观看;没有这类原因或危险。巴利
311. Aṭṭhamaṃ uttānatthameva. Uyyuttasenā, dassanatthāya gamanaṃ, anuññātokāsato aññatra dassanaṃ, tathārūpapaccayassa āpadāya vā abhāvoti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.
9. 军中住宿学处注释巴利
9. Senāvāsasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
317 9. 第九学处也很清楚。这里有三点:超过三夜、在军中日落、没有生病等情形。巴利
317. Navamasikkhāpadampi uttānameva. Tirattātikkamo, senāya sūriyassa atthaṅgamo, gilānatādīnaṃ abhāvoti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
10. 战场学处注释巴利
10. Uyyodhikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
322 322. 在第十条学处中,“你得到了多少标记?”意思是:作为你箭射的标记,你得到了多少人?也就是说,你射中了多少人?这里其余的内容都很清楚。为了观看演习等而前往,在允许的区域之外观看,以及没有这样的因缘或灾难——这里共有这三个要素。巴利
322. Dasame kati te lakkhāni laddhānīti tava sarappahārassa lakkhaṇabhūtā kittakā janā tayā laddhāti attho, kittakā tayā viddhāti vuttaṃ hoti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Uyyodhikādidassanatthāya gamanaṃ, anuññātokāsato aññatra dassanaṃ, tathārūpapaccayassa āpadāya vā abhāvoti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
1. 饮酒学处注释巴利
1. Surāpānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
326-328 326-328. 在饮酒品的第一条学处里,“vatiyā”是指以村庄为围栏。在巴利文中,粉酒是把粉放进容器,加上相应的水,揉捏后做成的。同样,把糕点和饭放进容器,加上相应的水,揉捏后做成的,就叫做糕点酒和饭酒。“kiṇṇā”则是指这种酒的酒母。那些也被称为“酒丸”的东西,放进去后做成的,就是加了酒母的酒。用诃子、芥子等各种材料混合制成的,就是混合材料酒。巴利
326-328. Surāpānavaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpade vatiyāti gāmaparikkhepavatiyā. Pāḷiyaṃ piṭṭhasurādīsu piṭṭhaṃ bhājane pakkhipitvā tajjaṃ udakaṃ datvā madditvā katā piṭṭhasurā. Evaṃ pūve odane ca bhājane pakkhipitvā tajjaṃ udakaṃ datvā madditvā katā pūvasurā odanasurāti ca vuccati. ‘‘Kiṇṇā’’ti pana tassā surāya bījaṃ vuccati. Ye surāmodakātipi vuccanti, te pakkhipitvā katā kiṇṇapakkhittā. Harītakīsāsapādinānāsambhārehi saṃyojitā sambhārasaṃyuttā.
由摩头迦树、棕榈、椰子等花汁长期放置发酵而成的,是花酒。由面包果等果汁发酵而成的,是果酒。由葡萄汁发酵而成的,是蜜酒。由甘蔗汁发酵而成的,是糖酒。由诃子、余甘子、苦味药材等多种原料的汁液长期放置、与各种原料混合而成的,是混合原料酒。所谓“从种子起”,是指从备好原料放入瓮中的时候起,以及从采集棕榈、椰子等花汁的新鲜之时起。巴利
Madhukatālanāḷikerādipuppharaso ciraparivāsito pupphāsavo. Panasādiphalaraso phalāsavo. Muddikāraso madhvāsavo. Ucchuraso guḷāsavo. Harītakāmalakakaṭukabhaṇḍādinānāsambhārānaṃ raso ciraparivāsito sambhārasaṃyutto. Bījato paṭṭhāyāti sambhāre paṭiyādetvā cāṭiyaṃ pakkhittakālato, tālanāḷikerādīnaṃ puppharasassa gahitaabhinavakālatoyeva ca paṭṭhāya.
329 329. 盐酸粥以及经是一种由多种药物配制而成、不属于酒类的特殊发酵物。“为取气味”是指为了获取芬芳的气味。关于此处“非心念、世间所责”的内容,应按照第一波罗夷注释中所说的方式来了知。这里其余的部分本身已经清楚。这里有两项要素:酒性和对它的饮用。巴利
329.Loṇasovīrakaṃ suttañca anekehi bhesajjehi abhisaṅkhato amajjabhūto āsavaviseso. Vāsaggāhāpanatthanti sugandhibhāvaggāhāpanatthaṃ. Acittakaṃ lokavajjanti ettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayena veditabbaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Majjabhāvo, tassa pānañcāti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni.
2. 指戳学处注释巴利
2. Aṅgulipatodakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
330 330. 在第二条学处中,“比丘尼也站在未受具足戒的位置上”——这里应当理解为:比丘也站在比丘尼的未受具足戒的位置上。这里其余的内容都很清楚。在这里有两项要素:以嬉笑为目的,以及已受具足戒者用身体碰触(对方)身体。巴利
330. Dutiye bhikkhunīpi anupasampannaṭṭhāne ṭhitāti ettha bhikkhupi bhikkhuniyā anupasampannaṭṭhāne ṭhitoti veditabbo. Sesamettha uttānameva. Hasādhippāyatā, upasampannassa kāyena kāyāmasananti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni.
3. 戏笑学处注释巴利
3. Hasadhammasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
335 第三,这一条本身意思很直白。这里有两项要素:高过脚踝骨,以及出于嬉笑的目的而玩耍。巴利
335. Tatiyaṃ uttānatthameva. Uparigopphakatā, hasādhippāyena kīḷananti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni.
4. 不恭敬学处注释巴利
4. Anādariyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
344 第四项学处。应受谴责的师承之说不可接受。因为甘蔗汁是七日药,它的渣滓是终身药,只有两者的结合才是甘蔗棒,所以就像糖和诃子一样,在非时嚼食甘蔗棒是可以的——像这样应受谴责的师承之说,不可接受。在世间所谴责的学处中,师承之说不可行,意思是:在世间所谴责的学处中,凡是犯处所涉及的师承之说,都不可接受;越过世间所谴责的事情之后,还说“这是我们的师承之说”,这种执取是不允许的。所谓“随顺经”,就是义注。所谓“随传承而来的和合而行”,意思是:当这样说“应接受随传承而来的师承之说”时,就已经归入大义注的主张之中了。其余内容在这里已经清楚明白。对于已受具足戒的人,以所制定的说法而作不恭敬——在这里,这两项是构成要素。巴利
344. Catutthe gārayho ācariyuggaho na gahetabboti yasmā ucchuraso sattāhakāliko, tassa kasaṭo yāvajīviko, dvinnaṃyeva samavāyo ucchuyaṭṭhi, tasmā vikāle ucchuyaṭṭhiṃ khādituṃ vaṭṭati guḷaharītakaṃ viyāti evamādiko gārayhācariyavādo na gahetabbo. Lokavajje ācariyuggaho na vaṭṭatīti lokavajjasikkhāpade āpattiṭṭhāne yo ācariyavādo, so na gahetabbo, lokavajjaṃ atikkamitvā ‘‘idaṃ amhākaṃ ācariyuggaho’’ti vadantassa uggaho na vaṭṭatīti adhippāyo. Suttānulomaṃ nāma aṭṭhakathā. Paveṇiyā āgatasamodhānaṃ gacchatīti ‘‘paveṇiyā āgato ācariyuggahova gahetabbo’’ti evaṃ vutte mahāaṭṭhakathāvādeyeva saṅgahaṃ gacchatīti adhippāyo. Sesamettha uttānameva. Upasampannassa paññattena vacanaṃ, anādariyakaraṇanti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni.
5. 恐吓学处注释巴利
5. Bhiṃsāpanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
345 第五,这一条本身意思很明白。这里有两个构成要件:已经受具足戒;在对方看得见、听得见的范围内,想要让他害怕而做出努力。巴利
345. Pañcamaṃ uttānatthameva. Upasampannatā, tassa dassanasavanavisaye bhiṃsāpetukāmatāya vāyamananti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni.
第六,火学处的注释。巴利
6. Jotisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
350 第六,“婆伽”是地方上王族少年的称呼,他们居住的地方,按习惯说法也叫“婆伽”,所以说“婆伽是那个地方的名字”。这事发生在名叫苏苏玛拉吉利的城里。据说,为了建造那座城,建筑占相师勘察城址的那天,不远处有一只鳄鱼发出吼声。后来城顺利建成,就把那只鳄鱼的吼声当作吉兆,给城取名为苏苏玛拉吉利。不过也有人这样说:“因为有一座山形状像鳄鱼,所以叫苏苏玛拉山,这座山在城的附近,城因为有苏苏玛拉山,所以叫‘苏苏玛拉吉利’。”不管是这样还是那样,这名字都是指那座城,所以说“苏苏玛拉吉利是城的名字”。“贝萨卡拉”是一种叫作甘潘达的树,也有人说是“白树”。因为这种树很多,那片树林就以“贝萨卡拉林”闻名。也有写成“贝萨嘎拉林”的。因为有人说:“有个叫贝萨的夜叉,行为不端,因为他从那里掉下去,所以那片树林就得名贝萨嘎拉林。”巴利
350. Chaṭṭhe bhaggā nāma janapadino rājakumārā, tesaṃ nivāso ekopi janapado ruḷhīsaddena ‘‘bhaggā’’ti vuccati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘bhaggāti janapadassa nāma’’nti. Susumāragireti evaṃnāmake nagare. Tassa kira nagarassa māpanatthaṃ vatthuvijjācariyena nagaraṭṭhānassa pariggaṇhanadivase avidūre susumāro saddamakāsi giraṃ nicchāresi. Atha anantarāyena nagare māpite tameva susumāragiraṇaṃ subhanimittaṃ katvā susumāragiraṃtvevassa nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Keci pana ‘‘susumārasaṇṭhānattā susumāro nāma eko giri, so tassa nagarassa samīpe, tasmā taṃ susumāragiri etassa atthīti ‘susumāragirī’ti vuccatī’’ti vadanti. Tathā vā hotu aññathā vā, nāmametaṃ tassa nagarassāti āha ‘‘susumāragiranti nagarassa nāma’’nti. Bhesakaḷāti ghampaṇḍanāmako gacchaviseso. Keci ‘‘setarukkho’’tipi vadanti. Tesaṃ bahulatāya pana taṃ vanaṃ bhesakaḷāvanantveva paññāyittha. ‘‘Bhesagaḷāvane’’tipi pāṭho. ‘‘Bheso nāma eko yakkho ayuttakārī, tassa tato gaḷitaṭṭhānatāya taṃ vanaṃ bhesagaḷāvanaṃ nāma jāta’’nti hi keci.
352 “作火”就是生火。这里其余的内容一看就明白。不过在这里有四个条件:没有生病;没有得到允许;想要取暖;点燃。巴利
352.Jotikaraṇeti aggikaraṇe. Sesamettha uttānameva. Agilānatā, anuññātakaraṇābhāvo, visibbetukāmatā, samādahananti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.
7. 沐浴学处注释巴利
7. Nahānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
357 357. 第七学处的巴利文中,“asambhinnena”意思是未被涂抹的,也就是没有被弄脏。“Orenaddhamāsaṃ nahāyeyya”意思是从沐浴那天算起,在半个月还没满的时候沐浴。这里其余的内容意思很明白。不过,这里有三个条件:在中部地区;在不满半个月的时候沐浴;没有适当的时机、没有渡河的必要、也没有灾难等情况。巴利
357. Sattamasikkhāpadassa pāḷiyaṃ asambhinnenāti amakkhitena, anaṭṭhenāti attho. Orenaddhamāsaṃ nahāyeyyāti nahātadivasato paṭṭhāya addhamāse aparipuṇṇe nahāyeyya. Sesamettha uttānameva. Majjhimadeso, ūnakaddhamāse nahānaṃ, samayānaṃ vā nadīpāragamanassa vā āpadānaṃ vā abhāvoti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
8. 作坏色学处注释巴利
8. Dubbaṇṇakaraṇasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
368 368. 在第八学处中,“所谓皮革匠之蓝,就是天然蓝色”这一说法,见于三处难字释。不过在难字释中说的是:“皮革匠把铅和铁锈投进水里,使皮革变成黑色,这就是皮革匠之蓝。”这里其余的内容一看就明白。这里有三支:所说的那种衣没有经过坏色处理;不是废衣等;或者是下裳,或者是上衣。巴利
368. Aṭṭhame ‘‘cammakāranīlaṃ nāma pakatinīla’’nti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Gaṇṭhipade pana ‘‘cammakārā udake tipumalaṃ ayagūthañca pakkhipitvā cammaṃ kāḷaṃ karonti, taṃ cammakāranīla’’nti vuttaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Vuttappakārassa cīvarassa akatakappatā, anaṭṭhacīvarāditā, nivāsanaṃ vā pārupanaṃ vāti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
第九分配学处的解释巴利
9. Vikappanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
374 374. 第九条的“未舍”:就是没有按照“这是我的东西,你拿去用或者处理掉”这类方式做过舍弃。与谁一起做了律仪羯磨,就是和谁共同完成了律仪羯磨。在三十条的解释中,就是在舍堕的解释中。受用属于身业,让人未舍属于语业。这里剩下的内容意思都很清楚。这里有三点:自己已经作了净施的衣服却没有舍弃、衣服属于应当作净施的情况、受用。巴利
374. Navame apaccuddhāraṇanti ‘‘mayhaṃ santakaṃ paribhuñja vā vissajjehi vā’’tiādinā akatapaccuddhāraṃ. Yena vinayakammaṃ katanti yena saddhiṃ vinayakammaṃ kataṃ. Tiṃsakavaṇṇanāyanti nissaggiyavaṇṇanāyaṃ. Paribhogena kāyakammaṃ, apaccuddhārāpanena vacīkammaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Sāmaṃ vikappitassa apaccuddhāro, vikappanupagacīvaratā, paribhogoti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
第十、藏衣学处的解释巴利
10. Cīvaraapanidhānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
377 第十条本身意思很清楚。这里有两个构成要件:把已受具足戒者所有的钵等物品藏起来;或者想让他苦恼,或者出于开玩笑的意思。巴利
377. Dasamaṃ uttānatthameva. Upasampannassa santakānaṃ pattādīnaṃ apanidhānaṃ, vihesetukāmatā vā hasādhippāyatā vāti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni.
第七 有生命者品巴利
7. Sappāṇakavaggo
7. 故意学处注释巴利
1. Sañciccasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
382 382. 在有虫品的第一条学处中,“射出箭矢,所以叫射手”,这是指精通弓术的人,所以注释说“弓术师”。为了射杀敌人而拿起弓的人,就叫持弓者,他们的老师就是弓术师。应当以不放逸来履行义务:也就是说,要像这样善持正念在住处行事,让那些众生不至于死亡。这里剩下的内容都很浅显易懂。至于各项支分,也应当按讲人身时所说的方式来了知。巴利
382. Sappāṇakavaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpade usuṃ saraṃ assati khipatīti issāso, dhanusippakusaloti āha ‘‘dhanuggahācariyo’’ti. Paṭisattuvidhamanatthaṃ dhanuṃ gaṇhantīti dhanuggahā, tesaṃ ācariyo dhanuggahācariyo. Appamattena vattaṃ kātabbanti yathā te pāṇā na maranti, evaṃ sūpaṭṭhitassatinā senāsane vattaṃ kātabbaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Aṅgānipi manussaviggahe vuttanayena veditabbānīti.
2. 有生命学处之解释巴利
2. Sappāṇakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
387 387. 第二项中,“有水积聚形态的地方”是指地面上某个地方,水倒在那里会停留,不会很快干涸,就是那样的地方。这里剩下的内容意思都很清楚。这里的分支项目,和“浇洒学处”里所说的一样。巴利
387. Dutiye udakasaṇṭhānakappadeseti yattha bhūmibhāge udakaṃ nikkhittaṃ santiṭṭhati, na sahasā parikkhayaṃ gacchati, tādise padese. Sesamettha uttānameva. Aṅgāni siñcanasikkhāpade vuttanayāneva.
3. 翻案学处注释巴利
3. Ukkoṭanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
392 在第三项中,“以已确立的状态而不允许确立”这句话,是为了说明他们现行的情况而说的。然而,凡是如法已裁决的诤事,那就是彻底裁决了。如果在羯磨尚未完成时提出反对,就应当先让他明白,然后再进行。否则,羯磨就会失效,行事者也会获罪。这里其余的内容很清楚。不过,这里有三支:已如法裁决的状态、了知、翻案。巴利
392. Tatiye yathāpatiṭṭhitabhāvena patiṭṭhātuṃ na dentīti tesaṃ pavattiākāradassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Yaṃ pana dhammena adhikaraṇaṃ nihataṃ, taṃ sunihatameva. Sace vippakate kamme paṭikkosati, taṃ saññāpetvāva kātabbaṃ. Itarathā kammañca kuppati, kārakānañca āpatti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Yathādhammaṃ nihatabhāvo, jānanā, ukkoṭanāti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
4. 粗恶学处解释巴利
4. Duṭṭhullasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
399 第四项中,“tasseva”就是指那个犯戒的人本身。“āroceti”是说,为了隐瞒,他说“不要告诉任何人”。“vatthupuggalo”指犯戒的人。“yenassa ārocitaṃ”是说,由第二个人告诉了第三个人。“koṭi chinnā hoti”是说:因为以隐瞒为缘,犯戒之后,第二个人把这件事告诉了第三个人,所以由于这个缘故,不会再有他应当犯的罪,这就叫作罪的相续被切断了。巴利
399. Catutthe tassevāti yo āpanno, tasseva. Ārocetīti paṭicchādanatthameva mā kassaci ārocesīti vadati. Vatthupuggaloti āpannapuggalo. Yenassa ārocitanti yena dutiyena assa tatiyassa ārocitaṃ. Koṭi chinnā hotīti yasmā paṭicchādanapaccayā āpattiṃ āpajjitvāva dutiyena tatiyassa ārocitaṃ, tasmā tappaccayā puna tena āpajjitabbāpattiyā abhāvato āpattiyā koṭi chinnā nāma hoti.
400 “未受具足戒者的出精和身体接触,这叫作粗恶行”——这种说法跟《粗恶告知学处》的注释书对不上。因为那里说:“在未受具足戒者的粗恶行或非粗恶行当中,开头五条学处叫作粗恶行,其余的叫非粗恶行;而出精、身体接触、粗恶语和叹身索供,这些才叫作他的行。”在“告知时,未受具足戒者的粗恶行有一种含义,隐瞒时又有另一种含义”这里,也看不出有什么特别的区分理由,所以注释书前后不一致。但如果想要让它没有矛盾,就应该在这里探究其中的道理。其余部分在这里很容易理解。对于已受具足戒者,知道是粗恶罪,以及因为想隐瞒而放弃“我不告知”的责任——这些是这里的两个构成要素。巴利
400.‘‘Anupasampannassa sukkavissaṭṭhi ca kāyasaṃsaggo cāti ayaṃ duṭṭhullaajjhācāro nāmā’’ti idaṃ duṭṭhullārocanasikkhāpadaṭṭhakathāya na sameti. Vuttañhi tattha (pāci. aṭṭha. 82) ‘‘anupasampannassa duṭṭhullaṃ vā aduṭṭhullaṃ vā ajjhācāranti ettha ādito pañca sikkhāpadāni duṭṭhullo nāma ajjhācāro, sesāni aduṭṭhullo, sukkavissaṭṭhikāyasaṃsaggaduṭṭhullaattakāmā panassa ajjhācāro nāmā’’ti. ‘‘Ārocane anupasampannassa duṭṭhullaṃ aññathā adhippetaṃ, paṭicchādane aññathā’’ti etthāpi visesakāraṇaṃ na dissati, tasmā aṭṭhakathāya pubbenāparaṃ na sameti. Avirodhaṃ icchantena pana vīmaṃsitabbamettha kāraṇaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Upasampannassa duṭṭhullāpattijānanaṃ, paṭicchādetukāmatāya nārocessāmīti dhuranikkhepoti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni.
5. 未满二十岁学处注释巴利
5. Ūnavīsativassasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
402 402. 第五品中,所谓“色经”,是指金匠的经。所谓“难说”,是指因辱骂而恶说;正因为恶说,所以是恶来。所谓“语道”,这里言语本身就是道,对于想知道其义、想让人知道其义的人来说就是道,所以叫语道。所谓“苦忍”,是指应当以苦来忍受的。巴利
402. Pañcame rūpasuttanti heraññikānaṃ suttaṃ. Duruttānanti akkosavasena duruttānaṃ, duruttattāyeva durāgatānaṃ. Vacanapathānanti ettha vacanameva tadatthaṃ ñātukāmānaṃ ñāpetukāmānañca pathoti vacanapatho. Dukkhamānanti dukkhena khamitabbānaṃ.
404 从投胎入母胎时算起,到满二十岁,这叫“胎二十岁”。关于“减年与增年”,应当理解为:如果胎月偏多,就算减年;如果胎月不足,就算增年。所谓“十九岁”,是指在母胎中住了十二个月之后,从大自恣会出生那天算起,到十九岁为止。所谓“在初一那天”,是指后安居入雨安居的那一天。根据“三十昼夜为一个月”的说法,所以说“四个月减损”。所谓“把雨安居往上拉”,就是把雨安居向上拖;意思是到第三年时,以闰月的方式舍弃一个月,这就是把雨安居往上拉。因此,第三年成为十三个月;然而,由于一年是十二个月,所以在十八年中把闰月单独拿出来计算后,说“增六个月”。所谓“从那里”,是指从六个月之后。所谓“无疑惑”,是指连同闰月合计已满二十岁,所以没有疑惑。然而,在三部要句释中说:“因为只取十八年的闰月来计算,所以剩余两年也仍然有额外的日子;针对那些额外日子,说‘无疑惑’。”这不应采纳。因为在两年中,额外的日子并不能单独获得;到第三年时,由于把雨安居往上拉而舍弃闰月,才产生额外的月份。因此,在两年中,额外的日子并不能单独产生。巴利
404. Gabbhe sayitakālena saddhiṃ vīsatimaṃ vassaṃ assāti gabbhavīso. Hāyanavaḍḍhananti gabbhamāsesu adhikesu uttarihāyanaṃ, ūnesu vaḍḍhananti veditabbaṃ. Ekūnavīsativassanti dvādasamāse mātukucchismiṃ vasitvā mahāpavāraṇāya jātakālato paṭṭhāya ekūnavīsativassaṃ. Pāṭipadadivaseti pacchimikāya vassūpagamanadivase. ‘‘Tiṃsarattidivo māso’’ti (a. ni. 3.71; 8.43; vibha. 1023) vacanato ‘‘cattāro māsā parihāyantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Vassaṃ ukkaḍḍhantīti vassaṃ uddhaṃ kaḍḍhanti, tatiye saṃvacchare ekamāsaṃ adhikamāsavasena pariccajantā vassaṃ uddhaṃ kaḍḍhantīti attho, tasmā tatiyo saṃvaccharo terasamāsiko hoti, saṃvaccharassa pana dvādasamāsikattā aṭṭhārasasu vassesu adhikamāse visuṃ gahetvā ‘‘cha māsā vaḍḍhantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tatoti chamāsato. Nikkaṅkhā hutvāti adhikamāsehi saddhiṃ paripuṇṇavīsativassattā nibbematikā hutvā. Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ tīsu gaṇṭhipadesu ‘‘aṭṭhārasannaṃyeva vassānaṃ adhikamāse gahetvā gaṇitattā sesavassadvayassapi adhikāni divasāni honteva, tāni adhikadivasāni sandhāya ‘nikkaṅkhā hutvā’ti vutta’’nti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Na hi dvīsu vassesu adhikadivasāni nāma visuṃ upalabbhanti tatiye vasse vassukkaḍḍhanavasena adhikamāse pariccatteyeva atirekamāsasambhavato. Tasmā dvīsu vassesu atirekadivasāni nāma visuṃ na sambhavanti.
既然已经说过“把这两个月算进去,就满二十年了”,那为什么又说:在十九年的时候,再加上另外一年,才算满二十年呢?于是回答说“这里……等等……已经说过了”。因为不变词有很多含义,这里的 pana 这个词就是 hi 的意思,所以说“这里 hi”。这是为了证明前面已经说过的意思才说的。这段话也说明了这一点:前面说“让十九年的沙弥过了出雨安居的满月日,在第二天授具足戒”,那里并没有把胎月算进去,而是针对还差两个月才满二十年,才说“十九年”;所以如果把两个闰月算进去,那就叫满二十年了。tasmā 这个词的意思是:因为胎月也算在计数之内,所以……。“ekavīsativasso hoti”的意思是:从出生那天算起已经满二十年的人,再加上胎月,就是二十一年。巴利
Nanu ca ‘‘te dve māse gahetvā vīsativassāni paripuṇṇāni hontī’’ti kasmā vuttaṃ, ekūnavīsativassamhi puna aparasmiṃ vasse pakkhitte vīsativassāni paripuṇṇāni hontīti āha ‘‘ettha pana…pe… vutta’’nti. Anekatthattā nipātānaṃ pana-saddo hi-saddatthe, ettha hīti vuttaṃ hoti. Idañhi vuttassevatthassa samatthanavasena vuttaṃ. Iminā ca imaṃ dīpeti ‘‘yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘ekūnavīsativassaṃ sāmaṇeraṃ nikkhamanīyapuṇṇamāsiṃ atikkamma pāṭipadadivase upasampādentī’ti, tattha gabbhamāsepi aggahetvā dvīhi māsehi aparipuṇṇavīsativassaṃ sandhāya ‘ekūnavīsativassa’nti vuttaṃ, tasmā adhikamāsesu dvīsu gahitesu vīsativassāni paripuṇṇāni nāma hontī’’ti. Tasmāti yasmā gabbhamāsāpi gaṇanūpagā honti, tasmā. Ekavīsativasso hotīti jātadivasato paṭṭhāya vīsativasso samāno gabbhamāsehi saddhiṃ ekavīsativasso hoti.
406 给他人授具足戒,意思是自己作为戒师或羯磨语师来给他授具足戒。这里剩下的部分容易理解。未满二十岁、自认为未满、授具足戒,这就是这里的三支。巴利
406.Aññaṃupasampādetīti upajjhāyo kammavācācariyo vā hutvā upasampādeti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Ūnavīsativassatā, ūnakasaññitā, upasampādananti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
第六、盗贼商队学处的注释巴利
6. Theyyasatthasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
407 6. 第六学处的含义本身很容易理解。在这里,有四个构成要素:属于盗贼团伙、知道是盗贼团伙、参与谋划、按约定而同行。巴利
407. Chaṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ uttānatthameva. Theyyasatthakabhāvo, jānanaṃ, saṃvidhānaṃ, avisaṅketena gamananti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.
412 第七项没有任何需要说明的。巴利
412. Sattame natthi kiñci vattabbaṃ.
8. 阿利咤学处注释巴利
8. Ariṭṭhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
417 第八条中,“bādhayiṃsu”的意思是“杀害、伤害”。由于对种种成就造成阻碍,它在众生相续的中间、内部到来、生起,所以叫“antarāya”(障碍),也就是现世等种种不利。以不可逾越之义,系属于那种障碍,或者以障碍为果,或者有制造障碍的习性,所以叫“antarāyikā”(障碍者)。因此说“antarāyaṃ karontīti antarāyikā”——制造障碍,所以是障碍者。“ānantariyadhammā”指具有无间性的思心所法。其中这个词的语义是:死后无间而生的果叫“无间”(anantara),系属于那无间者,以能生起它而有无间所作的习性,或者以无间为目的,所以叫“ānantarikā”,那些就称为“ānantariyā”。只有业才是障碍,所以叫“kammantarāyikā”(业障)。它只对解脱制造障碍,不对天界制造障碍,因为不存在邪行的相状,所以说。因为比丘尼没有法护的状态。这是就普通比丘尼而说的。但对于圣者所生起的,则唯是导致恶趣的,难陀童子就是这里的例证。或者,由于两者意欲相同,所以不对天界构成障碍,但对解脱构成障碍,因为它败坏了为解脱而修的行。然而,在已被克服而现行时,即使对天界构成障碍,也无法阻止。巴利
417. Aṭṭhame bādhayiṃsūti haniṃsu. Taṃtaṃsampattiyā vibandhanavasena sattasantānassa antare vemajjhe eti āgacchatīti antarāyo, diṭṭhadhammikādianattho. Anatikkamanaṭṭhena tasmiṃ antarāye niyuttā, antarāyaṃ vā phalaṃ arahanti, antarāyassa vā karaṇasīlāti antarāyikā. Tenāha ‘‘antarāyaṃ karontīti antarāyikā’’ti. Ānantariyadhammāti ānantarikasabhāvā cetanādhammā. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – cutianantaraphalaṃ anantaraṃ nāma, tasmiṃ anantare niyuttā, taṃnibbattanena anantarakaraṇasīlā, anantarappayojanāti vā ānantarikā, te eva ānantariyāti vuttā. Kammāni eva antarāyikāti kammantarāyikā. Mokkhasseva antarāyaṃ karoti, na saggassāti micchācāralakkhaṇābhāvato vuttaṃ. Na hi bhikkhuniyā dhammarakkhitabhāvo atthi. Pākatikabhikkhunīvasena cetaṃ vuttaṃ. Ariyāya pana pavattaṃ apāyasaṃvattanikameva, nandamāṇavako cettha nidassanaṃ. Ubhinnaṃ samānacchandatāvasena vā na saggantarāyikatā , mokkhantarāyikatā pana mokkhatthāya paṭipattiyā vidūsanato. Abhibhavitvā pana pavattiyaṃ saggantarāyikatāpi na sakkā nivāretunti.
无因见、无作见、虚无见一旦达到决定性状态,就成为决定性的邪见法。“结生法”指的是结生心的生起。这里举出黄门等例子只是示范,因为一切无因结生都带有果报障碍。那些用来指责圣者的思,就成了诽谤圣者。 “从那之后”是指从请求原谅之后。这里应当说明的内容,在天眼通的讨论中已经讲过了。故意犯的罪,就是故意违犯的七种罪聚。因为即使是故意违犯的恶作、恶说,也会障碍天界、道与果。只要还自称是比丘,犯了波罗夷就不能出罪,犯了其余重罪就不算出罪,犯了轻罪就不发露。巴利
Ahetukadiṭṭhiakiriyadiṭṭhinatthikadiṭṭhiyova niyatabhāvaṃ pattā niyatamicchādiṭṭhidhammā. Paṭisandhidhammāti paṭisandhicittuppādamāha. Paṇḍakādiggahaṇañcettha nidassanamattaṃ sabbāyapi ahetukapaṭisandhiyā vipākantarāyikabhāvato. Yāhi ariye upavadati, tā cetanā ariyūpavādā jātā. Tato paranti khamāpanato upari. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ dibbacakkhukathāyaṃ vuttameva. Sañcicca āpannā āpattiyoti sañcicca vītikkantā satta āpattikkhandhā. Sañcicca vītikkantañhi antamaso dukkaṭadubbhāsitampi saggamaggaphalānaṃ antarāyaṃ karoti. Yāva bhikkhubhāvaṃ paṭijānāti pārājikaṃ āpanno, na vuṭṭhāti sesagarukāpattiṃ āpanno, na deseti lahukāpattiṃ āpanno.
“此比丘”指的是阿利吒比丘。“以味混同味”是指:把无过失的资具受用之味,与有过失的欲乐受用之味混同在一起。通过如理观察,在这里没有欲贪,所以叫“无欲贪”,说的是资具的受用。“如同在靠近”就是如同在靠近束缚。也有写成“如同在摩擦”的版本。“如同在拉近”就是如同在拉近相似性,因为把纯粹有过失的东西放到了无过失这一边。“恶”是因为低劣,也因为会导致恶趣,所以叫恶。“如同束缚大海”就是如同用造桥的方式把大海束缚起来。“与一切知智相违”就是:一切知智所见为“有过失”的,他却执取为“无过失”,因此与一切知智相违。“于教轮”指的是第一波罗夷学处所摄的教轮,以及“舍非梵行”等教说所摄的教轮。巴利
Ayaṃ bhikkhūti ariṭṭho bhikkhu. Rasena rasaṃ saṃsanditvāti anavajjena paccayaparibhuñjanarasena sāvajjakāmaguṇaparibhogarasaṃ samānetvā. Yoniso paccavekkhaṇena natthi ettha chandarāgoti nicchandarāgo, paccayaparibhogo. Upanento viyāti bandhanaṃ upanento viya. ‘‘Ghaṭento viyā’’tipi pāṭho. Upasaṃharanto viyāti sadisataṃ upasaṃharanto viya ekantasāvajje anavajjabhāvapakkhepanato. Pāpakanti lāmakaṭṭhena duggatisampāpanaṭṭhena ca pāpakaṃ. Mahāsamuddaṃ bandhantena viyāti setukaraṇavasena mahāsāgaraṃ bandhantena viya. Sabbaññutaññāṇena saddhiṃ paṭivirujjhantoti sabbaññutaññāṇena ‘‘sāvajja’’nti diṭṭhaṃ ‘‘anavajja’’nti gahaṇena tena saha paṭivirujjhanto. Āṇācakketi paṭhamapārājikasikkhāpadasaṅkhāte, ‘‘abrahmacariyaṃ pahāyā’’tiādidesanāsaṅkhāte ca āṇācakke.
所谓骨锁,指的是胸骨、脊椎骨或头骨。因为那些骨头没有肉,所以叫做“骨锁”。在去掉肉的骨链上,或者单独一块骨头上,“骨锁”这个词已经固定通用了。以燃烧为义,是指因为错误的修行方式,在现在和未来燃烧。以大热恼为义,是因为它没有安住的自性;以短暂显现为义,是因为它只持续片刻;以暂时为义,是因为它会被其他事物所压倒;以毁坏一切肢节为义,是因为它以破裂等事为特征;以类似拔除为义,是因为有强烈打击的意思;以在无疮处生疮、向内侵入为义,是因为有穿刺的意思;以现世与后世都不利为标志,所以有恐惧和怖畏的意思。巴利
Aṭṭhikaṅkalaṃ nāma uraṭṭhi vā piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṃ vā sīsaṭṭhi vā. Tañhi nimmaṃsattā ‘‘kaṅkala’’nti vuccati. Vigatamaṃsāya hi aṭṭhisaṅkhalikāya ekaṭṭhimhi vā kaṅkala-saddo niruḷho. Anudahanaṭṭhenāti anupāyapaṭipattiyā sampati āyatiñca anudahanaṭṭhena. Mahābhitāpanaṭṭhena anavaṭṭhitasabhāvatāya, ittarapaccupaṭṭhānaṭṭhena muhuttakaraṇīyatāya, tāvakālikaṭṭhena parehi abhibhavanatāya, sabbaṅgapaccaṅgapalibhañjanaṭṭhena bhedanādiadhikaraṇabhāvena, ugghāṭasadisatāya adhikuṭṭanaṭṭhena, avaṇe vaṇaṃ uppādetvā anto anupavisanabhāvatāya vinivijjhanaṭṭhena, diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaanatthanimittatāya sāsaṅkasappaṭibhayaṭṭhena.
在巴利圣典中,“以强力、以执取”等说法,应当这样理解其含义。“以强力”是指以见的强力,意思是那见解达到了强固的状态。“以执取”是指以见的执取,意思是被称为见的执取。因为见本身就超越了法的自性,从外面去抓取,所以叫执取。“执著”是指以渴爱执著为先导的见执著,也就是执著地认定“这个才是真实的”。“说”就是讲说。“诸比丘,自从那时”就是“当那些比丘的时候”。“我这样被世尊记说,尊者”,这是说他虽然想隐瞒自己的见解、想说“没有这回事”,但因为世尊的威德力,还是承认了。据说在佛陀面前,没有人能说得出两种不同的话。“你这愚人,究竟是谁”是说:你这愚人,我到底是对哪个刹帝利、婆罗门、吠舍、首陀罗、在家人、出家人、天神或人,这样说了法,而你却这样理解?这里剩下的内容很容易明白。法的行事、劝诫、不舍弃,就是这里的三支。巴利
Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘thāmasā parāmāsā’’tiādīsu evamattho veditabbo. Thāmasāti diṭṭhithāmena, tassā diṭṭhiyā thāmagatabhāvenāti attho. Parāmāsāti diṭṭhiparāmāsena, diṭṭhisaṅkhātaparāmāsenāti attho. Diṭṭhiyeva hi dhammasabhāvaṃ atikkamitvā parato āmasanena parāmāso. Abhinivissāti taṇhābhinivesapubbaṅgamena diṭṭhābhinivesena ‘‘idamettha sacca’’nti abhinivisitvā. Voharatīti katheti. Yato ca kho te bhikkhūti yadā te bhikkhū. Evaṃbyākho ahaṃ, bhante, bhagavatāti idaṃ esa attano laddhiṃ nigūhitukāmatāya natthīti vattukāmopi bhagavato ānubhāvena sampaṭicchati. Buddhānaṃ kira sammukhā dve kathā kathetuṃ samattho nāma natthi. Kassa nu kho nāma tvaṃ moghapurisāti tvaṃ moghapurisa kassa khattiyassa vā brāhmaṇassa vā vessassa vā suddassa vā gahaṭṭhassa vā pabbajitassa vā devassa vā manussassa vā mayā evaṃ dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāsi. Sesamettha uttānameva. Dhammakammatā, samanubhāsanā, appaṭinissajjananti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
第九、与已被举罪者共同受用学处的注释巴利
9. Ukkhittasambhogasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
424 第九项中,“以使用计数”,是指按接受布施后的使用来计数。关于共住,应按羯磨完成来判定罪的分际;关于同卧,应按一人躺下时另一人躺下的动作来判定。在这里的分别解说中,因为“同一覆盖处”没有加以区分地宣说,所以即使在不同的近行处,只要在同一覆盖处躺下,也构成犯。正因如此,《论母义注》中说:“‘或共卧’——即使近行处不同,只要在同一覆盖处躺下,也构成犯。”由于即使是不知制戒的阿拉汉,也可能以唯作无记心犯此罪,所以说为“三心”。若有人这样说:“这里的‘三心’应理解为以异熟无记心共卧,否则,此学处是有心学处,以唯作无记心犯之便不合理。”这种说法不应采纳,因为阿拉汉并非不可能违犯有心学处。正因如此,在掘地等有心学处中,也同样说为“三心”。其余在此是显而易见的。未行随顺法、明知、作共享等,在这里是三要素。巴利
424. Navame payogagaṇanāyāti dānaggahaṇappayogagaṇanāya. Saṃvāse kammapariyosānavasena, sahaseyyāya ekasmiṃ nipanne itarassa nipajjanapayogavasena āpattiparicchedo veditabbo. Ettha ca padabhājane ‘‘ekacchanne’’ti avisesena vuttattā nānūpacārepi ekacchanne nipajjantassa āpatti. Teneva mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. ukkhittasambhogasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) vuttaṃ ‘‘saha vā seyyaṃ kappeyyāti nānūpacārepi ekacchanne nipajjeyyā’’ti. Paṇṇattiṃ ajānantena arahatāpi kiriyābyākatacittena āpajjitabbattā ‘‘ticitta’’nti vuttaṃ. Yaṃ pana kenaci vuttaṃ ‘‘ticittanti ettha vipākābyākatacittena saha vā seyyaṃ kappeyyāti evamattho daṭṭhabbo, aññathā sacittakattā sikkhāpadassa kiriyābyākataṃ sandhāya na yujjatī’’ti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Na hi sacittakasikkhāpadavītikkamo arahato na sambhavati. Teneva pathavīkhaṇanādīsu sacittakasikkhāpadesu ticittameva vuttaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Akatānudhammatā, jānanā, sambhogādikaraṇanti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
10. 刺学处注释巴利
10. Kaṇṭakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
428 第十项中,“pire”是一个不变词。它用在呼唤语里时,和“para”这个词意思相同,所以说“para amāmakā”,意思是“不属于我们的、外在的”。或者,“pire”是和“parato”意思相同的不变词,因此“cara pire”就是“到别处去,不要留在这里”,这里应当这样理解。其余的,和前面两个学处中所说的一样。巴利
428. Dasame pireti nipātapadaṃ. Sambodhane vattamānaṃ para-saddena samānatthaṃ vadantīti āha ‘‘para amāmakā’’ti, amhākaṃ anajjhattikabhūtāti attho. Pireti vā ‘‘parato’’ti iminā samānatthaṃ nipātapadaṃ, tasmā cara pireti parato gaccha, mā idha tiṭṭhāti evampettha attho veditabbo. Sesamettha purimasikkhāpadadvaye vuttanayameva.
同法品巴利
8. Sahadhammikavaggo
同法学处注释巴利
1. Sahadhammikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
434 434. 在“同法品”第一个学处中,“每说一次话就犯一次罪”,是指因为害怕失礼而用借口这样说话的人所犯的罪。这里其余的内容很清楚。这里有两个要素:对已受具足戒的人,用制戒时所说的话来说;以及因为不想学而这样说。巴利
434. Sahadhammikavaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpade vācāya vācāya āpattīti anādariyabhayā lesena evaṃ vadantassa āpatti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Upasampannassa paññattena vacanaṃ, asikkhitukāmatāya evaṃ vacananti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni.
2. 讥嫌学处注释巴利
2. Vilekhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
438 第二项中,学习律就是研习律典,所以经文说“正在学习律的人”等等。善护,就像放进箱子里的宝珠堆不会丢失、不会损坏,这样好好保护。善守护是同一个意思的另一种说法。因为不被烦恼贼抢走,又因为一切时候都能好好保持正念,所以得到了妥善守护。被恶作压倒的人,是指被依于如法或不如法之事而生起的恶作所压服的人。怯场就是怯场,是愚痴带来的恐惧。没有这种怯场的人,就是无所畏惧的人。以同法,就是以有道理的话。好好压制而压制,就是让对方再也抬不起头,只能哑口无言、羞愧难当,这样好好地压制住。巴利
438. Dutiye vinayassa pariyāpuṇanaṃ vinayapariyattīti āha ‘‘vinayaṃ pariyāpuṇantāna’’ntiādi. Suguttoti yathā karaṇḍake pakkhittamaṇikkhandho viya na nassati vipattiṃ na pāpuṇāti, evaṃ suṭṭhu gopito. Surakkhitoti tasseva pariyāyavacanaṃ. Yathā hi kilesacorehi avilumpanīyo hoti, evaṃ sabbadā sūpaṭṭhitassatitāya suṭṭhu rakkhito. Kukkuccapakatānanti kappiyākappiyaṃ nissāya uppannakukkuccena abhibhūtānaṃ. Sārajjanaṃ sārado, byāmohabhayaṃ. Vigato sārado etassāti visārado. Sahadhammenāti sakāraṇena vacanena. Suniggahitaṃ niggaṇhātīti yathā na puna sīsaṃ ukkhipanti, atha kho appaṭibhānā maṅkubhūtāyeva honti, evaṃ suṭṭhu niggaṇhāti.
“无耻”这个说法,是省略了ya音来指称的,说的就是“无耻性”。“无知”等词也是这样。迟钝、愚痴:因为无知而迟钝,因为不是他的境界而愚痴,意思就是大痴。巴利
Alajjitāti ya-kāralopena niddeso, alajjitāyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Aññāṇatātiādīsupi eseva nayo. Mando momūhoti aññāṇabhāvena mando, avisayato momūho, mahāmūḷhoti attho.
“自己的敌人”就是自己的对头。“跋耆子”指的是主张十事的部派。“他引、无知、疑、他决”等论者:这里说的是,有些人自称已证阿罗汉果,其实并没有证到,却以为自己证到了,属于增上慢或者狡诈之人。他们自称证了阿罗汉果,别人看到他们遗精之后,魔界的天神就以为“魔身天神将不净带给阿罗汉”,就像东山部和西山部那样,这些人是“他引”论者。另外一些人认为:阿罗汉对于男女等姓名之类的事情,因为认知不再运作,所以有无知;因为对那件事不能确定,所以有疑;又因为那些事需要别人来为他判断、说明、告知,所以有“他决”。这三种主张,就像现在的东山部等,他们是无知、疑、他决论者。对他们的驳斥,应当按《论事》里所说的方式来理解。巴利
Attapaccatthikāti attano paccatthikā. Vajjiputtakā dasavatthudīpakā. Parūpahāraaññāṇakaṅkhāparavitāraṇādivādāti ettha ye arahattaṃ paṭijānantānaṃ appatte pattasaññīnaṃ adhimānikānaṃ kuhakānaṃ vā arahattaṃ paṭijānantānaṃ sukkavissaṭṭhiṃ disvā mārakāyikā devatā ‘‘arahato asuciṃ upasaṃharantī’’ti maññanti seyyathāpi pubbaseliyā aparaseliyā ca, te parūpahāravādā. Yesaṃ pana arahato itthipurisādīnaṃ nāmagottādīsu ñāṇappavattiyā abhāvena atthi arahato aññāṇaṃ, tattheva sanniṭṭhānābhāvena atthi arahato kaṅkhā, yasmā cassa tāni vatthūni pare vitārenti pakāsenti ācikkhanti, tasmā atthi arahato paravitāraṇāti imā tisso laddhiyo seyyathāpi etarahi pubbaseliyānaṃ, te aññāṇakaṅkhāparavitāraṇavādā. Niggaho pana nesaṃ kathāvatthuppakaraṇe vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
“四道与四果”是按最胜的方式来解说的。四无碍解、三明、六通,这些同样属于所证得的正法。这里的“及”字,应当理解为把没有说到的内容也一并收摄进来。有些长老,也就是说法者们,是这样说的。据说,那些粪扫衣长老们也是这样说的。巴利
Cattāro maggā ca phalāni cāti ukkaṭṭhaniddesavasena vuttaṃ, catasso paṭisambhidā tisso vijjā cha abhiññāti ayampi adhigamasaddhammoyeva. Ca-kāro vā avuttasampiṇḍanattho daṭṭhabbo. Keci therāti dhammakathikā. Āhaṃsūti paṃsukūlikattherā evaṃ āhaṃsu.
这段讨论是什么时候发生的呢?这里有一段逐步展开的叙述:据说,在这个岛上发生旃陀罗帝须大怖畏的时候,帝释天王变出一只大木筏,派人告诉比丘们:“将会有大怖畏,天不会正常降雨,比丘们被资具所困,将无法护持教典。应当到对岸去,各位尊者,保命要紧。乘上这只大木筏去吧,尊者們,如果那里不够坐,就把木块垫在胸前过去,所有人都不会有怖畏。”那时,六十位比丘到了海边,约定说:“我们没必要去那边,我们就留在这里守护三藏。”于是折返,前往南摩罗耶地区,靠块茎、根、叶维持生活而住。身体还撑得住时,就坐着诵习;撑不住时,就拨开沙子,围坐一圈,把头凑在一处,研习教典。就这样,经过十二年,他们圆满受持了连同义注的三藏。巴利
Kadā panāyaṃ kathā udapādīti? Ayañhettha anupubbikathā (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.130) – imasmiṃ kira dīpe caṇḍālatissamahābhaye sakko devarājā mahāuḷumpaṃ māpetvā bhikkhūnaṃ ārocāpesi ‘‘mahantaṃ bhayaṃ bhavissati, na sammā devo vassissati, bhikkhū paccayehi kilamantā pariyattiṃ sandhāretuṃ na sakkhissanti, paratīraṃ gantvā ayyehi jīvitaṃ rakkhituṃ vaṭṭati. Imaṃ mahāuḷumpaṃ āruyha gacchatha bhante, yesaṃ ettha nisajjaṭṭhānaṃ nappahoti, te kaṭṭhakhaṇḍepi uraṃ ṭhapetvā gacchantu, sabbesaṃ bhayaṃ na bhavissatī’’ti. Tadā samuddatīraṃ patvā saṭṭhi bhikkhū katikaṃ katvā ‘‘amhākaṃ ettha gamanakiccaṃ natthi, mayaṃ idheva hutvā tepiṭakaṃ rakkhissāmā’’ti tato nivattitvā dakkhiṇamalayajanapadaṃ gantvā kandamūlapaṇṇehi jīvikaṃ kappentā vasiṃsu, kāye vahante nisīditvā sajjhāyaṃ karonti, avahante vālikaṃ ussāretvā parivāretvā sīsāni ekaṭṭhāne katvā pariyattiṃ sammasanti. Iminā niyāmena dvādasa saṃvaccharāni sāṭṭhakathaṃ tepiṭakaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ katvā dhārayiṃsu.
怖畏平息之后,七百位比丘在各自所在之处,对带有义注的三藏,连一个字、一个音节都没有损坏,来到这座岛上,进入了迦罗村地区的曼陀罗园寺。听说长老们到来的消息后,留在岛上的六十位比丘心想“我们要去见长老们”,便前去和长老们一起校勘三藏,结果发现连一个字、一个音节都没有缺失。就在那时,长老们之间生起了这样的讨论:“教法的根本到底是教理,还是修行实践?”穿粪扫衣的长老们说:“修行实践才是根本。”擅长说法的长老们说:“教理才是根本。”于是长老们对他们说:“光凭你们两方的说法,没法判断,请把佛陀所说的经文拿出来。”要拿出经文并不困难——巴利
Bhaye vūpasante sattasatā bhikkhū attano gataṭṭhāne sāṭṭhakathe tepiṭake ekakkharampi ekabyañjanampi avināsetvā imameva dīpamāgamma kallagāmajanapade maṇḍalārāmavihāraṃ pavisiṃsu. Therānaṃ āgatapavattiṃ sutvā imasmiṃ dīpe ohīnā saṭṭhi bhikkhū ‘‘there passissāmā’’ti gantvā therehi saddhiṃ tepiṭakaṃ sodhentā ekakkharampi ekabyañjanampi asamentaṃ nāma na passiṃsu. Tasmiṃ ṭhāne therānaṃ ayaṃ kathā udapādi ‘‘pariyatti nu kho sāsanassa mūlaṃ, udāhu paṭipattī’’ti. Paṃsukūlikattherā ‘‘paṭipatti mūla’’nti āhaṃsu, dhammakathikā ‘‘pariyattī’’ti . Atha ne therā ‘‘tumhākaṃ dvinnampi janānaṃ vacanamatteneva na sakkā viññātuṃ, jinabhāsitaṃ suttaṃ āharathā’’ti āhaṃsu. Suttaṃ āharituṃ na bhāroti –
须跋陀罗,如果这些比丘能正确地安住,世间就不会缺少阿罗汉。(《长部》2.214)大王,导师的教法以行道为根本,以行道为核心;行道住立,教法就住立。(《弥兰陀问经》4.1.7)巴利
‘‘Ime ca, subhadda, bhikkhū sammā vihareyyuṃ, asuñño loko arahantehi assā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.214). ‘‘Paṭipattimūlakaṃ, mahārāja, satthusāsanaṃ , paṭipattisārakaṃ, mahārāja, satthusāsanaṃ, paṭipatti tiṭṭhantī tiṭṭhatī’’ti (mi. pa. 4.1.7) –
他们引用了这部经。巴利
Suttaṃ āhariṃsu.
说法师们听了这部经之后,为了确立自己的主张,就把这部经搬了出来——巴利
Imaṃ suttaṃ sutvā dhammakathikā attano vādaṭṭhapanatthāya imaṃ suttaṃ āhariṃsu –
只要经藏还在,只要律还能显现光辉;
他们就能看见光明,就像太阳升起时一样。
当经典不复存在,律藏也被遗忘时;
世间将会陷入黑暗,就像太阳落山时一样。
当经典得到守护,修行实践也就得到了守护。
安住于修行实践的智者,不会从涅槃的安稳中退堕。巴利
‘‘Yāva tiṭṭhanti suttantā, vinayo yāva dippati; Tāva dakkhanti ālokaṃ, sūriye abbhuṭṭhite yathā. ‘‘Suttantesu asantesu, pamuṭṭhe vinayamhi ca; Tamo bhavissati loke, sūriye atthaṅgate yathā. ‘‘Suttante rakkhite sante, paṭipatti hoti rakkhitā; Paṭipattiyaṃ ṭhito dhīro, yogakkhemā na dhaṃsatī’’ti.
当这部经被提出来时,穿粪扫衣的长老们沉默了,只有说法长老们的话占了上风。就像在百头牛或千头牛当中,如果没有那头延续血统的母牛,那这个牛群的血脉就接续不下去;同样,即使有百位、千位已经开始修观的比丘,如果没有教理,圣道的证悟就不会存在。又像为了知道藏宝罐的位置而把文字刻在石板上,只要文字还在,藏宝罐就不算丢失;同样,只要教理还在,教法就不算隐没。tassādheyyo 的意思是“属于那个”。巴利
Imasmiṃ sutte āhaṭe paṃsukūlikattherā tuṇhī ahesuṃ. Dhammakathikattherānaṃyeva vacanaṃ purato ahosi. Yathā hi gavasatassa gavasahassassa vā antare paveṇipālikāya dhenuyā asati so vaṃso sā paveṇī na ghaṭīyati, evameva āraddhavipassakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ satepi sahassepi vijjamāne pariyattiyā asati ariyamaggapaṭivedho nāma na hoti. Yathā ca nidhikumbhiyā jānanatthāya pāsāṇapiṭṭhe akkharesu upanibaddhesu yāva akkharāni dharanti, tāva nidhikumbhī naṭṭhā nāma na hoti, evameva pariyattiyā dharamānāya sāsanaṃ antarahitaṃ nāma na hotīti. Tassādheyyoti tassāyatto.
439 “Sopanā”是指巴帝摩卡的学处。这里其余的内容都很浅显易懂。而“想要指责”以及“在已受具足戒的人面前贬损学处”,这些就是这里的两个条件。巴利
439.Sopanāti so pātimokkho. Sesamettha uttānameva. Garahitukāmatā, upasampannassa santike sikkhāpadavivaṇṇanañcāti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni.
3. 迷惑学处注释巴利
3. Mohanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
443 第三项本身很简明。关于“令人迷惑”“想要迷惑”“按前面所说已听闻的状态”“迷惑”,这里一共有四个条件。巴利
443. Tatiyaṃ uttānameva. Mohāropanaṃ, mohetukāmatā, vuttanayena sutabhāvo, mohananti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.
4. 击打学处的注释巴利
4. Pahārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
452 第四学处中,“染污心”是指被身体接触的贪欲所染污的心。不过,如果是被淫欲的贪心所染污而打人,那就只犯恶作。这里剩下的内容都很容易理解。愤怒、没有想要他解脱的意图、对已受具足戒者施加打击,这就是这里的三个条件。巴利
452. Catutthe rattacittoti kāyasaṃsaggarāgena rattacitto. Sace pana methunarāgena ratto pahāraṃ deti, dukkaṭameva. Sesamettha uttānameva. Kupitatā, na mokkhādhippāyatā, upasampannassa pahāradānanti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
第五 举掌威吓学处的注释巴利
5. Talasattikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
457 第五学处中,因为不是出于想打人的心而给的,所以犯恶作。在这里,如果是出于想打人的心而打,按前一条学处犯波逸提;如果只是出于想吓唬人的心,仅仅做出吓唬的动作,按这一条学处犯波逸提。但如果偏离了想打人的心而给了打击,那就犯恶作。这个恶作是因为打击而犯,还是因为吓唬而犯?对此,有些人说:恶作就是因为打击而犯,波逸提就是因为吓唬而犯,这样一来,恶作和波逸提同时成立是合理的。因为吓唬在前,打击在后,后来的打击不能让先前的吓唬成为无罪的处所。巴利
457. Pañcame na paharitukāmatāya dinnattā dukkaṭanti ettha paharitukāmatāya pahaṭe purimasikkhāpadena pācittiyaṃ, uccāretukāmatāya kevalaṃ uggiraṇamatte kate iminā pācittiyaṃ. Iminā pana virajjhitvā pahāro dinno, tasmā dukkaṭaṃ. Kimidaṃ dukkaṭaṃ pahārapaccayā, udāhu uggiraṇapaccayāti? Tattha keci tāva vadanti ‘‘pahārapaccayā eva dukkaṭaṃ, uggiraṇapaccayā pācittiyanti sadukkaṭaṃ pācittiyaṃ yujjati. Purimañhi uggiraṇaṃ, pacchā pahāro, na ca pacchā pahāraṃ nissāya purimaṃ uggiraṇaṃ anāpattivatthukaṃ bhavitumarahatī’’ti.
不过我们在这里这样推理:因为威胁本身按其自性就是不成立的,所以不应该由它构成波逸提;但因为是以不清净的心做了加行,所以在这里不可能没有犯戒,因此说是恶作。“并非以想打的心而给与”这句话,是用来说明:以打击为缘,依前一条学处可以构成波逸提的理由,而不是说以打击为缘能构成恶作。因为,如果不是以想打的心而给了打击,却依前一条学处,以打击为缘而构成波逸提或恶作,那是不合理的。他们说:即使看见畜生等做不净行而生气,做出威胁动作的人,也仍然只是为了解脱。这里其余的内容很清楚。愤怒、没有想要对方解脱的意图、对已受具足戒者举手威胁,这就是这里的三个条件。巴利
Mayaṃ panettha evaṃ takkayāma ‘‘uggiraṇassa attano sabhāveneva asaṇṭhitattā tappaccayā pācittiyena na bhavitabbaṃ, asuddhacittena katapayogattā pana na sakkā ettha anāpattiyā bhavitunti dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘Na paharitukāmatāya dinnattā’ti iminā ca pahārapaccayā purimasikkhāpadena pācittiyāsambhave kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ, na pana pahārapaccayā dukkaṭasambhave. Na hi apaharitukāmatāya pahāre dinne purimasikkhāpadena pahārapaccayā pācittiyena dukkaṭena vā bhavituṃ yutta’’nti. ‘‘Tiracchānādīnaṃ asucikaraṇādiṃ disvā kujjhitvāpi uggirantassa mokkhādhippāyo evā’’ti vadanti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Kupitatā, na mokkhādhippāyatā, upasampannassa talasattiuggiraṇanti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
6. 无根诽谤学处的注释巴利
6. Amūlakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
459 第六项本身意思很明白。这里一共有四个条件:已受具足戒、僧残罪的无根性、无根据的追诉、当即了知。巴利
459. Chaṭṭhaṃ uttānatthameva. Upasampannatā, saṅghādisesassa amūlakatā, anuddhaṃsanā, taṅkhaṇavijānanāti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.
7. 故意学处注释巴利
7. Sañciccasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
464 第七也是意思很明白的。这里的三条支分是:已受具足戒、不想让人舒服、让人生起后悔。巴利
464. Sattamampi uttānatthameva. Upasampannatā, aphāsukāmatā, kukkuccuppādananti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
8. 窃听学处注释巴利
8. Upassutisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
471 第八条中,“听近”就是声音的近处。因为“被听到”就叫suti,这是声音的别名。它的近处就是upassuti,说的就是声音的近处。在《结文》里也说,suti就是被听到,指的就是声音本身。不过,站在某个地方能够听到声音,那么站在那里的状态就叫作站在声音的近处,所以注释里说“站在……”。但有些人说:“suti是在这里听闻,这是对能听到声音的那个地点的称呼。它的近处就是upassuti。”如果这样理解,就会变成:站在能听到声音的那个地点附近的另一个地方。而且,注释书为了说明upassuti这个词的含义,说的是“站在某处能够听到他们说话”,并不是在解释suti这个词。所以,前面那种解释更可取。或者也可以这样理解:靠近之后在这里被听到,所以叫upassuti,指的是地点。应当这样理解其含义:靠近某个地点后,能够听到正在说话的人的声音,就在那个地方。关于“mantenta”,因为是以处格的意义而用了业格,所以注释里说“正在交谈的时候”。巴利
471. Aṭṭhame sutisamīpanti saddasamīpaṃ. Suyyatīti hi suti, saddassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tassa samīpaṃ upassuti, saddasamīpanti vuttaṃ hoti. Gaṇṭhipadesu ca suyyatīti sutīti saddova vutto. Yattha pana ṭhitena sakkā hoti saddaṃ sotuṃ, tattha tiṭṭhanto saddasamīpe ṭhito nāma hotīti āha ‘‘yattha ṭhatvā’’tiādi. Keci pana ‘‘suṇāti etthāti suti. Yattha ṭhito suṇāti, tassa ṭhānassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Tassa samīpaṃ upassutī’’ti vadanti, evaṃ pana gayhamāne yasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhito suṇāti, tassa āsanne aññasmiṃ padese tiṭṭhatīti āpajjati. Aṭṭhakathāyañca upassuti-saddasseva atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yattha ṭhatvā sakkā hoti, tesaṃ vacanaṃ sotu’’nti vuttaṃ, na suti-saddassa. Tasmā pubbanayovettha pasatthataro. Atha vā upecca suyyati etthāti upassuti, ṭhānaṃ. Yaṃ ṭhānaṃ upagatena sakkā hoti kathentānaṃ saddaṃ sotuṃ, tatthāti evamattho gahetabbo. Mantentanti bhummatthe upayogavacananti āha ‘‘mantayamāne’’ti.
473 “同一类别”是指按“有时是有作,有时是无作”这种方式归为同一类。因为这三条学处,有时从有作生起,有时从无作生起,不会在同一刹那既有作又无作地生起。这里其余的内容容易理解。不过,这里有三支:已受具足戒、有举罪的意图、听闻。巴利
473.Ekaparicchedānīti ‘‘siyā kiriyaṃ, siyā akiriya’’nti iminā nayena ekaparicchedāni. Imāni hi tīṇi sikkhāpadāni kadāci kiriyato samuṭṭhahanti, kadāci akiriyato, na ekakkhaṇeyeva kiriyākiriyato samuṭṭhahanti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Upasampannatā, codanādhippāyo, savananti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
第九、阻挠羯磨学处的注释巴利
9. Kammapaṭibāhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
474 第九条本身含义浅显。然而,这里有三支:羯磨本身如法、对羯磨有如法的想、给了同意之后却又抱怨。巴利
474. Navamaṃ uttānatthameva. Dhammakammatā, dhammakammanti saññā, chandaṃ datvā khiyyananti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
10. 不给同意就离开学处的注释巴利
10. Chandaṃ adatvā gamanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
479 第十条本身意思很浅显。不过,这里有以下六项条件:裁断正在进行、是如法的羯磨、被认为是如法的羯磨、处在同一界内、共同居住、意图使(羯磨)破坏而离开伸手可及的范围。巴利
479. Dasamaṃ uttānatthameva. Vinicchayakathāya pavattamānatā, dhammakammatā, dhammakammasaññitā, samānasīmāyaṃ ṭhitatā, samānasaṃvāsakatā, kopetukāmatāya hatthapāsavijahananti imāni panettha cha aṅgāni.
第11条 软弱学处的注释巴利
11. Dubbalasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
484 第十一条也同样意思浅显。不过这里还有四个条件:已经受具足戒、如法获得僧团认可、与僧团一起分配可分配的衣、事后想要讥嫌而加以讥嫌。巴利
484. Ekādasamampi uttānatthameva. Upasampannatā, dhammena laddhasammutitā, saṅghena saddhiṃ vikappanupagacīvaradānaṃ, pacchā khīyitukāmatāya khiyyanāti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.
489 第十二条没有什么需要说明的。巴利
489. Dvādasame natthi kiñci vattabbaṃ.
内宫学处的注释巴利
1. Antepurasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
497-499 《王品》第一学处的注释里,所有内容都很浅显易懂。不过巴利原文中,有些词的意思并不明显。“已作或将作”,是指已经做了或将要去做邪淫。“imesaṃ”这个词要变换格位,在两处都接上:“imehi kataṃ, ime karissanti”,也就是“由这些人已作,这些人将作”。“ratanaṃ”指摩尼宝珠等宝物中的任何一种。“ubhato”是从两边的意思。如果只说“ubhato sujāto”,可能被理解成从随便哪两方面都善生。而“sujāta”这个词,在“善生、容貌端严”这类语境里,是身材成就的同义词。所以,为了说明是依种姓而善生,就说了“从母方和从父方”。世间也依非亲生子(养子)的关系而有父母之称,但这里只取亲生子的关系。为了表明这一点,就说了“saṃsuddhagahaṇiko”。“gabbhaṃ gaṇhāti dhāretīti gahaṇī”:执持、保住胎儿的,叫“gahaṇī”,指的是子宫这个母胎部位。“saṃsuddhā gahaṇī assāti saṃsuddhagahaṇiko”:意思是她的母胎清净,也就是说她母亲的子宫是清净的。而在“samavepākiniyā gahaṇiyā”这句里,指的是对所吃食物加以消化、不吐弃的消化功能。巴利
497-499. Rājavaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpade aṭṭhakathāyaṃ sabbaṃ uttānatthameva. Pāḷiyaṃ pana ayamanuttānapadattho. Kataṃ vā karissanti vāti methunavītikkamanaṃ kataṃ vā karissanti vā. Imesanti padaṃ vibhattivipariṇāmaṃ katvā ubhayattha yojetabbaṃ ‘‘imehi kataṃ ime karissantī’’ti. Ratananti maṇiratanādīsu yaṃkiñci. Ubhatoti dvīhi pakkhehi. ‘‘Ubhato sujāto’’ti ettake vutte yehi kehici dvīhi bhāgehi sujātatā viññāyeyya, sujāta-saddo ca ‘‘sujāto cārudassano’’tiādīsu ārohasampattipariyāyoti jātivaseneva sujātataṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘mātito ca pitito cā’’ti vuttaṃ. Anorasaputtavasenapi loke mātupitusamaññā dissati, idha pana sā orasaputtavaseneva icchitāti dassetuṃ ‘‘saṃsuddhagahaṇiko’’ti vuttaṃ. Gabbhaṃ gaṇhāti dhāretīti gahaṇī, gabbhāsayasaññito mātukucchippadeso. Saṃsuddhā gahaṇī assāti saṃsuddhagahaṇiko, saṃsuddhā tassa mātukucchīti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Samavepākiniyā gahaṇiyā’’ti ettha pana yathābhuttassa āhārassa vipācanavasena gaṇhanato achaḍḍanato kammajatejodhātu ‘‘gahaṇī’’ti vuccati.
从七代祖父辈开始:这里,父亲的父亲是祖父,祖父的一代叫祖父辈。“代”指的是寿命的长度。这只是个说法,从意义上说,祖父本身就是祖父辈。父亲和母亲合称父母,父母亲的父亲是祖父,他们的一代是祖父辈。所以,从七代祖父辈开始,也就是七代祖父辈,这里的意思应该这样理解。这样一来,单说“祖父”就已经把外祖父也包括进去了。这里的“代”这个词应该理解为省略说法,即一代又一代。这样各处就已经把代数包含进去了。因此,从这以上,所有祖先都被“祖父辈”这个词涵盖。如此,从七代祖父辈开始,其母胎都是清净的。巴利
Yāvasattamā pitāmahayugāti ettha pitu pitā pitāmaho, pitāmahassa yugaṃ pitāmahayugaṃ. ‘‘Yuga’’nti āyuppamāṇaṃ vuccati. Abhilāpamattameva cetaṃ, atthato pana pitāmahoyeva pitāmahayugaṃ. Pitā ca mātā ca pitaro, pitūnaṃ pitaro pitāmahā, tesaṃ yugo pitāmahayugo, tasmā yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā, pitāmahadvandāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Evañhi pitāmahaggahaṇeneva mātāmahopi gahito hoti. Yuga-saddo cettha ekasesena daṭṭhabbo yugo ca yugo ca yugoti. Evañhi tattha tattha dvandaṃ gahitameva hoti, tasmā tato uddhaṃ sabbepi pubbapurisā pitāmahayugaggahaṇeneva gahitā. Evaṃ yāva sattamo pitāmahayugo, tāva saṃsuddhagahaṇiko.
“未被抛弃”是指没有像“把他赶走,要这个人干什么”这样被抛弃、被嫌弃。“未被呵责”是指没有被呵责,也从来没有被人辱骂或非议过。因为什么原因呢?回答说“因为种姓之说”。在这里,“从双方……乃至……祖父辈”这一段,是通过说明其母系血统清净,来显示他没有出身方面的过失;而“未被抛弃”这一句,是显示他没有行为上的过失,因为众生是由于行为上的过失才遭到抛弃的。“未被呵责”这一句,是显示他没有不正当的交往,因为众生是由于不正当的交往才遭到辱骂。这里其余的内容很容易理解。不过,这里具备五个条件:是刹帝利种姓、已经灌顶即位、父母双方都还没有离开寝室、没有事先告知、越过门槛。巴利
Akkhittoti ‘‘apanetha etaṃ, kiṃ iminā’’ti evaṃ akkhitto anavakkhitto. Anupakuṭṭhoti na upakuṭṭho, na akkosaṃ vā nindaṃ vā pattapubbo. Kena kāraṇenāti āha ‘‘jātivādenā’’ti. Ettha ca ‘‘ubhato…pe… pitāmahayugā’’ti etena tassa yonidosābhāvo dassito saṃsuddhagahaṇikabhāvakittanato, ‘‘akkhitto’’ti iminā kiriyāparādhābhāvo. Kiriyāparādhena hi sattā khepaṃ pāpuṇanti. ‘‘Anupakuṭṭho’’ti iminā ayuttasaṃsaggābhāvo. Ayuttasaṃsaggañhi paṭicca sattā akkosaṃ labhanti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Khattiyatā, abhisittatā, ubhinnampi sayanigharato anikkhantatā, appaṭisaṃviditatā, indakhīlātikkamoti imāni panettha pañca aṅgāni.
2. 宝物学处注释巴利
2. Ratanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
502 第二则,名为“大藤蔓”:据说她前往夫家时,父亲为她打造了一件名叫“大藤蔓”的饰物。那件饰物上,四根金刚管在各自该镶嵌的地方一一嵌好,另有十一根珍珠管、二十二根珊瑚管、三十三根宝石管。就这样,用这些以及琉璃、红宝石、摩沙罗石等其他七色宝物,才最终做成。那件饰物戴在头上时,会一直垂到脚背;只有具备五头大象之力的女子才戴得住。就是针对这件事,才说了那番话。巴利
502. Dutiye mahālataṃ nāmāti patikulaṃ gacchantiyā kira tassā pitā mahālatāpiḷandhanaṃ nāma kārāpesi. Tasmiṃ piḷandhane catasso vajiranāḷiyo tattha tattha appetabbaṭṭhāne appanavasena viniyogaṃ agamaṃsu, muttānaṃ ekādasa nāḷiyo, pavāḷassa dvāvīsati nāḷiyo, maṇīnaṃ tettiṃsa nāḷiyo. Iti etehi ca aññehi ca veḷuriyalohitaṅkamasāragallādīhi sattavaṇṇehi ca ratanehi niṭṭhānaṃ agamāsi . Taṃ sīse paṭimukkaṃ yāva pādapiṭṭhiyā bhassati, pañcannaṃ hatthīnaṃ balaṃ dhārayamānāva itthī naṃ dhāretuṃ sakkoti. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.
506 506. 不过,对于住处,应当这样连接理解:簸箕落下的范围或杵落下的范围,就叫做“近处”。这里“住处”是指在寺院内或其他地方,自己居住的地方。“出于欲乐、出于恐惧”:对木匠等人是出于欲乐,对国王的宠臣等人是出于恐惧。“对该比丘起疑”:是在忘记(带走)而离开的时候,因为自己身后没有别人,所以起疑。“适宜的方式”是指:在被认作宝物的东西上取粪扫衣,或者对宝物无贪著地离去。因为如果那被认作宝物的东西是可触的,他就会想“这东西没有主人”,而取粪扫衣。如果不可触,他就会想“这东西没有主人”,成为粪扫衣的割截障碍后,无顾恋地离去。“劝令”是指劝令别人,依照“为了(供养)圣者而住,这是对圣者的乞求”(Jā. 1.7.59)所说的方法乞求之后的意思。这里其余的部分是显明的。未经允许而作、属于他人所有、没有相信者取粪扫衣想、或自己取或令他人取,这里就是这四支。巴利
506. Āvasathassa pana suppapāto vā musalapāto vā upacāro nāmāti yojetabbaṃ. Āvasathoti cettha antoārāme vā hotu aññattha vā, attano vasanaṭṭhānaṃ vuccati. Chandenapi bhayenapīti vaḍḍhakīādīsu chandena, rājavallabhesu bhayena. Tameva bhikkhuṃ āsaṅkantīti vissaritvā gamanakāle attano pacchato aññassābhāvā āsaṅkanti. Patirūpaṃ nāma ratanasammate paṃsukūlaggahaṇaṃ vā ratane nirussukkagamanaṃ vā. Yadi hi taṃ ratanasammataṃ āmāsaṃ ce, ‘‘natthi etassa sāmī’’ti paṃsukūlaṃ gahessati. Anāmāsaṃ ce, ‘‘natthi etassa sāmī’’ti paṃsukūlachinnapalibodho nirapekkho gamissati. Samādapetvāti aññaṃ samādapetvā, ‘‘uddissa ariyā tiṭṭhanti, esā ariyānayācanā’’ti (jā. 1.7.59) vuttanayena yācitvāti attho. Sesamettha uttānameva. Ananuññātakaraṇaṃ, parasantakatā, vissāsaggāhapaṃsukūlasaññānaṃ abhāvo, uggahaṇaṃ vā uggahāpanaṃ vāti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.
3. 非时入村学处的注释巴利
3. Vikālagāmappavisanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
508 508. 在第三项“圣道”中,这里也应当把天道包含进去。因为对天界之道和解脱之道而言不能导向出离,所以这类谈论就成了畜生论。“成为畜生”的意思是成为障碍、成为束缚。“与国王相关的谈论”,就是以国王为话题,用“大选出王、曼陀多王、法阿育王有这么大的威神力”这样的方式来说。在这里,如果以“某位国王容貌俊美、值得一看”这类方式谈论,那就是执著于世俗生活的言论,属于畜生论。但如果以“即使有这么大威神力的人也已经灭尽”这样的方式来说,那就成了与无常相关的业处,是可以成立的。关于盗贼,如果说“根本盗贼有这么大的威神力,云鬘盗贼有这么大的威神力”,因为赞叹他们的行为而说“啊,真是勇士”,这类执著于世俗生活的言论就是畜生论。关于战争,比如婆罗多战争等,以“某人被某人这样杀死、这样刺伤”的方式,纯粹出于欲乐而说的言论,就是畜生论。但如果以“即使那些人也已经灭尽”这样的方式来说,那么在一切情况下都成为业处。巴利
508. Tatiye ariyamaggassāti ettha saggamaggopi saṅgahetabbo. Aniyyānikattā saggamokkhamaggānaṃ tiracchānabhūtā hi kathā tiracchānakathā. Tiracchānabhūtanti tirokaraṇabhūtaṃ vibandhanabhūtaṃ. Rājapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ kathanti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.17; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.223; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.1080; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.10.69-70) rājānaṃ ārabbha ‘‘mahāsammato mandhātā dhammāsoko evaṃmahānubhāvo’’tiādinā nayena pavattakathaṃ. Ettha ca ‘‘asuko rājā abhirūpo dassanīyo’’tiādinā nayena gehassitakathāva tiracchānakathā hoti. ‘‘Sopi nāma evaṃmahānubhāvo khayaṃ gato’’ti evaṃ pavattā pana aniccatāpaṭisaṃyuttā kammaṭṭhānabhāve tiṭṭhati. Coresupi ‘‘mūladevo evaṃmahānubhāvo, meghamālo evaṃmahānubhāvo’’ti tesaṃ kammaṃ paṭicca ‘‘aho sūrā’’ti gehassitakathāva tiracchānakathā. Yuddhepi bharatayuddhādīsu ‘‘asukena asuko evaṃ mārito evaṃ viddho’’ti kāmassādavaseneva kathā tiracchānakathā. ‘‘Tepi nāma khayaṃ gatā’’ti evaṃ pavattā pana sabbattha kammaṭṭhānameva hoti.
另外,谈到食物等时,不该带着贪图享乐的心态说:“我们吃过、享用过、喝过、受用过这样色香味触都圆满的食物。”但如果赋予它意义,说:“以前我们把这样色香味等圆满的食物、饮料、衣服、卧具、花鬘、香料布施给持戒的人,还做过塔庙供养。”这样说才是合适的。谈到亲戚等时也一样,不该带着贪著说:“我们的亲戚勇敢又能干”,或者“以前我们乘坐各种华丽的车乘到处游玩”。但如果赋予它意义,就该说:“连那些亲戚也都已经灭尽了”,或者“以前我们把这样的鞋子布施给僧团”。谈到村庄时也一样,不该以“某个村子的居民勇敢又能干”这种方式,或者以村庄布局好坏、物产丰歉等话题,带着贪著来说。但如果赋予它意义,就可以说:“他们有信心、生起了净信”,或者“他们已经灭尽、消逝了”。谈到城镇、城市、国土时,也是同样的道理。巴利
Apica annādīsu ‘‘evaṃ vaṇṇavantaṃ gandhavantaṃ rasavantaṃ phassasampannaṃ khādimha bhuñjimha pivimha paribhuñjimhā’’ti kāmassādavasena kathetuṃ na vaṭṭati, sātthakaṃ pana katvā ‘‘pubbe evaṃ vaṇṇādisampannaṃ annaṃ pānaṃ vatthaṃ sayanaṃ mālāgandhaṃ sīlavantānaṃ adamha, cetiyapūjaṃ akarimhā’’ti kathetuṃ vaṭṭati. Ñātikathādīsupi ‘‘amhākaṃ ñātakā sūrā samatthā’’ti vā ‘‘pubbe mayaṃ evaṃ vicitrehi yānehi vicarimhā’’ti vā assādavasena vattuṃ na vaṭṭati, sātthakaṃ pana katvā ‘‘tepi no ñātakā khayaṃ gatā’’ti vā ‘‘pubbe mayaṃ evarūpā upāhanā saṅghassa adamhā’’ti vā kathetabbaṃ. Gāmakathāpi suniviṭṭhadunniviṭṭhasubhikkhadubbhikkhādivasena vā ‘‘asukagāmavāsino sūrā samatthā’’ti vā evaṃ assādavasena na vaṭṭati, sātthakaṃ pana katvā ‘‘saddhā pasannā’’ti vā ‘‘khayavayaṃ gatā’’ti vā vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Nigamanagarajanapadakathāsupi eseva nayo.
谈论女人时,也不该因为贪恋容貌、身材这些而说;应该说:“她有信心、生起净信,已经灭尽。”谈论勇士时,也不该因为贪恋而说:“有个叫欢喜友的战士很勇敢”;同样应该说:“他有信心,已经灭尽。”谈论街巷时,也不该因为贪恋而说:“某条街巷布局好、布局差,那里的人勇敢、能干”;应该说:“他们有信心、生起净信,已经灭尽。”巴利
Itthikathāpi vaṇṇasaṇṭhānādīni paṭicca assādavasena na vaṭṭati, ‘‘saddhā pasannā, khayaṃ gatā’’ti evaṃ vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Sūrakathāpi ‘‘nandimitto nāma yodho sūro ahosī’’ti assādavasena na vaṭṭati, ‘‘saddho ahosi, khayaṃ gato’’ti evameva vaṭṭati. Visikhākathāpi ‘‘asukā visikhā suniviṭṭhā dunniviṭṭhā sūrā samatthā’’ti assādavaseneva na vaṭṭati, ‘‘saddhā pasannā, khayaṃ gatā’’icceva vaṭṭati.
“瓮处论”就是码头论、汲水处论,也叫担水婢女论。这种谈论也不能带着贪著的心态说“她们端庄,能歌善舞”,而应该按“有信、已净信”这样的方式来说。“先亡亲族论”是指谈论已经去世的亲属。在这里,判断标准和谈论还在世的亲属是一样的。巴利
Kumbhaṭṭhānakathāti kuṭaṭṭhānakathā udakatitthakathā vuccati, kumbhadāsīkathā vā. Sāpi ‘‘pāsādikā naccituṃ gāyituṃ chekā’’ti assādavasena na vaṭṭati, ‘‘saddhā pasannā’’tiādinā nayeneva vaṭṭati. Pubbapetakathāti atītañātikathā. Tattha vattamānañātikathāsadisova vinicchayo.
种种论:指除了前面和后面讲的那些之外,其余各种性质的无意义言论。世间传说:就是“这个世间是谁造的?是某位生主、梵天或自在天造的;乌鸦是白的,因为骨头是白的;苍鹭是红的,因为血是红的”这一类世间外道的诡辩对谈。从生起、安住、坏灭等方面来解说世间,所以叫世间传说。海洋传说:为什么叫“海”?因为被海王之子们挖过,所以叫“海”;因为用手印表示“我们挖过了”,所以叫“海洋”——这一类没有意义的海洋传说言论。巴利
Nānattakathāti purimapacchimakathāvimuttā avasesā nānāsabhāvā niratthakakathā. Lokakkhāyikāti ‘‘ayaṃ loko kena nimmito, asukena pajāpatinā brahmunā issarena vā nimmito, kāko seto aṭṭhīnaṃ setattā, bakā rattā lohitassa rattattā’’ti evamādikā lokāyatavitaṇḍasallāpakathā. Uppattiṭhitisaṃhārādivasena lokaṃ akkhāyatīti lokakkhāyikā. Samuddakkhāyikā nāma kasmā samuddo sāgaro, sāgarassa rañño puttehi khatattā sāgaro. Khato amhehīti hatthamuddāya niveditattā samuddoti evamādikā niratthakā samuddakkhāyikakathā.
所谓“有与无论”,就是讲了各种没有意义的理由之后,说出“有”或“无”这类话的谈论。在这里,“有”指常见,“无”指断见。“有”指增长,“无”指损减。“有”指欲乐,“无”指自我折磨。这样,连同这六种有无论,一共就是三十二种畜生论。另一种说法是:虽然那些关于森林、山岳、河流、岛屿的谈论在巴利圣典中没有直接以本来面目出现,但用“iti”这个词把它们收摄进来,就称为三十六种畜生论。这里的“iti”一词表示种类,“vā”一词表示选择。这话的意思是:“讲说这种类型的,或者其他类似的无意义言论。”或者,这里的“iti”一词表示开端,就像在“iti vā iti evarūpā naccagītavāditavisūkadassanā paṭivirato”(远离像这样的舞蹈、歌唱、音乐、表演观赏)等句子中那样,意思是“讲说以此为开端的其他类似言论”。巴利
Iti bhavo iti abhavoti yaṃ vā taṃ vā niratthakakāraṇaṃ vatvā pavattitakathā itibhavābhavakathā. Ettha ca bhavoti sassataṃ, abhavoti ucchedaṃ. Bhavoti vuddhi, abhavoti hāni . Bhavoti kāmasukhaṃ, abhavoti attakilamatho. Iti imāya chabbidhāya itibhavābhavakathāya saddhiṃ bāttiṃsa tiracchānakathā nāma hoti. Atha vā pāḷiyaṃ sarūpato anāgatāpi araññapabbatanadīdīpakathā iti-saddena saṅgahetvā chattiṃsa tiracchānakathāti vuccati. Iti vāti hi ettha iti-saddo pakāratthe, vā-saddo vikappatthe. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘evaṃpakāraṃ ito aññaṃ vā tādisaṃ niratthakakathaṃ kathentī’’ti. Ādiatthe vā iti-saddo ‘‘iti vā iti evarūpā naccagītavāditavisūkadassanā paṭivirato’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.10, 194) viya, evamādiṃ aññampi tādisaṃ kathaṃ kathentīti attho.
512 对于没有围墙的村落,它的近行区域应当依照“不与取”学处中所说的方式来了知。通过这句话,指出这里所说的近行区域就是第二个土块所掷及的范围。这里其余的内容都很容易理解。比丘实际在场、没有事先告知、没有获得许可的理由、在非时进入村落,这些就是这里所说的三个构成条件。巴利
512.Aparikkhittassa gāmassa upacāro adinnādāne vuttanayeneva veditabboti iminā dutiyaleḍḍupāto idha upacāroti dasseti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Santaṃ bhikkhuṃ anāpucchanā, anuññātakāraṇābhāvo, vikāle gāmappavisananti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
4. 针筒学处的注释巴利
4. Sūcigharasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
517 第四项:因为必须先破除“他有这件事”的说法,之后才能宣说,所以那件事是属于该波逸提的应破之事,称为“应破”,也就是波逸提。在这里,“有”这个意思上,应当看出有个“a”后缀。vāsijaṭa 就是刀柄。这里其余的部分都很容易理解。针筒性、骨制性、为自己而做或叫人做而获得——这就是这里的三个构成条件。巴利
517. Catutthe taṃ assa atthīti paṭhamaṃ bhinditvā pacchā desetabbattā taṃ bhedanakaṃ tassa pācittiyassa atthīti bhedanakaṃ, pācittiyaṃ. Assatthiatthe a-kārapaccayo daṭṭhabbo. Vāsijaṭeti vāsidaṇḍake. Sesamettha uttānameva. Sūcigharatā, aṭṭhimayāditā, attano atthāya karaṇaṃ vā kārāpetvā vā paṭilābhoti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.
5. 床座学处注释巴利
5. Mañcapīṭhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
522 第五学处中,“可截”就是前面所说的那样,所谓“可截”就是截断本身,因为它具有这个意义,所以称为“可截”——这里要显示的就是这个意思。其余部分在这里很容易理解。床座超过规定量,以及为了自己而做或叫人做而后获得——这些是这里的两个构成条件。巴利
522. Pañcame chedanakaṃ vuttanayamevāti chedanameva chedanakaṃ, taṃ tassa atthīti chedanakanti imamatthaṃ atidissati. Sesamettha uttānameva. Pamāṇātikkantamañcapīṭhatā, attano atthāya karaṇaṃ vā kārāpetvā vā paṭilābhoti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni.
6. 绵敷坐具学处注释巴利
6. Tūlonaddhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
526 第六学处中,“放入绵”的意思是:先在下面铺开垫布,然后在它上面放入绵。“Poṭakitūlaṃ”是指灯心草绵等任何草类做的绵。这里其余的内容都很容易理解。绵敷床座、为自己做或叫人做后得到,这是这里犯戒的两个条件。因为如果是为自己叫人做,仅仅在得到时就已经犯波逸提。正因如此,在分别中说:“得到后应当拆毁,然后忏悔波逸提。”不过有人这样说:“‘得到后应当拆毁,然后忏悔波逸提’——这里虽然看起来仅仅在得到时就犯波逸提,但应该理解成只有在使用时才犯。‘得到别人做的东西后拿来用,犯恶作’这句话,在这里可以作为依据。”但这只是他个人的看法。因为“得到别人做的东西后拿来用,犯恶作”这句话并不是针对自己叫人做的情况说的,而且这条学处是依据做和叫人做的因缘才制定为波逸提的,不是依据使用的因缘。因为在犍度中已经说过:“诸比丘,不得使用绵敷的床或座,谁使用,犯恶作。”所以,不管是自己做还是别人做,使用者只依据使用的因缘犯恶作,不犯波逸提。巴利
526. Chaṭṭhe tūlaṃ pakkhipitvāti heṭṭhā cimilikaṃ pattharitvā tassa upari tūlaṃ pakkhipitvāti attho. Poṭakitūlanti erakatūlādi yaṃkiñci tiṇajātīnaṃ tūlaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Tūlonaddhamañcapīṭhatā, attano atthāya karaṇaṃ vā kārāpetvā vā paṭilābhoti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni. Attanā kārāpitassa hi paṭilābhamatteneva pācittiyaṃ. Teneva padabhājane ‘‘paṭilābhena uddāletvā pācittiyaṃ desetabba’’nti vuttaṃ. Kenaci pana ‘‘paṭilābhena uddāletvā pācittiyaṃ desetabbanti ettha kiñcāpi paṭilābhamatteneva pācittiyaṃ viya dissati, paribhogeyeva āpatti daṭṭhabbā. ‘Aññena kataṃ paṭilabhitvā paribhuñjati, āpatti dukkaṭassā’ti vacanaṃ ettha sādhaka’’nti vuttaṃ, taṃ tassa matimattaṃ. Na hi ‘‘aññena kataṃ paṭilabhitvā paribhuñjati, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti idaṃ attanā kārāpitaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, karaṇakārāpanapaccayā ca iminā sikkhāpadena pācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ, na paribhogapaccayā. ‘‘Na, bhikkhave, tūlonaddhaṃ mañcaṃ vā pīṭhaṃ vā paribhuñjitabbaṃ, yo paribhuñjeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti hi khandhake vuttattā attanā vā kataṃ hotu aññena vā, paribhuñjantassa paribhogapaccayā dukkaṭameva, na pācittiyaṃ.
第7章 坐具学处的解释巴利
7. Nisīdanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
531 第七学处里应当说明的内容,已经在坐卧具学处中讲过了。坐具超过规定尺寸,以及为了自己而做或叫人做之后得到,这些就是这里犯戒的两项条件。巴利
531. Sattame yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ nisīdanasanthatasikkhāpade vuttameva. Nisīdanassa pamāṇātikkantatā, attano atthāya karaṇaṃ vā kārāpetvā vā paṭilābhoti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni.
537-542 第八、第九、第十学处没有别的要说的,其支分也应当依照第七学处所说的方式来了知。巴利
537-542. Aṭṭhamanavamadasamesu natthi vattabbaṃ, aṅgānipi sattameva vuttanayeneva veditabbāni.